HomeMy WebLinkAbout109014 R C HEATH - CONTRACT - BID - 5719 SOUTHRIDGE GOLF CART STORAGEa. Expansion joints between slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces shall be
premolded expansion joint filler strips.
b. Unless otherwise noted, expansion joint shall be 3/8" thick and the full
depth of the slab.
2. Premolded keyed filler strips shall be used.
3. Care shall be taken not to cause displacement or compression of the filler.
4. A joint groove shall be formed 1 " deep and 3/16" wide with a slightly tapered,
dressed and oiled wood strip tacked on top of the joint filler.
5. After curing, the wood strip shall be removed and the groove shall be sealed.
6. Joints shall be free of cracked and spelled areas and their faces shall be free of
all foreign matter, curing compound, oils, greases and dirt.
7. Masking tape or other means shall be used to avoid spilling sealer onto adjacent
concrete surfaces.
8. Any excess sealer on adjacent surfaces shall be carefully cleaned off before the
material has set and without damaging the material in the joint.
END OF SECTION
03150-2
B. Certificates: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical
and chemical tests of reinforcing steel and post -tensioning strands, if requested by the
Structural Engineer.
1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of closing of forms and/or
placing concrete so that inspection of reinforcement in place can be made. Do not
cover any reinforcement with formwork or concrete until reinforcement has been
checked and approval given to proceed with formwork and/or concreting operations.
B. Testing of reinforcing welds and splices will be as specified in Section 01410.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to
bar schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating.
Store bars off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings.
B. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcement is in
place, it shall be protected by suitable covering.
C. Protect exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions by suitable
covering, if applicable.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Bars: ASTM A615-82, 60 KSI grade, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as
indicated on the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond -reducing coatings.
1 . Ties, stirrups and field bent bars, #3 or smaller, may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI
grade.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish,
welded intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall
only be permitted when approved by the Structural Engineer.
C. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold -drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82.
D. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, Fiber Mesh 1, Fiber Mesh,
Inc., Chattanooga, TN, or equal.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers,
chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and
supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of
reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-metallic devices are
not acceptable.
B. For concrete slab -on -grade use supports i
9 pports with sand plates or horizontal runners where
wetted base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete briquettes for support of
reinforcement for slabs -on -grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper
height.
C. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with
forms, provide supports with legs that are hot -dipped galvanized, plastic protected or
stainless steel protected.
0241.02 03200-2
(`
L
D. Wire Ties: Wire for tying shall be annealed, cold -drawn wire of at least 16-gage.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions with
fabrication tolerance complying with ACI 315. Cold bend bars in a manner which will
not injure material.
B. Straightening or rebending at site will not be permitted for bars over 40 KSI yield
strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
. 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225.
If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not
strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with
work of this Section.
3.02 SPLICES
A. Splices not shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Lapped splices shall be securely wired together. Minimum laps shall be in accordance
with requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 301-72 and as shown on the Drawings. Offset
vertical lap splices at least one bar diameter.
C. Lapped splices for welded wire fabric shall be made so that overlap of outermost wires
is not less than one full mesh. Lace splices together with 16-gage wire.
3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL
A. Prior to placing into position, thoroughly clean reinforcement of mill and excessive rust,
scale, dust, mud, oil, ice and all other deleterious coating which may destroy or reduce
bond.
B. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the "Manual of
Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", ACI 315, ACI 301 and
ACI 318.
C. Accurately place and support reinforcing steel with chairs, bar supports, spacers or
hangers as recommended by ACI detailing manual except in slab -on -grade work.
Support bars in slabs -on -grade and footings with approved accessories.
D. Place reinforcing bars to a tolerance of +/- 1/4", except that minimum spacings
between bars shall be to a tolerance of +/- 1/4". Bars may be moved as necessary to
avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduit or embedded items. The
Architect/Engineer's approval must be obtained prior to moving bars under these
circumstances.
E. Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete.
F. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection
shown on the Drawings and specified. Do not place reinforcement with additional
concrete cover unless expressly approved by the Structural Engineer.
G. Install dowels before any concrete is placed. Locate column dowels accurately with aid
of template before concrete starts to set.
0241.02
03200-3
H. Steel reinforcing bars shall run continuous through cold joints.
3.04 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC
A. Welded wire fabric shall be placed 2" below slab surface or as indicated on the
Drawings and shall not be permitted to be placed on subgrade prior to concrete
placement and hooked into position. Reinforcement shall be fully supported at required
elevation prior to concrete placement. Use continuous chairs or support bars in
structural slabs to maintain proper locations as shown on the Drawings.
1. Install welded wire fabric using full sheets as large as possible. Lap adjoining
pieces as specified herein. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
3.05 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING
A. Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
1. 1-1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing materials shall be placed in quantities, sizes and spacing as shown on the
Drawings and/or as scheduled herein:
1. Reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric shall be installed where shown or
scheduled on the Drawings.
2. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed in all poured -in -place concrete flatwork,
including exterior concrete drives, apron pavements and curb and gutter
sections, sidewalks, etc., regardless of whether these already are reinforced
with steel or wire materials.
3. Fiber reinforcing is not required in footings, foundation walls, grade beams and
piers.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 03200-4
SECTION 03300
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Furnish and install cast -in -place concrete for footings, foundations, slabs -on -grade and
any other concrete work required but not itemized.
B.
Furnish and place granular sub -base under slabs -on -grade.
C.
Furnishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of
slabs.
D.
Furnishing and placing joint materials.
E.
Furnish and install cast -in concrete accessories, unless arranged for otherwise.
F.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01410, Testing.
2. Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
4. Section 02513, Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
5. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
6. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
7. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement.
8. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
9. Section 07130, Waterproofing.
10. Section 07210, Building Insulation.
11. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation
12. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
13. Division 15, Mechanical.
14. Division 16, Electrical.
1
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Reference Standards: Except as modified or supplemented in these Specifications,
structural concrete shall meet the requirements of the following standards. Refer to the
standards for detailed requirements.
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings".
2. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforcing Concrete".
4. ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and
Placing Concrete".
5. ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
6. ASTM C94, "Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete".
s
l
7. ASTM C33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates".
8. ASTM C150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement".
f
f
9. ASTM C494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete".
t
10. ASTM C618, "Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
"
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete".
11. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
0241.02 03300-1
B. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall have in place a quality
assurance program to monitor the composition of the ready -mixed concrete provided for
this project. The quality assurance program shall detail:
1. Quality and types of aggregates, cement, mineral admixtures, chemical
admixtures and water.
2. Batching of these materials, including properties of the batched mix(es).
3. Delivery and placement requirements for the batched mix(es)•
4. Regular contractor monitoring and testing of batched materials.
C. Contractor shall maintain a copy of ACI SP-15-72, "Field Reference Manual" in the field
office at all times.
D. Contractor shall employ an experienced and competent foreman for all concrete work.
The foreman shall be thoroughly familiar with all phases of concrete construction,
including formwork. Upon request submit records of qualifications and experience of
the foreman to the Architect.
E. All concrete work which does not conform to specified requirements, including
strength, tolerances and finishes, shall be corrected or removed and replaced as
directed by the .Architect/Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall
also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or
resulting from correction to concrete work and for any additional testing of work in
place which may be required.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design(s) in accordance with ACI 304 for approval
by the Architect/Engineer. Submit written design mix reports for each class of concrete
at least fifteen (15) days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report:
1 . Project identification.
2. Concrete class.
3. Specified properties for concrete.
4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement.
5. Cement type and brand.
6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures.
7. Proportions of concrete mixed per cubic yard.
8. Test results for each property specified for design mix.
9. Unit weight.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation
instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming
accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, color additives and
concrete stains, sealers, hardener and finishing compounds.
C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Submit for review by the Architect/Engineer in
accordance with paragraph 1.02.8.
D. Certificates:
1 . Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates.
2. Certification of appropriate use for hardening and sealing products, as specified
in paragraph 2.05.
E. Contractor shall retain for Architect/Engineer's review, if requested all delivery tickets
for each load delivered to the site. Tickets shall show truck number, concrete strength, }
cement brand and type, cement content, water content (also expressed as
water/cement ratio), amount of course aggregate and fine aggregate, name and amount
of admixture, number of yards delivered, time of arrival at site and mixing time.
0241.02 03300-2
1.04 INSPECTION
A. Provide free access for the Architect/Engineer to locations where concrete materials are
stored, proportioned or mixed. Do not place concrete until forming and reinforcing for a
given pour has been approved by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Provide minimum 24 hours advance notice for inspection to the Architect/Engineer, but
ensure that forming and reinforcing are substantially complete at the time of
notification.
1.05 TESTING
A. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing
agent approved by the Architect. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General
and Supplementary Conditions.
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with the appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed concrete mix design to the inspection and testing firm for review prior
to commencement of work.
D. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control
during the placement of concrete, as follows:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C94.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; one (1) test for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, one (1) test each set of compres-
sive test specimens, or when the indication of change requires.
4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; one (1) set of four (4) standard
cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed.
5. Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field -cured test
specimens as specified in ASTM C31.
E. Compressive Strength Tests:
1 . ASTM C39: One (1) set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each mix
design placed in any one day, or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed;
one (1) specimen tested at seven (7) days, two (2) specimens tested at 28
days, and one (11 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
2. When the frequency of testing will provide less than three (3) strength tests for
a given mix design, conduct testing from at least five (5) randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than three (3) are used.
3. Report test results in writing to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer,
Contractor and ready -mix supplier on the same day that tests are made.
Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, the name of contractor, name of
the concrete supplier and truck number, name of the concrete testing service,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength and type of break for both seven-day tests and
28-day tests.
4. The testing agency will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test
results indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not
been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The
testing agency shall conduct tests to determine the strength and other
characteristics of the in -place concrete by compression tests on cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C42, by load testing specified in ACI 318 or other
0241.02 03300-3
acceptable non-destructive testing methods, as directed. The Contractor shall
pay for this additional testing.
F. Slump Test: One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
G. Test hourly when air temperature is 40' F and below, and when 800 F and above and
each time a set of compression test specimens are made.
1.06 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total
air content outside the specified values.
B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory -cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory
if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive compressive strength tests results
equal or exceed the 28-day design compressive strength of the type or class of
concrete and no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength
by more than 500 psi.
C. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the
concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject
to additional testing as herein specified or removal and replacement of the concrete
which the test represents.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination
and warehouse set.
B. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other
materials or other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each
aggregate stockpile.
C. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid
admixtures from freezing or harmful temperature ranges.
D. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the
concrete is completely placed.
1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1 . Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow, unless adequate protection is
provided. Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or damage the
surface finish.
B. Hot Weather Concreting:
1. Refer to ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting".
2. Take precautions when the ambient air temperature is 900 F or above.
Temperature of concrete when placed shall not exceed 851 F.
3. Cool forms and reinforcing to a maximum of 901 F by spraying with water prior
to placing concrete.
4. Do not use cement that has reached a temperature of 2700 F or more. )
5. Do not place concrete when the evaporation rate (actual or anticipated) equals
or exceeds 0.20 pounds per sq. ft. per hour. j
6. Approved set -retarding and water -reducing admixtures may be used with the
Architect/Engineer's approval when ambient air temperature is 90' F or above to
offset the accelerating effects of high temperatures.
0241.02 03300-4
1.09 WARRANTIES
A. Provide Installer's written warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and
subgrade failure for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. Owner's Principal
Representative shall determine needs for repairs or replacement, and his/her decision
shall be final and obligatory upon the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Use only one (1) brand of cement in any
individual structure.
B. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33.
C. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone
conforming to ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes.
D. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other
deleterious substances.
E. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer.
1. Air -Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR,
Sika AER, Grace Darex AEA, Protex, or equal.
2. Non -Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E.
3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D.
4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-
Lith, Grace WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete, or equal.
5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
6. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are specifically
prohibited.
7. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and paragraph 3.02 of this Section.
2.02 NON -SHRINK GROUT
A. Provide premixed, factory -packaged non -shrink, non-metallic grouting compounds
specified in Section 05120.
2.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENTS
A. Provide an aqueous phase, film forming, freeze -thaw resistant compound suitable for
brush or spray application, complying with Military Specification MIL-B-19235.
1. Chem Master Polyweld, Grace Daraweld-PBA, Larson Weldcrete, Euclid
Eucoweld, Protex Proweld-D, or equal.
B. Provide a two -component all-purpose epoxy bonding agent for structural repair or
corrections.
1. Protex Probond ET-150, Sika Colma-Dur, or equal.
2.04 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
` A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 03100.
B. Miscellaneous Cast -in -Place Accessories: Refer to Section 03250.
C. Fiber Reinforcing: Polypropylene fiber reinforcing, specified in Section 03200.
0241.02 03300-5
2.05 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
A. Provide moisture -retaining cover of waterproof sheet materials complying with ASTM
C171, Type I or Type II, polyethylene sheeting complying with AASHO M-171,
polyethylene coated burlap,
or
B. Provide membrane -forming curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type I,
specified below. Where used, curing compound must be compatible with applied
finishes.
2.06 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS
A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the schedule below for applications.
Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or
furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the
following criteria:
1 . Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified.
2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure.
3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use of space.
4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat
or other deleterious material.
B. Liquid Water -Based Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing: Kure-N-Seal W by Sonneborne or
equal.
1. Color: Clear.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Sonneborne Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434.
1. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL, and represented locally by The Rio Grande
Co., Denver, CO, (303) 825-2211.
3. L.M. Scofield Company, Los Angeles, CA, (800) 800-9900, represented locally
by Conrep West, Englewood, CO, (303) 740-7787.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and
performance are acceptable, except as limited above.
2.07 UNDER -SLAB MATERIALS
A. Granular Sub -Base: 3/8" to 3/4" gravel or crushed rock, extent and thickness as shown
on the Drawings.
B. Vapor Barrier: Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION
A. Notify any trades that may have items to be embedded in concrete, or that may require
openings in concrete, of placing schedule. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of
concrete and to avoid delays in the work. This work may include, but is not limited to:
1. Miscellaneous metals specified in Section 05999.
2. Mechanical work specified in Division 15.
3. Electrical work specified in Division 16.
0241.02 03300-6
B.
Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and
standing or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not
deposit concrete against frozen ground.
C.
Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing
under detrimental weather conditions.
D.
Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing of any concrete. Do not
deposit any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has inspected reinforcement and
other work in place and given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission
to proceed shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper
placement of reinforcement and placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence
to other requirements of the Construction Documents.
E.
Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this
Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100.
F.
Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225.
If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not
strictly conform to this requirement, advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding
j
with work of this Section.
G.
Ensure that form inserts for all exposed edges and corners requiring chamfers are
properly placed, as specified in Section 03100.
H.
Ensure that sleeves and other site items to be installed under concrete work are
properly located and installed, as specified in other Sections.
3.02 DESIGN MIXES
- . A.
Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Drawings or specified herein for specific
locations.
B.
Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall
be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect/Engineer.
C.
Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all
parts of the work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without
excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by
these Specifications and the Contract Documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a
mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around
reinforcements by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work.
D.
Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each
class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense.
E.
Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or
proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete.
F.
Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory -cured
cylinders will be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Refer to
paragraph 1 .05 for testing requirements.
G.
Concrete Mixes:
1 . Class II: For walls and grade beams, 3,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type
cement/cubic yard (minimum), maximum aggregate size 3/4", 2" to 4" slump,
air entrained 5% to 7%.
2. Class III: For interior slabs, 4,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type
cement/cubic yard (minimum), 3" to 4" slump, air entrained 4% to 6%,
fibermesh.
3. Class IV: For exterior flatwork, 4,000 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacks of Type 11
Portland cement/cubic yard, 3" to 4" slump, 5% to 7% air entrainment,
fibermesh.
0241.02 03300-7
B.
Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and
standing or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not
deposit concrete against frozen ground.
C.
Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing
under detrimental weather conditions.
D.
Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing of any concrete. Do not
deposit any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has inspected reinforcement and
other work in place and given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission
to proceed shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper
placement of reinforcement and placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence
to other requirements of the Construction Documents.
E.
Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this
Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100.
F.
Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225.
If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not
strictly conform to this requirement, advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding
with work of this Section.
G.
Ensure that form inserts for all exposed edges and corners requiring chamfers are
properly placed, as specified in Section 03100.
H.
Ensure that sleeves and other site items to be installed under concrete work are
properly located and installed, as specified in other Sections.
3.02 DESIGN MIXES
A.
Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Drawings or specified herein for specific
locations.
B.
Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall
be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect/Engineer.
C.
Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all
parts of the work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without
excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by
these Specifications and the Contract Documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a
mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around
reinforcements by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work.
D.
Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each
class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense.
E.
Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or
proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete.
F.
Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory -cured
cylinders will be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Refer to
paragraph 1 .05 for testing requirements.
G.
Concrete Mixes:
1 . Class II: For walls and grade beams, 3,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type I
cement/cubic yard (minimum), maximum aggregate size 3/4", 2" to 4" slump,
air entrained 5% to 7%.
2. Class III: For interior slabs, 4,000 psi (minimum), 5.5 sacks of Type
cement/cubic yard (minimum), 3" to 4" slump, air entrained 4% to 6%,
fibermesh.
3. Class IV: For exterior flatwork, 4,000 psi (minimum), 6.0 sacks of Type II
Portland cement/cubic yard, 3" to 4" slump, 5% to 7% air entrainment,
'
fibermesh.
0241.02 03300-7
H. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all
requirements specified for each concrete mix and used successfully on previous
projects under conditions similar to those anticipated on this project may be used,
providing the following are submitted for the Architect/Engineer's approval for each
class of concrete:
1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results.
2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of seven and 28 day concrete strength
test made during the last six (6) months and the calculations of standard
deviation for these tests.
3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last
six (6) months.
4. Mix submittals and required statistical strengths shall be in accordance with ACI
301.
I. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200.
3.03 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING
A. Ready -mixed batch plant equipment and facilities must comply with the requirements of
ACI 614 and ASTM C94. The plant must have sufficient capacity to produce and
deliver concrete of specified qualities in quantities required to meet the construction
schedule.
B. Site -mixed concrete will not be permitted. Measure mix and deliver concrete in
accordance with ASTM C94, except as specified herein.
C. All concrete not placed within 90 minutes of initial contact of cement and water shall
be rejected.
D. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited. Obtain the Archi-
tect/Engineer's approval for any addition of water. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible water/cement ratio or maximum slump under any circumstances.
3.04 PREPARATION OF INSERTS, EMBEDDED ITEMS AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other work to
be embedded in and passing through concrete members.
B. Coordinate work of other Sections and cooperate with trades involved in forming and
setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts.
C. Accurately position and securely fasten all anchor bolts, castings, steel shapes, conduit,
sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials to be embedded in the concrete.
D. Install conduits between reinforcing steel in walls or slabs with reinforcing in both faces
and below reinforcing in slabs with only one (1) layer of reinforcing steel.
E. Embedments shall be clean when installed. Remove concrete spatter from all surfaces
not in contact with concrete.
3.05 PLACING UNDER -SLAB MATERIALS
A. Granular Sub -Base: Place a minimum of 4" (200mm) of gravel over compacted sub- t
base, level and compact thoroughly, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Transit -mixed concrete shall be truck -mixed in accordance with "Specification for
Ready -Mixed Concrete", ASTM C94-67.
0241.02 03300-8
r
L.
B. Concrete shall have a temperature of 700 F +/- 200 F at the time of placing, unless
prior permission has been granted in writing by the Architect/Engineer to exceed these
tolerances.
C. Transport the concrete from mixer to final position as rapidly as practical without
segregation, contamination or loss of material. Maximum not -to -exceed from
introduction of water to placement of concrete is 90 minutes. Place concrete in forms
with drop chutes, baffles or other methods which will prevent segregation. Comply
with the requirements of ACI 614.
1. Contractor shall assess the placement requirements of the site, construction
staging and other factors, and provide concrete pumping equipment for concrete
placement as may be necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Concrete foundation structures shall be placed on undisturbed, clean surfaces free from
frost, ice, mud, standing or running water.
E. Ensure that hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris have been
removed from the interior of the forms and all hardened concrete and foreign materials
have been removed from the inner surfaces of the mixing and conveying equipment.
Forms shall be wetted, oiled or treated with an approved form -coating material prior to
placing concrete. Reinforcement shall be cleaned, secured in position, inspected and
approved by the Architect/Engineer before starting the pouring of concrete.
F. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position so as
to avoid rehandling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing the forms or
reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring.
G. Place concrete in horizontal layers not more than 24" thick, unless otherwise required
by specific conditions of the work. Place successive layers at such speed so that the
preceding layer is still plastic.
H. Immediately after depositing, the concrete shall be compacted to force out all air
pockets, working the mixture into corners, around reinforcement and inserts and
prevent the formation of voids. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading or rodding.
Do not over -vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther apart than the visible
effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to set.
1. Mechanical vibrators need not be used for thrust restraints.
2. When vibrating is not practical, concrete shall be consolidated and all faces well
spaced by continuous working with a suitable tool in a manner acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Complete finishing operation within 24 hours after stripping forms. Patch repairable
defective areas immediately after form removal.
B. Subgrade Surfaces: Rough form finish is acceptable on all subgrade surfaces, except as
indicated otherwise. Patch all defective areas.
1. Honeycombing or spillage through forms shall be repaired or replaced as
specified below in this section.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS
A. Joint Materials: Refer to Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, and paragraph 2.04 of
this Section.
0241.02 03300-9
B. General: Locate and install construction joints which are not shown on the Drawings so
as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In general, locate near
the middle of the span of slabs, beams and grade beams, unless a beam intersects a
girder at this point. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for joint locations.
C. Pour floor slabs in pattern indicated on the Drawings. Form control joints and place
expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case exceed the following
requirements:
1. Control joints shall be spaced at 15'-0" maximum intervals each way so as not
to encompass an area to exceed 225 sq. ft., or other spacing and pattern(s) as
shown on the Drawings, or as required by the Soils Report.
2. Place control joints at internal corners, columns or other points of natural
weakness.
D. Before depositing new concrete, remove all laitance and loose aggregates immediately
before placing fresh concrete. Dampen but do not saturate the joint surface. At slabs
and beams, apply a neat cement grout.
E. Expansion or Isolation Joints: Where expansion joints are indicated on the Drawings,
place filler strips to within 1 /2" of finished surface. Joint recess shall be formed with a
separate removable filler section to provide a clean, true recess to receive sealant as
specified in Section 07900.
F. Interior Construction and Control Joints: Keyed construction joints shall be formed with
prefabricated joint materials and shall adhere to the control joint pattern shown.
1 . Refer to the Drawings for special control joint patterns.
G. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings, provide minimum two (2) layers 15#
non -bituminous felt bond breaker between interior or exterior slabs -on -grade and
vertical wall surfaces.
3.09 FINISHING FLATWORK
A. General: Verify all flatwork finishes with the Architect in the field prior to proceeding
with this work.
B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel
finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding and consolidating
concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when
surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit
operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats
or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level
surface plane to required tolerance. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly
slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to
view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient
flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel
finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface
produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate the
concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in
texture and appearance, with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1 /8" in 10' when
tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph
through applied floor coverings system.
D. Non -Slip Broom Finish: After completion of floated finish, draw a broom or a burlap
belt transversely across the surface perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use broom
finish after floating for surfaces to receive topping or cementious finishes. Coordinate
final texture with the Architect prior to application.
0241.02 03300-10
E. Slab Finish Schedule:
1. Interior Floor Slabs: Troweled finish.
2. Exterior Sidewalks, Slabs and Ramps: Non -slip broom finish.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain the following tolerances for all cast -in -place concrete work. Defective work
shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
1. Variation from Plumb:
a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum.
b. 20' or More: 3/8" maximum.
2. Variation in Thickness: 1 /4" to 1 /2" standard, 5% for footings.
3. Variation in Grade:
a. 0-10': 1 /4" standard, 1 /8" for floor slabs.
b. 10-20': 3/8" standard, 1 /4" for floor slabs.
C. 40' or More: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for floor slabs.
4. Variation in Plan:
a. 0-20': 1 /2".
b. 40' or More: 3/4" standard, + 1 /2" for footings.
5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings.
6. Variation in Openings:
a. Size: + 1 /8".
b. Location: 1 /4".
B. Slab Tolerances:
1. Interior Floor Slabs: 1/8" in 10'.
2. Exterior Sidewalks, Slabs and Ramps: 1 /4" in 10'.
3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a
period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening.
B.
Refer to Section 03100 for stripping and removal of formwork after curing.
C.
Refer to the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for curing of
concrete slabs -on -grade to receive stains, sealers or other special finishes.
D.
Start curing immediately after finishing. Cure for at least seven (7) days, not
necessarily consecutive, during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above
500 F. Wood forms shall be kept wet. If forms are removed during curing period, an
approved curing method must be started immediately.
E.
Cure slabs by approved moisture -retaining coverings, lapped and sealed, and kept
continuously wet. Approved curing compounds may be used if compatible with
specified finishes. Specific approval is required from the Architect/Engineer. Curing
compounds shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from
vandalism, accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from
subgrade settlement or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to
restrict traffic in the area of fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete
L
shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner's discretion.
G.
Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist.
Temperature of concrete when placed shall be less than 901 F. When necessary to
prevent premature drying, arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog
spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet covering of light color shall be made in advance
0241.02
03300-1 1
of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete
hardening and finishing operations will allow.
H. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When
atmospheric temperature is 400 F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less
than 500 F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before
concrete placing for heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain
specified temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of
heat.
I. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall
be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one (1) hour or 50' F in any
24-hour period.
3.12 SEALING AND FINISH APPLICATIONS
A. General: Consult with the manufacturer's representative prior to application. Follow
the manufacturer's printed instructions for applying materials.
B. Schedule of Exterior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete
curing, sealing and hardening products for exterior concrete in accordance with the
following schedule:
1. Concrete not Scheduled for Other Finishes: Kure-N-Seal.
C. Schedule of Interior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete
curing, sealing and hardening products for interior floor slabs in accordance with the
following schedule. Refer to paragraph 2.06 for certification of appropriate use.
1 . Slabs to Receive No Flooring: Kure-N-Seal.
D. Application Process: Apply curing, hardening and sealing products in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
E. Apply materials only after concrete surfaces are completely cured and dry. Follow the
manufacturer's recommended application instructions, generally applying it in three (3)
coats with ample drying time between coats. Remove surplus hardener after final
application has dried.
3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE APPLICATIONS
A. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on the Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment
to template at correct elevations. Comply with certified diagrams or templates of the
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. Items include but are not limited to:
1 . Fuel tanks.
2. Electrical transformers. Coordinate sizes of transformer bases and other
equipment with the governmental agency or utility having jurisdiction.
B. Site Concrete Work: Provide miscellaneous site cast -in -place concrete items as detailed
on the Drawings or specified herein, to include but not be limited to:
1 . Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Specified in Section 02515.
3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and g
elevation as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and
other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except
upon express direction of the Architect.
0241.02 03300-12
t
i
4
C. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at
the Owner's discretion.
3.15 PATCHING AND POINTING
A. Patch and point all vertical and horizontal formed concrete surfaces where exposed to
view, as defined in paragraph 3.07.
B. Fill holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,
unless otherwise shown or directed, after such work is in place.
C. Mix, place and cure concrete to blend with in -place construction.
D. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Exposed cast -in -place concrete work shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of
the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1. Slab finishes specified in paragraph 3.09.
2. Tolerances specified in paragraph 3.10.
3. Wall and corner surfaces, including patching and pointing specified in paragraph
3.14.
4. Joint materials and placement.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 03300-13
SECTION 04100
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install mortar and grout materials for new brick masonry units.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 04210, Brick Masonry.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards listed.
1. ASTM, American Society of Testing and Materials.
2. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
3. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
4. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
5. ASTM C270, Mortar Mix.
6. PCA, current edition.
7. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications for each type of
mortar specified, including certification that each type complies with the specifications.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of mortar colors for selection
by the Architect.
C. Sample Panel: Refer to Section 04210 for sample panel requirements. Mortar color
shall be reviewed for approval by the Architect.
1.04 TESTING
A. Inspection and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory,
approved by the Architect, conforming to ASTM E149 and C270. Testing fees shall
be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. Test samples shall
be taken at random to provide sampling over the course of work. Materials not
conforming to these specifications shall be removed from the job and replaced.
1. Refer to Section 04210 for testing requirements.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70° F and 1000 F.
B. Contractor shall use only one type ype mortar to ensure uniform color. Masonry cement
i • is not permitted.
04100-1
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, white.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for new construction.
C. Aggregate Sand: ASTM C144.
D. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, less than 3/8".
E. Water: ASTM C270, clean and suitable for domestic consumption.
F. Mortar Coloring:
1. Match color of brick masonry, at existing clubhouse.
G. Admixtures: Pozzolan with approval; calcium chloride not permitted.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar Mixes: ASTM C270, Type S mortar with hydrated lime for all new masonry
construction. Minimum compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 28 days:
1. 1 part Portland Cement, Type 1.
2. 1 /4 to 1 /2 part hydrated lime.
3. 2-1/4 to 3-1/2 parts damp, loose sand.
B. Mixtures may change as per manufacturer's recommendations to meet requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Masonry installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be
installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the masonry installer.
3.02 BATCH CONTROL
A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required
proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained.
B. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of five (5) minutes in a mechanical batch mixer.
Do not use mortar which has begun to set or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed
since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore
workability.
C. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80' F, and 2-1/2 hours
at temperatures under 50° F.
3.03 JOINTS
I
A. General: Lay units with 3/8" joints, unless otherwise indicated, except for min(,, -
variations required to maintain bond alignment.
B. Bond Pattern and Joint Ty
pe: Refer to Section 04210.
C. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown.
D. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work.
E. Point out or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work.
0241.02 04100-2
1.09 CONTRACTOR OVERHEAD AND PROFIT
A. General: Allowable limits to the Contractor's and Subcontractors' mark-ups on Change
Orders shall be as established in the Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS
A. Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each
change as a separate item of work and to record the adjusted Contract Sum.
B. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time.
1 . Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the
changes.
C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record
Documents.
END OF SECTION
01027-4
F. Clean soiled surfaces using a non -acidic solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces.
Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.
END OF SECTION
04100-3
SECTION 04210
BRICK MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install brick masonry veneer, including mortar, ties, anchors and
accessories.
B. Furnish and install brick masonry reinforcing, complete with required supports and
related accessories.
C. Furnish and install flexible masonry flashings and create weepholes in veneer and/or
composite wall construction.
D. Install all bolts, nailing blocks, inserts, door frames, conduits and other related work
furnished by others to be built into brick masonry.
E. Clean new brick masonry and remove surplus material and waste.
F. Furnish and apply sealer.
G. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 04100, Mortar.
2. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
3. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
4. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of
standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified.
1. ANSI A-41.1: Building Code Requirements for Masonry.
2. ASTM C216, American Society of Testing and Materials.
3. Uniform Building Code, Current Edition.
r 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit a minimum of six (6) samples of each type, size and color of brick unit
specified for approval before delivery to the project. Samples shall show shape, size
and kind in sufficient number to show full range of color and texture. Final approval
shall be by the Architect. One (1) color and size shall be used throughout the project.
B. Sample Panel: Erect minimum 4'-0" x 4'-0" sample panel consisting of approved brick
masonry that satisfactorily shows proposed color range, texture, bond, mortar and
workmanship, including special coursing such as soldier courses, rowlocks, or corbels.
1 . Contractor shall not continue work until Architect and Owner's representative
have accepted sample panel.
2. Sample panel shall remain on site until work of this Section is complete and will
be used as standard of comparison for balance of work.
r 3. Sample panel may be constructed as a art of the L - P permanent building
construction if approved by the Architect.
0241.02 04210-1
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep masonry units completely
covered and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle masonry carefully to avoid chipping,
breakage, contact with soil or contaminating materials. Protect steel materials from
moisture and keep free from rust or scale. Store mortar materials in dry place.
Damaged material shall not be used.
B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by
construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 501 F prior to, during
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. During freezing or near -freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to
maintain a minimum temperature of 500 F and to protect masonry work completed or in
progress.
C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather when work is not in progress by
covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non -staining membrane. Extend
membrane at least 2' down both sides of walls and anchor security in place.
D. Walls which may be exposed to high winds during erection shall be adequately braced
until permanent support is provided at floor or roof level immediately above the story
under construction.
E. Hot Weather Masonry Installation:
1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog
spray of mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent
premature drying of mortar.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
t
A. Brick Masonry: ASTM C216, Grade 500, Type FBS.
1. Size: Normal 2-3/8" high x 8" long face dimension x 3-5/8" deep modular
veneer units.
2. Style and Color: To match existing clubhouse and as approved by the Architect.
3. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks,
chips or deleterious matter. Representative sample in sample panel subject to
approval by Architect.
4. Special shapes as shown on the Drawings.
5. Texture: Smooth.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Robinson Brick Company, Denver, CO, (303)744-3371.
2. Denver Brick Company, Denver, CO, (800)332-7724. )
L,
3. Summit Brick and Tile, Denver, CO, (303)592-7080.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, appearance, quality, E
performance and range of selection, including matching the selected product(s) G _
specified above in the sole opinion of the Architect, are acceptable.
0241.02 04210-2
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHORS AND TIES
A. General: Corrosion -resistant metal meeting or exceeding applicable standards ASTM
A153 and ASTM A116.
B. Horizontal Reinforcing Types:
Truss Type for Single Wythe Masonry: Prefabricated welded wire units not less than
10'-0" long, with matching corner and tee units. Wire shall be 9-gage, with single pair
of deformed side rods and continuous plain diagonal cross rods spaced not more than
16" o.c.
C. Veneer Ties: Standard 7/8" x 6-3/4" long, 18-gage galvanized corrugated sheet or 9-
gage wire wall ties.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL, and distributed locally at Denver, CO.,
(303) 321-1836.
2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL., (800) 621-4140.
3. Manufacturers providing products of same performance and function are
acceptable.
2.03 BRICK MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Flexible Masonry Flashings: Non -reinforced homogenous, waterproof elastomeric
sheeting, 20 mil minimum thickness.
1. Tensile Strength: 2200 psi, minimum, STM D412.
2. Elongation: 250%, minimum, ASATM D412.
3. Minimum Puncture Resistance: 200 lbs. minimum.
4. Flashing shall retain flexibility to a temperature of -20°F minimum.
5. Materials and adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the
particular application.
6. Approved Manufacturer: Vi-Seal Plastic Flashing by AFCO Products, Inc.,
Somerville, MA, (800) 397-2687, or approved equal.
B. Control Joints:
1. Non -asphaltic -type foam backer rod by Celotex or equal. Thicknesses as shown
on the Drawings.
2. Sealants specified in Section 07900.
2.04 SEALER
A. Clear Masonry Sealer: Refer to Section 07180, Water Repellant Sealers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION, COORDINATION AND WORKMANSHIP
i A. Ensure that items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized.
B. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place brick masonry
t . in accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings.
C. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal
and of uniform thickness.
D. Ensure that minimum 1 " air space between masonry veneer units and wall sheathing is
maintained.
E. Chases and recesses shall be built-in and not cut -in. Provide not less than 16" of
0241.02 04210-3
masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases
and recesses.
F. Unfinished masonry walls shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Do not
tooth.
G. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the work of
other Sections, shall be done by masonry mechanics with masonry saws.
H. Mask or otherwise protect doors and frames, louvers, mechanical and electrical
equipment and other miscellaneous accessories not scheduled to receive masonry
sealers prior to application of spray- or brush -applied sealers.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY FLASHING
A. General: Install masonry flashings in locations specified here in or as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Place flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
and as detailed on the Drawings.
C. Place weepholes through bottom course of composite wall masonry construction as
shown on the Drawings, but in no case to exceed 48" o.c. Form weep -holes full
height, full depth of head joints, spaced as specified. Coordinate with Architect in the
field as necessary.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BRICK UNIT MASONRY
A. Refer to Section 04100, Mortar, for installation and workmanship requirements for
mortar and grout mixes.
B. Masonry Veneer: Install galvanized corrugated wall ties anchored to wood stud framing
as shown on the Drawings at the following maximum spacing:
1. Vertically: 16" o.c.
2. Horizontally: 24" o.c.
C. Lay masonry veneer units offset on foundation wall or brick ledge as required to
maintain minimum 1 " air space between masonry units and wall sheathing.
1. Keep air space free from excess mortar. f
D. Lay, level and align corner units first. Lay brick masonry in running bond, unless ! .
otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Course three (3) brick units and
mortar joint to equal 8" vertically. Lay external and internal courses as shown on the
Drawings.
E. Lay first course of brick masonry in full bed of mortar, except at locations of filled
cores. Lay subsequent courses in face -shell mortar bedding properly jointed with other
work. Fully mortar webs around each core to be grouted. Fully bond external and
internal corners and intersections.
F. Rowlocks, Soldier Courses: Lay units to form special coursing patterns, or build-up to
form corbels, as indicated on the Drawings.
G. Where a blend of brick colors is specified, disperse brick units in face of walls to blend
colors uniformly, to the satisfaction of the Architect. 5
H. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper power tools to provide straight,
true and unchipped edges. j
I. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace.
J. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking brick corners. i
Clean excess mortar from cores to be grouted.
K. Tooling and Joints: Refer to paragraph 3.05.
0241.02 04210-4
3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS
A. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to face shell of unit and shall be
shoved tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. Do not slush head joints.
B. Mortar protrusions extending into air space for veneer masonry shall be removed.
C. Joint width shall be 3/8", unless otherwise shown.
3.05 TOOLING
A. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for
application of caulking or sealants where required.
1. Exterior Face of Exterior Walls: Tooled concave joints.
B. Concealed Joints: Cut joints flush, unless otherwise shown, if applicable.
C. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then
tooled.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain the following tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit: 1 /32".
2. Maximum variation from vertical and horizontal building lines: 1/4".
3. Maximum variation from cross sectional thickness of walls: -/+ 1/4".
4. Maintain flush face on exposed brick surfaces.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Reinforce all walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement, unless
specifically shown otherwise. Provide special shapes where shown on the Drawings.
Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at splices.
B. At each level, place reinforcement in bed joint at regular intervals not exceeding 16"
o.c. vertically.
C. Place reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face -shell mortar beds
and are fully embedded in mortar for their entire length with minimum mortar cover of
5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1 /2" at other locations.
D. Unless otherwise shown, provide reinforcement in first and second bed joints of
composite wall construction immediately above and below openings or recesses in
walls. Reinforcement shall extend minimum 24" beyond end of sills or lintels or to end
of panel if distance to end of panel is less than 24".
E. Use only prefabricated "L" and "T" units at corners and intersections, respectively.
F. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement, unless shown on the
Drawings.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF VENEER TIES
I
lA. General: Install corrugated masonry veneer ties to solid wall sheathing or other
substrate at spacing specified in paragraph 3.03 above, unless specifically noted
otherwise on the Drawings. Place at maximum 3" o.c, each way around perimeter of
f openings, within 12" of openings.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Locate vertical control, expansion and isolation joints in brick masonry as shown on the
04210-5
Drawings. Joints shall be continuous through depth of the masonry work, unless
otherwise detailed.
B. Maintain control joint voids clear of mortar, grout and debris. Rake out mortar in
preparation for application of caulking and sealants.
C. Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints
maximum 32' o.c. for brick masonry, except as specified herein:
1 . Masonry Veneer: Locate vertical control joints in continuous runs of masonry
veneer so ratio of horizontal run to vertical height of veneer does not exceed
4:1, or maximum 20'-0", whichever is greater.
2. Masonry Veneer: Locate control joints within 16" maximum of all bonded
external corners.
3. Locate joints at points of natural weakness in supporting structure and at wall
openings.
3.10 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build -in hollow metal frames, signage, electrical and mechar,::al
accessories, anchor bolts, plates, specialties and other items supplied by others. Place
items plumb and true to line.
3.11 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and other items as required. Coope
fully with other Sections to ensure correct size, shape and location.
B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on
the Drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work.
3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: All new brick masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of the
work.
B. Adhere to the following procedures for cleaning brick. Never clean brick before mortar
has set, minimum 14 days. Use acid only for difficult cleaning cases.
1. Dry clean wall with wood paddles or scrapers, removing large particles of
mortar.
2. Presoak wall with clean water, scrub with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium
phosphate and 1 /3 cup household detergent to a gallon of water. Scrub with
a stiff fiber brush only.
3. Thoroughly rinse with clean, low-pressure water immediately after scrubbing to
remove all cleaning solution, dirt, and mortar crumbs.
4. For difficult stains, clean surface with a 6% solution of muriatic acid applied
with a stiff fiber brush to not more than 10 sq. ft. of water -soaked wall. Rinse
immediately with clean water. Clear all weepholes of loose mortar and debris.
5. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings, if specified.
C. Remove and replace any chipped or broken brick units. Remove excess mortar and
smears upon completion of masonry work. Point or replace defective mortar to match j
adjacent work.
t_
04210-6
I
3.13 APPLICATION OF MASONRY SEALER
A. Ensure that brick masonry units have been properly cleaned and dried prior to applying
sealer. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces from overspray of sealer.
B. Ensure that proper precautions are taken for handling products near sources of heat or
open flames. Wear protective clothing, goggles and gloves.
C. Prior to full application, test panels of approximately 4' x 4' shall be treated to
determine the degree of color change in the masonry and precise application
procedures.
D. Apply sealer at consistency and rate of application in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
E. Apply sealer to all exterior exposed masonry surfaces, unless otherwise noted or
scheduled to receive other finishes.
F. Clean excess sealer from brick masonry units and adjacent surfaces.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Installation of masonry units, mortar and grout, special curing and
workmanship of joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample
panel.
B. All brick masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that may
interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the
construction.
C. Where masonry units are to be exposed in the completed construction, the face or faces
that are exposed shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections to the satisfaction
of the Architect, except that chips not larger than 1 /4" will be considered acceptable.
D. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected masonry units or portions of the work
and replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel.
END OF SECTION
04210-7
SECTION 05999
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install miscellaneous fabricated items of ferrous and non-ferrous metals as
shown on the Drawings, including but not limited to:
1. Pipe bollards.
2. Steel plate jamb and head frames for steel sectional overhead doors.
3. Miscellaneous steel channels, angles, lintels, and straps, if not furnished by other
Sections.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 09900, Painting,
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY OTHERS
A. Section 02515, Portland Cement Paving: Metal fabrications cast in concrete.
B. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete: Metal fabrications cast in concrete.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform with requirements of the following standards and
codes:
1. ASTM A36: Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A307: Low -Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners,
3. ASTM A325: High -Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
4. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code.
5. FS TT-P-86: Paint, Red -Lead Base, Ready Mixed.
6. FS TT-P-645: Primer, Paint, Zinc -Chromate, Alkyd Type.
7. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for steel trench drain
system.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for expanded metal
mesh screens.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for any miscellaneous
or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal
L, fabrications not submitted under separate Sections.
_ PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: Conform to ASTM A36.
0241.02 05999-1
1. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: High -strength type recommended for structural steel
joints, ASTM A307.
2. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1.1, type required for materials being
welded.
3. Primer: Zinc -chromate alkyd FS TT-P-645.
B. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop -fabricate and assemble items in largest practical components for delivery and
installation on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop
drawings.
B. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.
C. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces.
1 . All welds exposed to view to be "Architectural Grade."
D. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate
anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication,
unless otherwise specified.
E. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to prime
painting.
F. Prime paint items for field finishing as specified in Section 09900. Do not shop -prime
surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding. Shop -prime in one (1)
coat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to
commencing work of this Section. Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies or j
conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work
until such conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions affecting the work of this Section and
coordinate fit and installation details with related trades prior to fabrication.
C. Ensure that items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry are
supplied to the site prior to concrete or masonry work, complete with necessary setting
templates.
D. Ensure that ferrous metal surfaces have been properly painted where in contact with
aluminum or other dissimilar metals as required to prevent electrolysis.
E. Pipe Bollards: Ensure that bollards have been properly located in relation to openings
in concrete, masonry or other materials or equipment to be protected by the bollards.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or equipment required by specific site
requirements, locate bollards as follows:
1 . Jambs: Centerline of bollard aligned with centerline of jamb opening, and placed
12" out from face of wall.
2. Corners: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from corner in both directions.
3. Equipment: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from edge or corner of gas i
meters, electrical transformers, pad -mounted condensing units and other
equipment. Coordinate clearance requirements with utility providers, as
applicable.
0241.02 05999-2
SECTION 01040
COORDINATION
PART GENERAL
1.01 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the overall coordination of all civil, architectural,
structural, mechanical and electrical components and systems that are a part of this
project.
1 . Coordinate components and systems prior to purchasing or fabricating.
2. Coordinate materials, equipment and fixtures supplied by various trades for
compatibility with the final installation.
B.
Coordinate all work included in the Construction Documents, including but not limited
to the following construction trades:
1. Demolition.
2. Earthwork, excavation and grading.
3. On -site utilities, including utilities designed by other jurisdictions.
4. Asphalt, Portland Cement and other hard -surface pavements.
5. Cast -in -place concrete.
6. Brick masonry.
7. Structural steel and metalwork.
8. Carpentry.
9. Building and roof insulation.
10. Roofing and flashings.
11. Doors, windows and glazing systems.
12. Painting and finishing.
13. Mechanical and plumbing systems.
14. Electrical systems.
j' C.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the Drawings and various Sections of
`
Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent
construction elements.
(` D.
Coordinate and verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are
i -
compatible with the building utilities. Interruption of utility services shall be scheduled
with and subject to the approval of the Owner seven (7) business days prior to the
interruption.
E.
Coordinate utility locates and utility designs with the City of Fort Collins and other
jurisdictions having authority over the project. Refer to Section 01060.
F.
Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. General and Supplementary Conditions: Contractor's Responsibilities.
2. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
3. Section 01050, Field Engineering.
4. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
5. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment: Substitutions.
6. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: General project coordination.
1.02 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A. Coordinate as required with the Owner for related work, as shown on the Drawings or
specified herein, to be performed by the Owner's own forces or by separate contract
01040-1
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion.
B. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
C. Replace items damaged in course of installation.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1 .1.
E. Pipe Bollards: Embed bollards minimum 24" deep into concrete piers with a minimum
dimension of 12" diameter x 36" depth below grade, unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
1. Fill bollards with concrete and form top surface smooth, dense, and flush or
slightly crowned to allow proper drainage.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Pipe Bollards: 6" o.d. steel pipe x 6'-0" long (24" embedment), concrete filled.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Channels, Angles, Lintels and Straps: Furnish under this Section,
unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Steel Sectional Overhead Door Jamb and Head Frames: As detailed on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 05999-3
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Furnish materials and labor for installation of rough carpentry, including but not limited
to:
1. Studs and joists and plates for wall, roof, ceiling and soffit framing.
2. Furring, stripping, blocking and sleepers.
3. Plywood and/or oriented strand board (OSB) wall and roof sheathing.
4. Roof crickets, curbs, blocking and plates.
5. Redwood or pressure -treated wood plates.
B.
Furnish nails, screws, bolts, fasteners, construction adhesives, and other related or
accessory materials required for a complete installation.
C.
Furnish materials and labor for installation of cedar items, including but not limited to:
1 . Fascias and miscellaneous trims.
D.
Installation of roof trusses and miscellaneous blocking and bridging.
E.
Furnish and install prefabricated wood siding and trims, unless arranged for otherwise.
F.
Furnish and install light -gage metal joist/truss connectors.
G.
Coordination of all other trades as required for a complete installation.
H.
Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
2. Section 04100, Mortar and Masonry Grout.
3. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood.
4. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
5. Section 07466, Wood Siding.
6. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
7. Division 15, Mechanical.
8. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
i
t;
A. Reference Standards: Conform with requirements of the following standards and
codes:
1. PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood.
2. PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard.
3. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for
Wood Construction.
4. APA: American Plywood Association, Plywood Specification and Grade Guide.
5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
6. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
B. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Materials shall carry the visible grade stamp of agency
certified by National Forest Products Association (NFPA).
C. Plywood panels shall be identified with APA grade trademark of the American Plywood
Association.
D. Grading of lumber shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Western Wood
Products Association.
0241.02 06100-1
E. Pressure -Treated Lumber: Pressure -treated lumber materials shall not contain
chromated copper arsenate (CCA)•
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and/or manufacturer's written
product literature for prefabricated interior wood stair systems, indicating materials,
fabrication, attachments and dimensions for each site condition required.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at job site.
B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required to be installed in the work.
C. Store on level racks and keep free of the ground to avoid warping. Stack to ensure
proper ventilation and drainage.
1.05 COMPLIANCE
A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought
onto or to be stored at the job site.
B. Promptly remove non -complying materials from the job site and replace with materials
meeting the requirements of this Section.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. Framing Lumber: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules,
maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-Dry) S4S, of the following species and
grades:
1. Structural Framing: Grades and stresses as indicated on the Structural !
Drawings.
2. Studs: Standard grade or better.
3. Non -Structural Light Framing: Douglas Fir or Hem -Fir, construction grade or
better.
4. Sill Plates: Redwood or pressure -treated Hem -Fir, where in contact with
concrete or masonry. Pressure -treated lumber shall not contain CCA.
2.02 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A. General: APA-rated softwood plywood, meeting the grading requirements of PS-1.
1. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long x thicknesses as shown
on the Drawings, r-
2. Edges:
a. Square, butt.
b. Tongue -in -groove.
B. Exterior/Interior Plywood Structural Sheathing: As specified on the Drawings.
C. Exterior Exposed Plywood: A/D, Exterior APA, for exposed soffits and sheathing.
D. Exterior Concealed Plywood: CDX, Exterior APA.
0241.02 OB 100-2
E.
Exterior Decorative Plywood: APA Texture 1-11 (T-1-11), specified in Section 07466,
Wood Siding.
F.
Exterior Plywood Siding: Refer to Section 07466.
G.
Interior Exposed Plywood: A/D, Interior APA.
H.
Approved Manufacturers:
1 • Weyerhaeuser Corp., Tacoma, WA.
2. Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404) 652-4000.
3. Manufacturers providing products of the same design, function, quality and
Performance are acceptable.
2.03 CEDAR
MATERIALS
A.
Cedar Fascias and Miscellaneous Trims (Exposed to View): Construction Heart grade or
better (no sapwood), vertical grain, unseasoned, smooth finish to be stained.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
Metal Wall Bracing: Galvanized metal "T" profile wall and corner bracing, 20-gage.
1. Ampcor "T"-Brace Series 6700 by Anderson Metal Products Co., Taylorsville,
MS, (800) 426-7267, or equal.,
B.
Nails: Size and type to suit application.
1. Framing: 8d to 12d rosin -coated box.
2. Sheathing: 8d, 2 1 /2" long box nails, zinc -coated.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application or as
indicated on the. Drawings.
1 . Medium Carbon Steel: Galvanized for exterior locations, high -humidity locations
and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations or when in contact
with concrete.
D.
Construction Adhesives: Mastic -type, multi -purpose adhesive, formulated for field -
gluing for interior or exterior use, meeting the following specifications:
1. Reference Standards:
a. APA Spec. AFG-01.
i .
b. ASTM D3498-76.
C. HUD/FHA requirements in Bulletin UM-60.
2. Type: Solvent dispersion.
E ,
3. Base: Synthetic elastomer.
4. Consistency: Approx. 200,000 cps, Brookfield viscometer.
5. Weight/Gallon: 8.8 lbs. minimum.
6. Solids content: 64% ± 2%.
7. Strength: 400 psi by ASTM D905-49 (wood to wood).
8. Aging: Retains flexibility after 500 hrs. at 300 psi and 158OF by ASTM D572-
61.
9. Water Resistance: Waterproof.
10. Application Method: Caulking gun or trowel.
11. Application Temperature: 250-120°F.
12. Service Range: -250 - + 1500F.
'
13. Material Suitability: Bonds wood, gypsum wallboard, concrete, stone, brick,
metals and polyurethane foam. Not suitable for polystyrene foam and most
plastics.
14, Approved Product and Manufacturer: M-D 400 Construction Adhesive,
manufactured by Macklanburg-Duncan, Oklahoma City, OK or equal.
0241.02 06100-3
E. Sill Plate Sealer: Preformed type.
1. Sill Seal or equal.
F. Prefabricated Continuous Soffit and Roof Vents: Specified in Section 07621,
Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
2.05 LIGHT -GAGE METAL JOIST/TRUSS CONNECTORS
A. General: Light -gage, galvanized metal hangers, clips, base and column caps, size and
type as indicated on the Drawings, as required to suit job conditions or as recommend-
ed by manufacturer for intended application.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA, (800) 999-5099.
2. Timber Engineering Co.
3. KC Metal Products Inc., San Jose, CA, (408) 436-8754.
4. Semco, Jacksonville, FL, (800) 874-0335.
5. Manufacturers providing framing connectors and accessories of same design,
function, performance and structural capabilities are acceptable.
2.06 WOOD TREATMENTS
A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on the drawings or
specified herein to be pressure -treated, comply with applicable requirements of WPA
standards C2 (lumber) and C9 (plywood). Pressure -treat items with waterborne
preservatives complying with WPA LP-2, except that in no case shall chromated copper
arsenate (CCA) be used. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of
19%. Mark each treated item with the WPA quality mark requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. General: The Contractor shall inspect the concrete foundation structures and/or
concrete flatwork that will support the rough carpentry structures associated with the
work of this project, and notify the Architect/Engineer of any condition that may affect
the structural integrity, quality or appearance of the completed project. Do not
commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the
Contractor.
B. Ensure that prefabricated roof trusses are properly sized and marked upon delivery to
the site. Check connector plate sizes for compliance with specification requirements.
C. Selection of Lumber Pieces:
1. Carefully select the members. Select individual pieces so that knots and
obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing and will
allow for proper connections.
2. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended
function.
3. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer, whether or not it has been
installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus or mold, as
well as for improper cutting and fitting, provided such defects exceed the
criteria allowed by referenced standards for the lumber grade specified. The
Contractor shall replace rejected material at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Do not shim any framing component.
0241.02 06100-4
3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. General:
1.
Erect wood framing, furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and
levels; do not deviate from true alignment more than 1 /4".
2.
Space members as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein.
3.
Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
4.
Construct and erect required built-up beams and headers.
5.
Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in
accordance with the Drawings and with applicable codes and regulations.
6.
Set horizontal and sloped members with the crown up. Crowns to be set in the
same direction for vertical or horizontal application.
7.
Make bearings full and uniform for solid support.
8.
On framing members to receive a finished surface, align the finish subsurface to
vary not more than 1 /8" from the plane of surfaces of adjacent furring and
framing members.
9.
Where scheduled, leave wood surfaces prepared for finishing specified in
Section 09900, Painting, and Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
10.
Coordinate rough openings for non -cased and trimmed doors and windows
where gypsum board returns are detailed at jambs and headers. Framed opening
shall be square and plumb to within 1 /16" vertically from floor to header at
trimmer and 1 /16" horizontally between trimmers at header.
B. Fastening:
1.
Nailing shall be in accordance with the requirements of Table 25-Q of the
Uniform Building Code, current edition, unless indicated otherwise.
a. Nail without splitting wood.
b. Prebore as required.
C. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the
specified requirements.
2.
Bolting:
a. Drill holes 1 /16" larger in diameter than the bolts being
used.
b. Drill straight and true from one side only.
C. Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use washers under head and nut
where both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
3.
Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root
of threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank.
C. Wall
Framing: Conform to the framing requirements of the jurisdiction with authority
over
this project, unless more stringent requirements are shown on the Structural
Drawings or specified herein.
1 .
Exterior Wall Framing: 2x6 stud framing at 16" o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Install let -in metal wall and corner bracing at all external corners, or as indicated
on the Drawings.
i 2.
External Corners: As shown on the Drawings for specific conditions.
3.
Jamb Framing at Openings: Triple studs at all exterior openings, unless
otherwise indicated. Studs in exterior bearing walls to provide continuous
bearing to foundation.
4.
Top Plates in Bearing Partitions: Double and lapped, stagger joints at minimum
4'-0" intervals.
5.
Headers: As shown on the Drawings. Provide built-up headers to match the
wall framing thickness, using 1 /2" plywood spacers, continuously nailed and
glued.
0241.02 06100-5
6. Sill Plates: Bolt to foundation as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Roof Framing: Conform to the framing requirements of the jurisdiction with authority
over this project, unless more stringent requirements are shown on the Structural
Drawings or specified herein.
1 . Prefabricated Roof Truss Framing: 24" o.c., or as indicated on the Drawings.
Refer to paragraph 3.04.
2. Overframing: Provide 2x6 overframing at 24" o.c., where indicated on the
Drawings or required by project conditions.
3. Miscellaneous: Provide ridge boards, valley rafters and other roof framing
components as required, one (1) size larger than rafter members unless
otherwise approved by the jurisdiction with authority over the project.
E. Firestops and Blocking: As required for code compliance.
F. Wall and Corner Bracing:
1 . Install metal "T" bracing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
at all external corners and door/window openings.
2. Cut single -saw kerf 1 /2" deep into studs and plates along line of installation.
Insert base of "T" brace in grooves and nail along the nailing grooves into each
stud and plate.
3. Nail to studs and plates with two (2) 16d or three (3) 8d nails.
4. Bend corners of bracing overtop and bottom plates.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
A. Roof Trusses:
1 . Handle trusses carefully to prevent damage or separation of members and to
maintain structural capacity.
2. Do not install damaged or broken trusses.
3. Adequately support and brace work until tied into building structure to ensure
against collapse due to wind or other forces.
4. Attach or hang trusses using specified light -gage metal hangers and other
attachments. Comply with all applicable building codes and regulations for
attachments.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING
A. Wall Sheathing:
1. Panel edges shall bear on framing members and butt along their centerlines.
Back -block panel edges which do not bear on framing members with 2" nominal
framing.
2. Place sheathing with end joints staggered, perpendicular to framing members.
3. Maintain minimum 1/16" and maximum 1/8" joint spacing.
4. Nail heads shall be flush with, but not penetrate, plywood surfaces.
B. Roof Sheathing:
1. Place sheathing with face grain perpendicular to framing members, except
where plywood diaphragm must be continuous to shear walls.
2. Place sheathing with end joints staggered.
3. Protect sheathing from moisture until roofings are installed.
4. Install prefabricated continuous roof vents in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and recommendations, unless arranged for otherwise. `
a. Refer to the Drawings for extent of work.
5. Place textured and routed plywood sheathing in pattern and direction shown on
the Drawings.
0241.02
•. 1
3.04 INSTALLATION OF WOOD SIDING AND TRIM
A. General: Installation of wood siding and trim shall be work of this Section, unless
arranged for otherwise.
B. Refer to Section 07466 for installation specifications.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD SIDING, SOFFITS AND CEILINGS
A. General: Installation of plywood siding, soffits, ceiling panels, etc. shall be work of this
Section, unless arranged for otherwise.
B. Refer to Section 07466 for installation specifications.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect plywood sheathing from exposure to excessive moisture and accumulations of
snow. Broom snow off of uncovered floor sheathing within 4 hours of snowfall.
B. Replace sheathing panels that exhibit delamination, swelling or other deterioration from
exposure to moisture, or as directed by the Architect.
3.07 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required by all other Sections of the
Specifications as a part of the work of this Section. Coordination shall be provided to
ensure the proper, timely and complete installation of all materials, equipment and
systems of the project.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 06100-7
SECTION 06170
PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish prefabricated roof trusses and connectors.
B. Furnish prefabricated laminated plywood beams.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Hangers and clips, and installation of prefabri-
cated wood items.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and
specifications showing compliance with requirements of this Section.
1 . Include drawings, specifications and product data for all components and parts
of structural system, spacing and layout of members, gusset plates and
connectors. Clearly mark all components and parts. Show critical dimensions
for determining fit and placement in building, as well as the loads that members
are designed to support.
2. Indicate compliance with specified design criteria.
3. Include erection drawings for identification and assembly of parts.
4. Indicate loads for all joist hangers and other connectors.
5. Drawings: Stamp and signature of registered Colorado Professional Engineer
responsible for preparation of shop drawings.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1 . Truss Design Calculations: Submit in accordance with Division 1. Calculations
shall be signed and sealed by a registered Colorado Professional Engineer.
C. Building Permit: Prepare and submit drawings, calculations, specifications and other
information as may be required to secure building permit by local building authority.
D. Refer to paragraph 2.01.C. for submittals required prior to bidding for approval of
equals.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Quality Control: Conform with applicable requirements of the following
standards:
1. Fabricator shall be licensed by American or Canadian Institute of Timber
Construction.
2. Fabricate in accordance with Voluntary Product Standard PS 56-73 and bear
AITC or CITC quality mark.
3. Parallel Strand Lumber Beams: Design and fabricate in accordance with National
Evaluation Service Inc., NER-481, or Canadian Construction Materials Centre,
CCMC-1 1 1 61-R.
B. Design Criteria:
1 . Prefabricated structural wood members and components shall be designed under
the supervision of a registered Colorado Professional Engineer. Designs shall be
in accordance with allowable values assigned by the local building official.
06170-1
b. Proposed modifications to spacing and layout of members.
C. Data indicating compliance with design criteria for loading, deflection,
fire and sound control assemblies, as applicable.
2.02 PREFABRICATED ROOF TRUSSES
A. Materials: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, select structural #1 or #2, maximum moisture
content of 12-19%, S4S.
B. Construction: Nominal 2x4 or 2x6 construction with raised heel or as detailed on the
Drawings and approved in shop drawings.
C. Configuration: Fan or Howe type or as recommended by truss fabricator.
1. Gable End Trusses: Provide gable end truss configuration where shown on the
Drawings or recommended by truss fabricator.
D. Connector Plates: Galvanized gusset plates, sized as per fabricators requirements,
except that no plate shall be less than 15 sq. in.
1 . Gang -Nail Systems, Inc., Miami, FL, or equal.
2.03 LIGHT -GAGE METAL TRUSS/JOIST CONNECTORS
A. Joist Hangers, Connectors, Column Bases and Caps: Refer to Section 06100, Rough
Carpentry.
B. Truss Connector Plates: Galvanized gusset plates, sized as per fabricator's
requirements, except that no plate shall be less than 15 sq. in.
1. Refer to the Drawings for specific size requirements of truss connector plates at
exposed truss locations.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Gang -Nail Systems, Inc., Miami, FL.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, design and performance are
acceptable.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Glue: Exterior type with mold inhibitor.
B. Hardware: Refer to Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals.
2.05 FABRICATION OF PREFABRICATED ROOF TRUSSES
A. General: Fabricate trusses from the approved shop drawings, in accordance with
industry standards.
B. Fabricate trusses in jigs with members accurately cut to provide good bearing at joints.
Joints shall be acceptable if the average opening between ends of members
immediately after fabrication is less than 1 /16", except that truss compression chord
joints at splices and ridges shall have full contact between members.
C. Each chord section shall extend through two (2) panel points before being spliced.
D. Provide 1 /8" camber for each 6' of truss, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Accurately place connector plates over truss members, as required to provide the
attachment area into each member per the approved shop drawings, except that no
plate shall be less than 15 sq. in.
1. Press plates into members to obtain full penetration without crushing outer
surface of wood. Plate embedment is acceptable if the opening between the
plate and the wood surface is less than 1 /32".
0241.02 06170-3
from this project. Refer to Section 01010.
1.03 COORDINATION OF SCHEDULES
A. Coordinate schedule of construction activity with the Owner's continued use of the
facility and site. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site.
B. Coordinate schedule of construction activity with the Owner and other Contractors as
necessary to facilitate the related work by others described above.
1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. In addition to progress meetings specified in Section 01200, Contractor shall hold
coordination meetings and pre -installation conferences with personnel and Subcontrac-
tors to assure coordination of work.
1.05 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. General: Schedule and coordinate all submittals specified in Section 01340 or other
Sections.
B. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,
connecting to and placing in service such equipment.
C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, operating
elements and the effect on work of other Sections.
1.06 COORDINATION OF SPACE
A. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of mechanical and
electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow routing
shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for
available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for
repairs.
B. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
1.07 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT
1'
i
A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate Sections in preparation for
Substantial Completion.
B. Assemble and coordinate close-out submittals specified in Section 01700.
C. After Owner's occupancy of premises, coordinate access to the site by various Sections
for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents
to minimize the disruption of Owner's activities.
i
END OF SECTION
01040-2
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all softwood finish carpentry trim.
B. Furnish and install wood fencing.
C. Installation of the following items, unless arranged for otherwise:
1. Solid vinyl windows.
2. Hollow metal doors and frames.
3. Window sills.
4. Insulated steel doors and frames.
5. Finish hardware specified in Division 8.
6. Building specialties specified in Division 10.
7. Miscellaneous equipment and accessories as specified elsewhere.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals.
2. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Cedar fascia and trim.
3. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood.
4. Section 09900, Painting.
5. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with recommendations and quality
standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
B. Reference Standards: Conform to quality requirements of current editions of the
following standards:
( 1. PS 51: Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
i . 2. PS 58: Basic Hardwood.
3. NFPA (National Forest Products Association) National Design Specification for
Wood Construction.
4• WWPA: Western Wood Products Association
5. California Redwood Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature illustrating all items of
specified shelving hardware.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for all prefabricated
millwork components.
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Handrail and guardrail components shall be fabricated and installed to meet all current
I " building code requirements, whether detailed on the Drawings or not, including but not
limited to:
1 . Railing extensions at the top and bottom of stair runs.
2. Railing returns to walls.
06200-1
C. Installer shall be responsible for inspecting all finish carpentry materials and culling any
material not meeting the quality standards of these Specifications, or that exhibit
defects such as knots, checks, splits, warping, bowing or excessive variation in color or
grain. All materials installed in the finished construction shall be subject to the approval
of the Architect.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP FOR SITE -FABRICATED FINISH CARPENTRY
A. General: Site fabricate running and standing trim, casings, base and other finish
carpentry items in accordance with recommendations of AWI and in accordance with
site -determined measurements.
B. Scribe, miter and join running and standing trim accurately and neatly to conform to
details.
C. Layout running and standing trim and other site -fabricated finish carpentry work to
balance lengths of material at each end of runs. Use longest possible lengths of
material; joints will not be allowed where single -length pieces can be used, in
accordance with the following:
1 . Running and standing trim, where grain is parallel to the length of the piece:
8'-0" long minimum.
2. Running and standing trim, where grain is perpendicular to the length of the
piece: 4'-0" long minimum.
3. No lengths less than 24" long will be allowed.
D. All vertical end joints of finished carpentry along the run of running or standing trim
shall have scarf -type joints.
E. Tolerances: Conform with applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY MATERIALS
A. General: Set and secure finish carpentry items in place rigid, plumb and square in a
manner consistent with AWI requirements and recommendations.
B. Materials shall be installed in accordance with site -determined measurements. When
necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. Ensure tolerances of not more than 1 /8" in
10'.
C. Tolerances: Conform with applicable AWI Standards for custom grade finish carpentry.
D. Countersink semi -concealed anchorage devices used for wall -mount components and
conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush and ensure
that direction of grain matches surrounding wood where scheduled for transparent
finish.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OTHER SECTIONS
A. Install doors and frames, windows, finish hardware, fixtures, accessories, specialties
and equipment supplied under other Sections for installation. Install items in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
( 3.05 PREPARATION OF FINISH CARPENTRY FOR FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
1 . Items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
0241.02 06200-3
SECTION 07180
WATER REPELLANT SEALERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install clear silicone water repellant sealer for brick masonry walls.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 04210, Brick Masonry.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Application of water repellant sealer shall be by skilled workers who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts, and who are completely familiar with
the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work
of this Section.
B. Applicator shall be certified by the manufacturer of the specified water repellant system
as an approved applicator.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature indicating compliance
with the requirements of this Section, including installation instructions.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all
labels intact and legible at the time of use.
B. Maintain the products in a dry condition during delivery, storage, handling, and
installation.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
B. Provide installer's written 5-year warranty covering application.
C. Should water penetrate through the work of this Section within warranty period
following the date of Substantial Completion of the work, and promptly upon receipt of
notice from the Owner to that affect, the materials supplier will provide such additional
water repellant materials as are required, and the applicator will provide such
equipment, labor and other materials as are required and will properly repair the area
i through which water penetrated, at no additional cost to the Owner.
r D. Should the water penetration not be due to faulty original workmanship or labor of this
Section, the equipment, labor and materials will be paid for promptly by the Owner at
the current rates of the Contractor, material supplier and applicator.
0241.02 07180-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEAR SILICONE SEALER
A. Type: Clear, penetrating silicone -based water repellant sealer, breathable to allow
moisture vapor transmission, specifically formulated for precast concrete, brick, stucco,
and other dense vertical surfaces.
B. Performance Criteria: Provide the following minimum performance standards:
1 • Water permeance: Greater than 94% when tested in accordance with ASTM E-
514.
2. Moisture vapor transmission rate: 95% minimum when tested in accordance
with ASTM E-96 and D-1653.
3. Accelerated weathering: No change at 1500 hours.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Enviroseal Double 7 for Brick, as manufactured by Harris Specialty Chemicals,
Inc. (Thoro), Jacksonville, FL, (800) 322-7825, as the basis of design.
2. Chemprobe Technologies, Inc., (800) 760-6776.
3. Huls America, Inc., Somerset, NJ, (800) 828-0919.
4. Okon, Inc., Lakewood, CO (303) 232-3571.
5. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, quality, durability,
and performance are acceptable.
PART_3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Applicator shall examine the wall surfaces to receive the specified water repellant sealer
and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the successful
application or performance of the product. Do not proceed with application until
unacceptable conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Applicator.
B. Prior to beginning application, the Applicator shall attend a job -site meeting with the
Contractor, Architect, and Owner to discuss the application procedure and any
necessary safeguards or precautions that need to be taken by the Contractor.
C. Ensure that windows, doors, glazing, metal flashings, louvers, and other materials
installed in the walls or wall panels to receive water repellant sealers are properly
masked and protected prior to beginning application.
D. Remove loose materials, debris, and other items which might adversely affect integrity
of the water repellant.
E. Ensure that all masonry to receive the specified water repellant sealer has been
thoroughly cleaned as specified in their respective Sections.
F. Take all necessary precautions to prevent contamination of stormwater run-off areas
or other drainageways.
G. Coordinate scheduling of the work of this Section with other trades as necessary for
the timely completion of the work. j
3.02 INSTALLATION OF WATER REPELLANT SEALER
A. General: Apply specified water repellant sealer in strict accordance with the l
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and with any applicable require-
ments of governmental agencies having jurisdiction over this project.
B. Apply two (2) coats of the specified clear sealer, at the application rate required by the
0241.02 07180-2
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Upon completion, any further soiling or damage to the precast concrete or masonry
surfaces shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.
PART 4 SCHEDULE
4.01 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General: Apply the specified clear sealer to the following areas:
1 . Brick masonry walls.
r
0241.02
END OF SECTION
07180-3
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install building insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for
building elements and spaces, including:
1 . Kraft -faced batt insulation in exterior wall and roof construction where protected
by plywood sheathing.
2. Foil -faced batt insulation in exterior roof construction a where left exposed.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation
2. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim: Insulation baffles.
3. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards:
1. FS HH-1-524: Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene).
2. FS HH-1-521: Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for ambient temperatures.
3. ASTM E 84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4. ASTM C665: Faced Insulation Materials.
B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos
and urea formaldehyde and are non -toxic.
C. Certification: Installer shall install an insulation certification card upon completion of the
insulation work as specified in paragraph 3.04.
D. Recycled Materials Content: Fiberglass batt insulation materials furnished for this
IrI Project shall contain a minimum 25% recycled glass content.
l
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating
compliance with the requirements of this Section for each type of insulation material
specified. Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being
furnished.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation
instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's
torches.
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored
tarp or equal.
0241.02 07210-1
2.03 INSULATION ATTACHMENTS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive or Attachments: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, capable of
securely adhering insulation to applicable surfaces.
B. Vapor Barrier: Specified in Section 07190.
C. Insulation Baffles: Specified in Section 07621.
D. Tape: 2" wide self -adhering type, polyethylene -faced.
E. Air Infiltration Wrap: None.
F. Suspension Wire: Type and gage as recommended by insulation manufacturer, as
required to hang anticipated weight of insulation blankets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the surfaces, substrates, wall and ceiling cavities and conditions
under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing
of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Ensure that insulation baffles have been properly installed in attic spaces.
C. Ensure that all electrical lighting fixtures, mechanical equipment and other devices
protruding into rafter, attic or soffit cavities are properly rated to be in contact with
insulation. If they are not, Contractor shall build enclosures around such fixtures to hold
insulation materials away as required by the fixture manufacturer's warranty and
installation requirements. Maintain tops of enclosures open to allow adequate
ventilation of fixtures and devices.
D. Ensure that all new electrical wiring and other devices protruding into wall cavities are
properly rated to be in contact with insulation materials.
E. Installer shall discuss specific site conditions with the Architect concerning the proper
selection of appropriate materials for ceiling/attic installations, as referenced in
Paragraph 3.03.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. General: Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight.
B. Install insulation to fit tightly between framing members and fill all voids.
C. Fit insulation tight against mechanical, electrical and other items which protrude through
plane of insulation; fit insulation to outside of plumbing in exterior walls.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BLANKET -TYPE BATT INSULATION
A. General: Install batt insulation materials in accordance with the manufacturer's written
I instructions and recommendations. Use paper -faced or foil -faced insulation materials
as scheduled herein, or required by the provisions of applicable building codes.
B. Use batt insulation free of ripped back or edges, with vapor barrier intact.
C. Install batt insulation in wall cavities without visible gaps or separations. Use roll widths
as required for ty
pe ype and spacing of framing members, as scheduled above. Fit
insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical
services.
D. Install bait insulation and vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's
07210-3
SECTION 07215
FOUNDATION INSULATION
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install foundation insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier
for building elements, including:
1. Unfaced rigid board insulation at exterior perimeter foundation walls.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete.
2. Section 07210, Building Insulation.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards:
1. FS HH-1-524: Insulation Board, Thermal (Polystyrene).
2. FS L-P-375C(2): Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl -Chloride.
3. FS HH-1-521 : Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for ambient temperatures.
4. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free of asbestos
and urea formaldehyde and are non -toxic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating
compliance with the requirements of Section for each type of insulation material
specified. Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being
furnished.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation
instructions.
B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's
torches.
C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored
tarp or equal.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide the manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and
retention of R-value of insulation materials for the following terms:
1. Insulation: One (1) year. Extruded Polystyrene Rigid Board.
0721 5-1
0241.02
manufacturer's recommendations. Place insulation horizontally and stagger vertical
joints.
E. For conditions where rigid board insulation is installed to the exterior face of foundation
walls and/or grade beams, extend insulation to within 2" of finished grade elevation,
and protect top edge with flexible fabric -type flashing membrane approved by insulation
manufacturer. Attach flashing to foundation wall and/or grade beam and extend down
face of rigid board insulation 12" minimum. Where concrete sidewalks or aprons abut
the exterior foundation, extend insulation up through thickness of sidewalk of apron to
within 1 " of finished surface, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Protect top
edge with flashing as described above and seal joint with specified sealant.
F. As Dampproofing Protection Board: Refer to Section 07150.
END OF SECTION
07215-3
0241.02
SECTION 07312
FIBERGLASS SHINGLES
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install textured, laminated fiberglass shingles and protective underlayments.
B. Furnish and install standard 3-tab fiberglass shingles and protective underlayment, as
an Alternate to the base bid.
C. Installation of miscellaneous metal flashings, unless arranged for otherwise.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: This Specification sets minimum standards for materials and workmanship.
Manufacturer's bonding requirements or governing building codes shall apply where
they impose higher standards.
B. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM 3462-83: Asphalt Shingles Made from Glass Matt and Surfaced with
Mineral Granules.
2. FS SS-S-001534: Class A, Type 1.
3. ASTM D2626-81: Asphalt Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used
in Roofing.
4. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications certifying that
materials supplied meet the requirements of this Section.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations concerning
installation of shingles in hot or cold weather.
B. Do not install shingles over wet roof deck sheathing or underlayment materials.
1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Wind Load: Attachment spacing and pattern shall be designed to withstand sustained
winds of 100 mph, at the following exposure, as determined by the Uniform Building
{ Code, current edition:
1. Exposure C.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original bundles with wrappings
intact.
B. Store on pallets or other means to prevent shingles from being in contact with ground.
0241.02 07312-1
SECTION 01041
SUPERINTENDENT
PART1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, who
shall be in attendance at the project site during performance of the work.
B. Superintendent shall be on the jobsite to the minimum level specified herein, but in all
cases whenever a Subcontractor is working on the project.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
3. Section 01040, Coordination.
4. Section 01046, Access to Site.
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent to supervise and coordinate all
construction and jobsite administration tasks for the duration of the project.
1. Superintendent shall be a regular employee of the Contractor's firm, unless the
use of a contract employee is approved and authorized by the Owner in writing.
2. Superintendent shall have a general knowledge of the building type and type of
construction proposed for this project, and shall have successfully completed at
least one (1) project of similar size and complexity in the past five (5) years,
serving in a similar capacity.
3. Contractor shall submit a written resume, references for similar completed
projects and other supporting documents to verify the qualifications of the
person(s) to be employed as superintendent for this project, if requested by the
Owner.
1.03 REQUIRED LEVEL OF SUPERVISION
A. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite until Substantial Completion on a full-time
basis.
1. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite whenever a Subcontractor is
working on the project.
2. Superintendent shall be present during any municipal or utility inspection.
3. Superintendent shall be present at any scheduled or Owner- or Architect -
requested meeting.
B. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite after Substantial Completion and through
project close-out as follows:
1 . Superintendent need not be on -site full time during this period.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 01041-1
Bundles shall be kept covered, clean and dry.
C. Do not use shingles which have evidence of being in contact with moisture, such as
discoloration caused by blooming or efflorescence.
1.07 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship. Term of warranty shall be as specified in Part 2 of this Section.
B. In addition to manufacturer's warranty, the Contractor shall furnish written two-year
guarantee covering repairs and replacements for any defect or failure due to faulty
workmanship, at no additional cost to Owner.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 TEXTURED FIBERGLASS SHINGLES
A. Shingles: Fiberglass matt shingles meeting or exceeding requirements of ASTM D3018-
82 or ASTM D3462-83 and the following requirements:
1 . UL Class A, with a minimum weight per square not less than 235 lbs.
2. Hip and ridge shingles shall be factory preformed.
3. Type: Self-sealing, three-dimensional.
4. Minimum 25-year warranty or bond.
5. Color: Driftwood.
B. Underlayment:
1. Primary: Asphalt saturated and coated organic felt base sheet meeting require-
ments of ASTM D2626-81 without perforations; weights as shown.
2. Secondary: Elastomeric ice and water guard, 40 mil, black.
C. Nails: a. Ice and Water Shield, manufactured by W. R. Grace and Co., or equal
1. Field: 11-gage, 1-1/4" long; ridge: 1-1/2" long; 7/16" minimum diameter head.
Use longer nails where additional roofing material is used or if required by
manufacturer.
i
2. Staples are not permitted.
D. Plastic Cement: Cut back asphaltic type with mineral fiber components as recom-
mended for sealing and coating flashings in buildings, free of toxic solvents, capable
of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of approximately 241 C and 50% R.H.
E. Valley Flashings: Refer to Section 07621.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Oakridge 40 by Owens Corning, Toledo, OH, (800) 438-7465. No exceptions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
i.
A. Installer shall examine the materials, substrates and conditions under which the shingle
work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory
conditions. Do not proceed with the roofing until the unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
0241.02 07312-2
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that roof deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps and voids.
B. Coordinate installation of roof -mounted components or items projecting through
sheathing. Ensure that roof openings are properly sized and located prior to roofing
installation.
C. Verify the requirements for secondary underlayments with the Building Official with
jurisdiction over this project.
D. Ensure that galvanized metal valley flashings have been properly placed prior to roofing
installation, furnished by Section 07621.
E. Ensure that prefabricated roof vents have been properly placed and approved by the
Architect prior to roofing installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Primary Underlayment:
1. Over entire roof deck area to be shingled, place plies of 36" wide underlayment,
with ends and edges weatherlapped minimum 6". Stagger end joints of each
consecutive layer. Nail underlayment sufficiently to hold in place.
2. Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof.
3. Weatherlap and seal with plastic cement items projecting through or mounted
on roof.
B. Secondary Underlayment:
1. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations.
2. Install in locations as shown on the Drawings, or specified herein, but in no case
less than as required by local codes.
3. Apply one (1) width of secondary underlayment at overhanging eaves, width as
required to completely cover projected eaves, and extend up the slope of the
roof to the minimum extent required by the local jurisdiction. Lap end joints 4"
and side joints 2". Use multiple widths or larger single -width rolls if required by
project conditions.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF SHINGLES
A.
General: Nail shingles in place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and recommendations. Adjust nail spacing or quantity as required to meet the wind
load criteria specified in paragraph 1 .05, or as required by the local jurisdiction.
B.
Use starter strip of shingle material cut on slotted end to 9" width and nail to eave with
slot end up and edge overhanging eave 3/8". Lay first course directly over starter strip
with ends flush with starter strip at eaves.
C.
Ensure alignment by running vertical line down center of roof and laying shingles from
center to rake end, in addition snapping chalk line at least each fifth course to control
I
horizontal alignment.
D.
Place asphalt shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5" weather exposure, unless
otherwise required by the type of shingles specified.
I ; E.
Use factory -supplied hip and ridge shingles. Apply with 5" exposure, blind nailed and
r
tabbed. Run ridge shingles with prevailing wind.
_ F.
Cut-outs may break joints at either thirds or halves but the system shall be consistent
over the entire roof.
G.
Vent pipe sleeve flange minimum width 6". Fit shingles under lower edge and over
sides and upper edge. Maintain uniform and symmetrical installation, with neat
0241.02 07312-3
appearance.
H. Run courses true to line with slots properly placed. Leave shingles flat without wave
and properly placed.
I. Install shingles around prefabricated roof vents as recommended by manufacturer and
detailed on the Drawings. Ensure that proper ventilation is maintained.
J. Flashing Installation: Flash and seal with plastic cement or as recommended by flashing
manufacturer. Ensure weathertight installation.
K. Nailing:
1. If shingles applied as felts are laid: Secure underlayment to deck with roofing
nails 1 " in from the edge and 18" o.c.
2. If felts to be left exposed for extended period: Apply as above, then spot mop
in field and continuously seal at lower edge and end laps with asphalt emulsion
to protect from blow -off.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean shingles and building surfaces of soiling caused by this installation.
3.06 REPAIR FROM OTHER TRADES
A. Contractor shall be responsible for repairing nail/screw holes through the shingles
caused by tie -offs and other temporary construction used by other trades.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 07312-4
SECTION 07464
PRIMED HARDBOARD SIDING
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install primed hardboard soffits, complete with fasteners and accessories.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: Installation.
2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
3. Section 07312, Fiberglass Shingles.
4. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
6. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform with applicable requirements of the following standards
and codes:
1. NFPA: National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for
Wood Construction.
2. APA: Plywood Specification and Grade Guide C20.
3. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials stored on the site shall be kept off the ground on pallets or stringers and
covered top and sides.
I
j 1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty on the primed finish and 25-year
warranty on the substrate, covering defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRIMED HARDBOARD SHEET SIDING MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Primed Hardboard Soffits: Manufacturer's standard primed hardboard sheet soffit
i material:
1 . Size: Width as required by construction x 16'-0" length x nominal 1 /2" thick.
2. Texture: Manufacturer's standard rough -sawn cedar or wood grain texture.
I „ 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime coat finish, ready for field finishing
specified in Section 09900.
B. Accessories: Provide all necessary accessories by the manufacturer for complete
installation of soffit and trim systems.
C. Nails: Galvanized box nails with a minimum 1 /4" diameter head x length required by
the manufacturer. Use of staples or T-nails is not acceptable.
0241.02 07464-1
D. Underlayment: 30 lb. asphalt saturated and coated organic felt base sheet meeting
requirements of ASTM D2626-81 without perforations.
E. Approved Style and Manufacturer:
1. Masonite Corp., Laurel, MS, and distributed in Denver, CO, (800) 255-0785.
2. Sturbridge Series by Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, and distributed locally
in Denver, CO, (800) 830-7370.
3. Louisiana Pacific Corp., Portland, OR, (503) 221-0800.
4. Weyerhauser Company, Klamath Falls, OR, and distributed in Denver, CO, (800)
332-8291.
5. Forestex Company, Portland, OR, (503) 295-0951.
6. All siding, accessories, exposed fasteners, caulking and other components shall
be by the same manufacturer throughout the project, unless specifically
approved otherwise.
7. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall inspect rough framing, wall sheathing and/or existing solid substrate and
notify the Contractor of any conditions which will affect the successful installation of
the siding, soffit and trim systems. Installer shall not proceed with the work of this
Section until such conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Installer.
B. Layout siding work to minimize number of lap joints. Refer to the Drawings for
locations of vertical trim boards or other details intended to eliminate or reduce the
amount of vertical siding joints.
C. Install insulative and/or wood wall sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations, unless arranged for otherwise.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SOFFIT PANELS
A. General: Install siding over approved sheathing in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions and recommendations.
B. Use soffit panels of longest possible length to minimize butt edge joints between panels.
In no case shall butt edge joints be allowed in siding panel spans shorter than the
specified panel length. Where vertical trim boards are shown on the Drawings to
specifically break the siding panel span, no butt edge joints shall be allowed between
trim boards.
C. Locate panel edge joints over centerlines of wall framing, or provide solid blocking
behind edges. Stagger panels vertically as recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Nailing: Nail type and length shall be as required by the manufacturer. Nail spacing
shall not exceed 16" o.c. at locations where stud backing is at 16" o.c.; nail spacing
shall not exceed 12" o.c. at locations where stud backing is at 24" o.c. Do not
overdrive or countersink nail heads, do not drive nails at an angle, and do not break the
primed hardboard surface of the siding and soffit panels and trims.
E. Joints: Provide joints between vertical and horizontal surfaces of siding panels, soffits,
fascias, trims and other dissimilar materials as recommended by the manufacturer, but
in no case less than 3/16" wide. Make cuts in panels and trim straight, true and in
proper alignment, maintaining joint width tolerance of 1 /16" +/-.
0241.02 07464-2
1 . Butt edge joints between siding panels and other horizontal and vertical joints
shall be caulked with sealants specified in Section 07900.
2. Use of plastic T- or H- shaped trims to cover butt edge joints in siding panels will
not be allowed.
F. Finishing: Primed hardboard siding and soffit panels to be field finished as specified in
Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 07464-3
SECTION 07466
WOOD SIDING
PART GENERAL
i 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install wood bevel lap siding, complete with fasteners.
B. Furnish and install prefabricated veneer plywood panel siding, complete with fasteners
and accessories.
C. Furnish and install coated organic felt base sheet over wall sheathing, if specified.
D. Furnish and install color -coordinated caulking, unless arranged for otherwise.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation of wood casings and trim.
= 3. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim.
4. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
5. Section 09900, Painting.
6. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform with requirements of the following standards and codes:
1. PS 1 : Construction and Industrial Plywood.
2. PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard.
3. NFPA: National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for
Wood Construction.
4. APA: Plywood Specification and Grade Guide C20.
5. Uniform Building Code, current edition.
B. Plywood panels shall be identified with APA grade trademark of the American Plywood
Association.
C. Grading of lumber shall be according to the current edition of the Western Wood
Products Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers written product literature and installation
instructions, illustrating the manufacturer's full line of sizes, lap patterns, exposures,
textures and finishes.
B. Samples: Submit samples of.specified material, color and texture for approval by the
Architect. Submit samples of each siding accessory specified.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials stored on the site shall be kept off the ground on pallets or stringers and
covered top and sides.
B. Siding shall be stored level on properly aligned stringers.
0241.02 07466-1
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide the Owner with 1 % additional stock of each size of siding specified for
replacement. Refer to Section 01600, Material and Equipment.
PART.2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD BEVEL LAP SIDING
A. General: Exterior plank -type bevel lap wood siding, for transparent finish.
1 . Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 1 6'-0" long boards, 8" width or as required to
match the existing exposure and profile at clubhouse.
2. Edges: Ship lapped.
3. Pattern: Straight bevel, or as required to match existing.
4. Texture: Rough sawn.
5. Finish: transparent stained finish, as specified in Section 09930, Transparent
Finishes.
B. Materials: Western Red Cedar, B or better select.
C. Nails: Zinc -coated boxnails, or as recommended by the siding manufacturer, of
sufficient length to penetrate minimum 1-1/2" into studs. Use of staples or T-nails is
not acceptable.
D. Underlayment: 30 lb. asphalt saturated and coated organic felt base sheet meeting
requirements of ASTM D2626-81 without perforations.
E. Accessories: Provide all necessary accessories by the manufacturer for complete
installation of siding system.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Plain Bevel, manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404)652-
4000, as the basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, performance,
quality and appearance are acceptable.
2.02 VENEERED PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING
A. General: Exterior APA-rated veneer plywood sheet -type siding panels, with 1 /4" deep
3/8" wide parallel grooves for decorative pattern, for opaque or transparent finish.
1. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long x 5/8" thick sheets.
2. Edges: Ship lapped.
3. Pattern: Square routed at 4" o.c., to be mounted vertically as shown on the
Drawings.
4. Texture: Rough sawn.
5. Finish: Painted finish, as specified in Section 09900, Painting.
B. Materials: Southern Yellow Pine.
C. Nails: Zinc -coated boxnails, or as recommended by the siding manufacturer, of
sufficient length to penetrate minimum 1-1/2" into studs. Use of staples or T-nails is
not acceptable.
D. Caulk: Non-harding, color -matched exterior acrylic latex caulk. Refer to Section 07900.
0241.02 07466-2
E. Underlayment: Single layer of 30-lb. asphalt saturated and coated organic felt base
sheet conforming to ASTM D2626.
F. Accessories: Provide all necessary accessories by the manufacturer for complete
installation of siding system.
G. Approved Manufacturers:
1. APA Texture 1-11 (T-1-11), manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA,
(404)652-4000, as the basis of design.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, performance,
quality and appearance are acceptable.
2.03 WOOD CASINGS, MOULDINGS AND TRIM
A. General: All solid stock wood casings, mouldings, corner boards and other running and
standing trim shall be Western Red Cedar, B Select.
1. Sizes: As shown on the Drawings, or as required to match existing.
2. Profiles: As shown on the Drawings, or as required to match existing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall inspect rough framing and/or existing solid substrate and notify the
Contractor of any conditions which will affect the successful installation of the siding.
Installer shall not proceed with the work of this Section until such conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Layout siding work to minimize number of lap joints. Refer to the Drawings for
locations of vertical trim boards or other details intended to eliminate or reduce the
amount of vertical siding joints.
C. Installer shall be responsible for inspecting all siding and trim wood and culling any
material not meeting the quality standards of these Specifications, or that exhibit
defects such as knots, checks, splits, wasping, bowing or excessive variation in color
or grain. All materials installed in the finished construction shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF SIDING
A. General: Install siding over approved underlayment in accordance with the manufac-
turer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Nailing: Nail spacing shall not exceed 16" o.c. at locations with solid wood substrate
or where stud backing is at 16" o.c.; nail spacing shall not exceed 12" o.c. at locations
where stud or furring backing is 24" o.c. Nails shall penetrate a minimum of 1-1/2" into
studs. Do not overdrive or countersink nail heads, and do not drive nails at an angle.
Use color -matched nails where nails must be exposed.
C. Joints and Edges: Siding boards shall be installed in one continuous piece whenever
horizontal wall dimensions allow, or where vertical trim boards are shown on the
Drawings to reduce the span of siding. In these conditions, no other joints will be
allowed. Where horizontal runs of siding are not broken by vertical trim boards, and
these runs exceed the length of the siding, all end joints along the run of the siding
boards shall have scarf cuts.
1. End joints abutting vertical corner or intermediate trim boards shall allow for
expansion/contraction of the materials. Leave a 3/16" space where siding abuts
0241.02 07466-3
these trims and caulk with color -matched sealants.
2. All joints and edges shall have a minimum of 1-1/2" solid backing material.
D. Replace all split or broken siding at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Leave surfaces prepared for field finishing as specified in Section 09900, Painting, or
Section 09930, Transparent Finishes. ;
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CASINGS, MOULDINGS AND TRIM
A. General: All wood window and door casings, mouldings, corner boards and other
running and standing trim shall be furnished and installed by the same installer as the
specified wood siding.
B. Refer to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, for installation.
C. Trim pieces forming outside corners of fascia, eave, wall corners or similar conditions
shall be screwed together, not nailed, where these pieces are to remain exposed to
view in the final construction.
D. Leave surfaces prepared for field finishing as specified in Section 09900, Painting, or
Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 07466-4
SECTION 01046
ACCESS TO SITE
PART GENERAL
., 1.01 OWNER'S USE OF PREMISES
A. City of Fort Collins shall fully occupy the existing facility, parking areas and grounds
during construction of this project, except for specific areas designated strictly for use
by the Contractor as specified in paragraph 1.02.
B. It is the intent of the Owner not to disturb the normal functions of the complex,
employees, vendors, suppliers, contractors or related outside businesses during the
work of this project.
C. City of Fort Collins shall not occupy or use any portion of the building until Substantial
Completion of the project.
D. Refer to paragraph 1.04 below for special site restrictions.
E. Related conditions specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01010, Summary of Work.
2. Section 01040, Coordination.
3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
5. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
1.02 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Contractor shall have access to the site of new construction as required for the
successful completion of the project, as arranged at the Pre -Construction Conference.
B. Site area affected by construction access, construction activities, employee parking and
material storage areas is to be minimized.
1. General limits of the site access are as shown on the site plan in the Drawings.
Final limits shall be as determined at the Pre -Construction Conference.
2. Owner's access to non -effected areas of the site shall be maintained at all times.
Employee parking areas will be maintained throughout the duration of the
project, as determined at the Pre -Construction Conference.
3. Contractor's employees and subcontractors shall not park on the public streets
adjacent to the site.
C. Access to areas of the existing facility affected by construction activities of the project
is to be minimized.
1. Schedules for construction activities within the existing facility shall be submitted
to the Owner for approval a minimum of seven (7) days prior to beginning work.
2. Access to areas of new construction through the existing facility will not be
allowed.
3. Contractor shall provide daily cleaning of the site and areas of the existing facility
during the period of construction activity.
D. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of
products under this Contract stored on the site and for completed work.
E. Noise Control: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
F. Dust and Erosion Control: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
G. Construction Hours: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
H. Toilet Facilities: Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
01046-1
SECTION 07621
GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
IPART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install new prefinished galvanized sheet metal seamless gutters,
downspouts, trims, flashings and accessories.
B. Furnish and install prefinished continuous soffit vents and roof vents.
C. Furnish and install new galvanized sheet metal insulation baffles.
D. Furnish miscellaneous metal flashings to other Sections as required.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Flexible masonry flashings.
2. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,
Inc. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition.
B Fabrication and installation shall be by manufacturer's personnel or manufacturer -
approved subcontractor with minimum five (5) years successful experience in projects
of similar size and complexity.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and shop drawings indicating
materials, shapes, proposed layout of joints, special details and intersections and
fabrication and assembly details.
B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard colors of prefinished flashings, gutters and
downspouts for selection by the Architect.
C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard profiles of galvanized flashings and trim for
selection by the Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GALVANIZED METAL MATERIALS
A. Prefinished Galvanized Sheet Metal Gutters and Downspouts: Field -formed material,
26-gage minimum.
1. Finish: Supply galvanized sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's
standard baked -on enamel finish. Color to be selected by the Architect from
manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
2. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.03 below.
3. Downspout Extensions: Provide 2'-0" minimum length extensions for all
downspout discharges, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
0241.02 07621-1
B. Prefinished Galvanized Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525,
except ASTM 527 for lock -forming hot -dipped galvanized: G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill
phosphatized.
1. Gage:
a. 24-gage for gutters and open -face box downspouts.
b. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials.
C. 26-gage for edge flashings and other miscellaneous trims not specified
for other gages.
2. Finish: Supply galvanized sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's
standard baked -on enamel finish. Color to be selected by the Architect from
manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
3. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.03 below, shop formed to extent possible.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Fasteners: Concealed clip -type of same material as flashings, sized to suit application.
B. Nails: Hot -dipped galvanized steel roofing type.
C. Screws: Hot -dipped galvanized Phillips head, with neoprene washers.
D. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used.
E. Bituminous Paint: Acid- and alkali -resistant type, black color.
F. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type, FS SS-C-001 53a.
G. Sealant: One (1) component silicone, conforming to FS TT-S-00230, non -staining, non -
bleeding, non -sagging, of color suitable for material matching.
1. Dow 790 or equal.
H. Soffit Vents: Prefinished, continuous, extruded, galvanized steel.
1. Size: 2" wide x continuous lengths; thicknesses as detailed on the Drawings.
2. Finish: Prefinished by the manufacturer.
3. Color: Black.
4. Insect Screen: Prefinished black screening, 18x14 mesh, 0.013" diameter
aluminum wire.
I. Roof Vents: Prefabricated galvanized material, heavy-duty construction.
1. Sizes: Nominal 16" x 18" each. Provide minimum 50 sq. in. of free ventilation
area per vent.
2. Finish: Field -finished as specified in Section 09900.
3. Approved Manufacturer: Ampcor Model RVG-50 by Anderson Metal Products
Co., Taylorsville, MS, or equal.
J. Insulation Baffles: Galvanized sheet metal insulation baffles for installation between
roof trusses or rafters.
1 . Size: 24" wide (or as required for condition) x 31 " overall length.
2. Approved Manufacturer: Ampcor Series BV by Anderson Metal Products Co.,
Taylorsville, MS, or equal.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defec+,
detrimental to appearance or performance.
B. Form sections in maximum lengths possible. Make allowances for expansion and
contraction at joints.
1. Provide for thermal expansion at 10' intervals, unless otherwise shown. Use
material in longest practical lengths. Sections shorter than 3'-0" will not be
allowed.
0241.02 07621-2
C.
Joints and seams exposed to view are to be flat -lock type, except
corners, or detailed
as flat -butt joints with back-up plate. Open -lap seams are not permitted for joints
exposed to view. Fabricate corners minimum 18" x 18", mitered, soldered and sealed
as one (1 ) piece. Seal all seams with elastic cement.
D.
Wipe and wash clean soldered joints to remove traces of flux immediately after
soldering.
E.
Hem exposed edges of (lashings to underside 1 /2". Hemmed edges shall be straight,
i
l
square design, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F.
Backpaint flashings with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with
cementitious materials or dissimilar metals.
G.
Profiles shall conform to current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual standards
and details.
1. Seamless Gutters: 5" field -extruded box -type, seamless, prefinished, square or
ogee profile. Gutters sections shall include integral drip flashing, to be installed
below roof felts and shingles. If gutter fabrication proposed does not provide
(
integral drip flashing, Installer shall provide separate galvanized drip flashings,
to be lapped over gutter edge.
r
2. Downspouts: Standard box -type, seamless, prefinished, Figure F, page 1.71 of
the SMACNA manual, size to match gutter sections provided.
E3.
Drip/Fascia Flashings: As shown on the Drawings.
2.04 FIELD EQUIPMENT
A. Installer shall furnish and maintain any site -based cutting, forming and seaming
equipment as necessary to fabricate and install all metal flashings, accessories and
trims not factory fabricated for a complete and weathertight installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which flashing and trim
work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory
conditions which would prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Installer.
B. Coordinate installation of flashings with Contractor for roofing and fiberglass shingles
as required.
C. Coordinate installation of edge/drip flashings with primary and secondary roof
underlayments specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gutters, downspouts, flashings, reglets, counterf lashings and trim in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B. Secure .flashings in place using specified fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in
locations approved by Architect. When using exposed fasteners, they are to be of
same finish as flashings.
C. Conform to SMACNA details, unless otherwise shown.
1 . Use hanging detail for gutters similar to that shown in "Fig. 1-14A", page 1-35
of SMACNA manual.
0241.02 07621-3
D. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashings and asphalt felt flashings.
E. Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces
true and straight in planes and lines accurate to profiles.
F. Counterflash mechanical, plumbing and electrical items projecting through roofing.
1 . Mechanical, plumbing and electrical details may be schematic in nature. Install I
all flashings in accordance with current SMACNA requirements.
2. Refer to the Drawings for any special flashing conditions.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean all exposed galvanized surfaces and leave prepared for field finishing as specified
in Section 09900.
1 . Remove excess sealants, flux, plastic cement and bituminous paint.
2. Clean soiled surfaces with a solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces.
B. Clean all exposed prefinished galvanized surfaces. Remove smudges and other
imperfections using cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer. Remove
excess sealant from prefinished materials and leave installation in clean condition.
C. Advise Contractor of measures to be taken to protect prefinished surfaces from damage
during the balance of construction.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 07621-4
SECTION 07900
SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS
1 PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces.
B. Furnish and install joint backing materials.
C. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 02515, Portland Cement Paving.
2. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork: Joint fillers for cast -in -place concrete work.
3. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
4. Section 04210, Brick Masonry.
5. Section 07466, Wood Siding.
6. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashings and Trim.
7. Division 8, Doors and. Windows.
8. Section 09900, Painting: Joints of walls and/or ceilings of dissimilar colors.
9. Division 15, Mechanical.
10. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer of sealants and caulking shall have minimum five (5) years of successful
experience with projects of similar size and complexity.
B. Installer shall be continuously employed in work of this type.
C. Certification: Manufacturer/Supplier of sealant and accessory materials shall certify that
materials supplied are acceptable and appropriate for the materials, substrates and
conditions under which sealants are to be installed.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation
instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound and associated miscellaneous
material required.
B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard color line for each type of sealant
specified for exposed locations for selection by the Architect.
C. Sample Installation: Select a test area on the exterior and install caulking. Notify the
Architect for approval and acceptance prior to proceeding with caulking. The test area
will become the standard for quality control of remaining caulking.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when
temperatures are below 400 F or above 1000 F. Proceed with the work only when
forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper curing and development of high
early bond strength. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations,
install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of the
manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range so that sealant will not be
subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress by subsequent low temperatures.
0241.02 07900-1
Coordinate time schedule with Contractor to avoid delay of project.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials when such
materials are properly applied and fully cured as described in the manufacturer's
product data sheets. The Contractor further agrees to replace sealants which fail
because of loss of cohesion or adhesion, or that do not cure properly due to improper
application or curing, or when the materials installed are not appropriate for that
application, joint type or other factor beyond the manufacturer's control, for a period
of five (5) years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. General: Supplier/Installer of work of this Section shall certify that materials specified
and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications for
the following criteria:
1. Compatibility of sealant material with adjacent materials.
2. Compatibility of sealant material with type and degree of weather exposure.
3. Compatibility of sealant material with expected use of space.
4. Compatibility of sealant material with joint type, width and depth.
B. Exterior: One- or two-part polyurethane -based elastomeric sealants complying with FS
TT-S-00230, Class A, Type I (self -leveling) or Type II (non -sag).
1. One -Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as
recommended by manufacturer for type of application.
2. Two -Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-2 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as
recommended by manufacturer for type of application.
C. Interior: One -part silicone -based non -sag, elastomeric sealant, resistant to mildew
complying with FS TT-S-01543, Class A, and FF TT-S-00230, Class A.
1. Sonolastic Omniseal and OmniPlus by Sonneborne as basis of design or as
recommended by manufacturer for type of application.
D. Concrete Slab Joints: One -part non -priming urethane -based self -leveling pourable
sealant complying with FS TT-S-00230C, Class A, Type 1 (horizontal use),
1. Sonolastic SL-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by
manufacturer for type of application.
E. Color(s):
1 . Colors are to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard
colors.
2. Design intent is to match sealant color to color of adjacent material, unless
indicated otherwise. The Architect shall have final authority for color selection,
including variations from this policy.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Sonneborne Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434.
2. Tremco Sealants, Cleveland, OH, (800) 321-7906.
3. Schnee -Morehead Inc., Irving, TX, (800) 255-9427.
4. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
0241.02 07900-2
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Primer: Non -staining type for joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type recommended by sealant
manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1056, round closed -cell polyethylene foam rod, over -sized 30-
50%, as recommended by manufacturer of sealant used.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure -sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
S application.
E. Joint Fillers for Cast -in -Place Concrete Work: Refer to Section 03100.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Installer shall examine joint surfaces, backing and anchorage of units forming sealing
rabbet and conditions under which sealant work is to be performed and notify
Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work, performance and
curing of sealants. Do not proceed with sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B.
Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove
any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C.
Ensure that horizontal and vertical surfaces are of sufficient dimension for required
bonding of sealant materials as recommended by the manufacturer.
' D.
Ensure that sealants are compatible with the substrates to which they are to adhere.
_. E.
Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
F.
Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
G.
Install joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly.
H.
Install bond breaker where required.
I.
Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces which may be marred or damaged by
sealant materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
OF SEALANTS
0
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General: Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealant
within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot
be applied within recommended temperature ranges.
Tool joints slightly concave in vertical surfaces and flush in horizontal surfaces.
Maintain joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges or sags.
Ensure that sealant is applied leaving crisp, clean lines with adjacent materials. Do not
allow sealant to bleed onto adjacent surfaces. Immediately wipe excess sealant
materials off adjacent surfaces.
Remove and replace any sealants improperly applied, to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
Repair and replace any adjacent materials that have been damaged, marred or
discolored by work of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Architect.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 SCHEDULE OF SEALANT WORK
0241.02
07900-3
A. Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not
limited to:
1. Expansion joints in exterior concrete flatwork adjacent to buildings.
2. Expansion joints in exterior concrete pavements, aprons, sidewalks.
3. Expansion joints and control joints in interior concrete slabs where surfaces are
scheduled to be sealed and/or exposed to view.
4. Vertical expansion and control joints in brick masonry walls.
5. Horizontal joints between interior concrete slabs and walls.
6. Masonry expansion joints in masonry veneer.
7. Perimeter of window and door frames.
8. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs.
9. Horizontal and vertical joints between primed hardboard siding, soffits, and
running and standing trims.
10. Horizontal and vertical joints between wood siding, soffits, and wood running
and standing trims.
11. Horizontal and vertical joints between prefinished hardboard siding, soffits and
running and standing trims.
12. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where j
required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain
the weathertightness of the project. 1
13. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the i
Architect.
B. Refer to other Division 2 sections for sealants required for site concrete work and other
materials.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 07900-4
SECTION 08110
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 04210, Brick Masonry: Anchorages.
2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation of doors and frames.
3. Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
4. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
5. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Member of Steel Door Institute (SDI).
B. Reference Standards: Conform with applicable portions of the following standards:
1 . SDI-100: Recommended Specifications of Standard Steel Doors and Frames of
Steel Door Institute (SDI).
2. ASTM A366: Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation schedules.
B. Door Schedules: Submit schedule of doors and frames, using same reference marks or
numbers for doors and details as that shown on the Drawings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating general construction, configurations,
( jointing methods, reinforcement.
I , D. Samples: Submit representative sample of corner section of standard hollow metal
doors and frames to Architect for approval. Sample section shall indicate all details of
f ` construction and finish.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle all hollow metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent
damage and deterioration.
B. Provide packaging, including corner guards, separators, spreaders, banding and, if
prefinished, plastic or vinyl wrappings as required to protect all metal doors and frames
during transportation and storage.
C. Store doors upright, in a protected area, off the ground, with air space between
individual pieces. Protect all finished surfaces.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Hollow Metal Doors: Doors shall be cold -rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher -leveled, all
0241.02 081 10-1
bonderized steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces, complying with Steel Door
Institute SDI-100, except as amended in this Section.
1. Type: Composite construction with flush faces and seamless with hemmed
edges. Provide insulated doors where scheduled.
a. Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design.
2. Construction: Steel face sheets bonded to 1-3/4" honeycomb or unitized steel
core, 14-gage top and bottom channels and 7-gage hinge reinforcement.
Provide full urethane core on exterior doors or where scheduled to be insulated
door. Furnish the following minimum face sheets:
a. Exterior Doors: 16-gage.
3. Sizes: As scheduled on the Drawings, 1-3/4" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Style:
a. "Regent Door" by Ceco as basis of design for honeycomb core.
b. "Imperial Door" by Ceco as basis of design for insulated core.
C. "Medallion Door" by Ceco as basis of design for unitized steel core.
5. Finish: Shop -prime as specified below.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ceco Corp., Brentwood, TN, distributed locally by Architectural Doors, Denver,
CO, (303) 322-1410.
2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423-1334.
3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687.
4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733-5909.
5. Manufacturers providing products of same design, performance and function are
acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Hollow Metal Frames: Frames shall be cold -rolled or hot -rolled, pickled and oiled steel,
all bonderized sheets, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI-100, except as amended
by this Section. Except where other gages are indicated or specified, fabricate frames
from steel not lighter than the following:
a. Exterior Doors: 14-gage.
1. Type: Mitered corners, fully welded frames. Knock -down type frames are not I .
permitted, unless approved for use in interior fire -rated assemblies.
2. Sizes: As shown and scheduled on the Drawings. + .
3. Finish: Shop -primed as specified below.
4. Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type, minimum three (3) per jamb,
equally spaced.
5. Jamb Anchors:
a. Wood or Metal Stud Construction: Stud anchors, four (4) per jamb,
securely welded to back of frames.
6. Floor Anchors: 16-gage, one (1) per jamb.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1 . Ceco Corp., Oak Brook, IL, distributed locally by Ceco Door Division, Fountain, r
CO, (303) 382-7930.
2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (51 5) 423-1334.
3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687.
4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303)
733-5909. L-
5. Manufacturers shall be the same as those for hollow metal doors.
0241.02
08110-2
n
1 .03 CONSTRUCTION STAGING
A. Contractor shall provide a staging and phasing plan for the Owner's review and
approval at the Pre -Construction Conference, including:
1 . Major materials to be stored on the site.
2. Major equipment to be used in the work, with the proposed placement of this
equipment during different phases of construction.
3. Trailers and storage sheds.
4. Limits of temporary site fencing, including access points.
B. Rooftop Staging: Contractor's use of the roof area for storage of new materials shall
be limited by the structural capacity of the roof structure.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 01046-2
2.03 PROFILES
A. Hollow Metal Frames for Doors: Jamb sections shall be standard 2" wide x 8-1 /4"
deep, double -rabbeted, with 7/16" returns, or as shown on the Drawings or required
by specified wall construction, except as noted below. Supplier to verify profile
specified with wall construction and furnish jamb sections with the required depth.
1. Frames at 6" Framing: 2" wide x 8-1/4" deep, double rabbeted with 7/16"
returns.
B. Miscellaneous Filler and Closure Shapes: Fully weld to standard profiles and grind
smooth as detailed on the Drawings.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors: Fabricate doors in accordance with Steel Door Institute
requirements and recommendations.
1 . Fabricate doors of type, sizes and designs indicated. Provide door clearance of
1 /8" at jambs and heads and 5/8" at bottoms. Doors shall have lock edges
beveled 1 /8" in 2".
2. Finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Form
moulded members straight and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed
and in true alignment. All welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed
smooth so they are invisible after finishing.
3. Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams. Leave seams invisible or weld, fill and
grind smooth. Close top and bottom edges of all hollow metal exterior doors to
provide a weather seal, provided as part of door construction.
4. Fabricate exterior doors with face sheets welded to perimeter stiles and inner
frame members. Form perimeter frame with continuous one-piece channel at
hinge edge, continuous one-piece channel at lock edge and channels at top and
bottom. Inner frame members shall be continuous one-piece vertical steel rib
stiffeners spaced not to exceed 6" o.c. Face sheets are to be continuously arc
t welded to perimeter channels. Weld face sheets to interior frame members in
manner to provide a door with smooth surfaces. Spaces between stiffeners
shall be sound -deadened and insulated full height of door where scheduled.
5. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for
hardware requirements. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to
receive all mortise -type hardware. Provide reinforcing only for doors to receive
surface -applied hardware as required. Gages of metal for reinforcing plates shall
comply with manufacturer's recommendations for type of hardware used and
size and thickness of doors.
6. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth uniform
finish.
7. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute re-
quirements and recommendations.
1. Form frames of steel to sizes and shapes as detailed. Frames shall be
r ; combination -type with integral trim and fabricated with full -welded type
construction at joints.
' 2. Form frames with full mitered corners and stops, butt T-joints of frames and
continuously, weld all joints for full depth and width of frame and trim. Close all
contact edges tight and dress all welds on exposed surfaces smooth and flush.
3. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects.
0241.02 081 10-3
Fabricate moulded members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in
true alignment and fastenings concealed.
4. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for
hardware requirements.
a. Prepare frames at factory by templates for installation of specified type
hardware. Welding of hinges to frames is not acceptable. Provide
frames to receive surface -applied hardware with reinforcing plates only.
Provide cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts.
5. Provide jamb anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for type of wall
substrate.
a. Fabricate jambs of frames with dimples for machine bolt anchorage
specified in paragraph 2.02 above.
6. Provide floor anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for anchoring
frame to type of floor construction. Clips shall be adjustable and drilled for two
(2) 3/8" anchor bolts.
7. Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and
grind to smooth finish.
8. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer as specified below.
2.06 FINISHES
A. Shop -prime by manufacturer using a phosphatized treatment followed by a prime coat
paint finish to all surfaces. Clean and chemically treat surfaces to ensure complete paint
adherence. Follow with a baked -on coat of rust -inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc -chromate
or synthetic resin primer on all surfaces. Air -drying is acceptable when metal is electro-
galvanized. Field finishing is specified in Section 09900.
B. Shop -prime by manufacturer using a hot -dipped galvanized process in accordance with
ASTM A525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. Field finishing
is specified in Section 09900.
PART 3 EXECUTION r -
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrates, wall openings and conditions under which the
hollow metal door and frames are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions
detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and conditions governing the work of this
Section prior to beginning fabrication.
C. Contractor shall verify depth of all frames with specified wall constructions prior to
fabrication. Notify Architect of any discrepancies or propose required modifications in
the shop drawings, noted as deviations as specified in Section 01340.
D. For welded frames, provide temporary steel shipping spreaders fastened across bottom
of frames. Where construction will permit concealment, leave spreaders in place after j
installation; otherwise remove spreaders when frames are set and anchored. In place f
of spreaders, frames may be strapped together in pairs with heads inverted for bracing
during shipment. Before shipping, label each frame with metal or plastic tags to show
their location, size, door swing and other pertinent information. Number frames to
correspond to opening numbers on construction drawings.
0241.02 081 10-4
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation of hollow metal doors and frames is specified in Section 06200,
Finish Carpentry.
B. Install frames and doors in accordance with SDI-100, except as amended in this
Section. Remove shipping spreaders, set frames in position, plumb, align and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with
expansion bolts or with power fasteners. Provide wood spreaders to maintain jamb
alignment. Build wall anchors into walls, or secure to adjoining construction as
indicated or specified. Where frames require ceiling struts or other overhead bracing,
they shall be anchored securely to ceilings or structural framing above, as indicated or
as required by site conditions.
C. Frames: Install hollow metal frames plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion
of 1 /16". Ensure frames are accurately and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction.
D. Foam in insulation in frames scheduled for insulated doors.
E. Doors: Install hollow metal doors plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion
of 1 /16". Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700 and
adjust as necessary for proper operation.
F. After installation, touch-up scratched or damaged surfaces. Use type of primer identical
to that used for shop coat.
G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in doors, sidelites, and transoms, where
scheduled.
H. Doors are to be finished without hardware. Coordinate with painting trades. Masking
of hardware is unacceptable.
3,03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect doors and frames from damage during transportation and at site. After
installation, protect doors and frames from damage during subsequent construction
activities. Damaged work will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost
to the Owner.
B. Clean all surfaces of hollow metal doors and frames, and leave prepared for field
finishing. Refer to Section 09900, Painting.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 081 10-5
SECTION 08331
STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install insulated steel sectional overhead doors, manually operated, as
scheduled on the Drawings for exterior locations.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals: Steel jamb and head frame.
2. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. FS QQ-S-775: Steel sheets, carbon, zinc -coated (galvanized) by the hot -dip process.
B. Design Criteria: Doors shall be designed to withstand horizontal wind load of 20 psf
minimum. Deflection of door in horizontal position shall be 1 /120 of door width
maximum.
C. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that steel sectional overhead door systems
furnished are appropriate for the opening sizes scheduled, the type of structural support
provided and the track configuration and all materials specified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and shop drawings indicating
unit sizes, configurations, accessories and assembly details.
1. Manufacturer/Supplier shall review all aspects of the doors, operators and
installation specified herein or shown on the Drawings prior to fabrication and
notify the Architect of any discrepancies.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating pertinent dimensioning, general
construction, component connections and details, accessories, anchorage methods,
hardware locations and installation details.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and hardware in manufacturer's packaging complete with installation
instructions.
1.05 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in material,
workmanship and installation by the distributor.
PART PRODUCTS
r 2.01 INSULATED STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
A. General: Heavy-duty 3" insulated and thermally broken steel sectional overhead doors,
with interior and exterior skin material mechanically interlocked and pressure bonded
0241.02 08331-1
to an expanded polystyrene core.
B. Door Sections: 3" thick 26-gage roll -formed from commercial quality hot -dipped
galvanized steel per ASTM A525 and A526. Each door section to have two (2) deep
ribs and four (4) pencil grooves nominal for added strength; tongue -and -groove joint
between sections for weathertight closure.
C. Core Material: 2-7/8" thick elementally stable expanded polystyrene.
D. Stiles: End stiles to be 14-gage hot -dipped center stiles to be galvanized steel with
thermal break.
E. Thermal Performance: Section set shall have overall U-value of 0.0738 minimum
(R=13.55), as tested in accordance with ASTM C236.
1. Maximum air infiltration at door perimeter: 0.81 cfm per foot at 25 mph wind
velocity.
2. No air leakage shall be detected between section joints when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283.
F. Thermal Break Seals/Weatherstripping: Provide perimeter seals for jambs, header and
floor as follows:
1. Thermal Break/Section Joint Seals: Interior and exterior skins shall be separated
along their length by integral dual durometer vinyl section joint seal, attached
with mechanical interlock.
2. Floor Seals: Bottom seal shall be flexible U-type vinyl encased in an extruded
aluminum retainer.
3. Jamb Seals: EPDM rubber blade attached to a rigid vinyl snap -on extrusion,
mounted to the track angle.
4. Header Seals: EPDM rubber sealing strip, attached by a galvanized steel retainer.
G. Tracks: Galvanized track, manufacturer's standard size for particular door size. Tracks
to be bracket- or continuous -angle mounted and fully adjustable for sealing door to
jamb. Horizontal track to be adequately reinforced with continuous angle.
H. Track Configuration: Normal headroom, single incline, or type recommended by
manufacturer for installation.
I. Spring Counterbalance: Heavy-duty oil tempered wire torsion springs on continuous ball
bearing cross header steel shaft. Galvanized aircraft -type lifting cables with minimum
safety factor of 5 to 1.
J. Hardware: Hinges and brackets to be galvanized steel. Track rollers shall be ten (10)
1/4" diameter hardened steel balls per roller (2") and ten (10) 5/16" diameter hardened
steel balls per roller (3"). t
K. Locks:
1 . Exterior Lock: Five -pin tumbler cylinder with night latch and steel bar engaging
track.
2. Interior Lock: Provide interior deadbolt with hole for padlock. Padlock supplied
by Owner.
L. Frames: Structural steel plate jambs and head are specified in Section 05999.
M. Finish:
i,
1. Field finishing of exterior surfaces specified in Section 09900. Interior surfaces
to remain as primed by manufacturer.
N. Window Lites: Factory -installed 24"x8" inserts in doors where scheduled, encased in j
continuous one-piece vulcanized EPDM rubber frames.
1 . Glazing: Double glazed, 5/8" DSB. ,
0. Approved Models and Manufacturers:
1. Tri-Core, manufactured by Raynor Manufacturing Co., Dixon, IL, (815) 288- i
1431, as basis of design.
2. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc., Brooklyn, NY, (800) 257-4634.
3. Delden Manufacturing Co., Inc., Kansas City, MO, 1816) 221-2844.
0241.02 08331-2
4. Kinnear, Columbus, OH, (614) 294-5509.
5. McKee Door, Aurora, IL, (312) 897-9600.
6. Overhead Door Corp., Dallas, TX, (214) 233-6611.
7. Atlas Roll-Lite, Edison, NJ.
8. Northwest Door Inc.
9. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
r--
acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Manufacturer/Supplier shall review all aspects of the doors, operators and installation
specified herein or shown on the Drawings prior to fabrication and notify the Architect
of any discrepancies.
B. Ensure that track configuration specified is compatible with headroom prior to
fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sectional overhead doors and tracks in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
B. Fit, align and adjust complete door assemblies level and plumb, to provide smooth
operation.
C. Install operating hardware and lubricate as necessary for smooth operation.
3.03 TESTING AND CLEANING
A. Test sectional overhead door operation and electric operator functions in the presence
of the Owner's principal representative.
B. Clean all sectional door panels, tracks, hardware and accessories, and leave exterior
surfaces prepared for field finishing specified in Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 08331-3
SECTION 08630
SOLID VINYL WINDOWS
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish solid extruded vinyl fixed windows and accessories.
B. Installation of same, unless otherwise arranged for.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation.
3. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards
1. ASTM D4099-82: Vinyl Windows.
2. ANSI/AAMA 101-93: Performance Requirements.
3. UBC: Current edition of the Uniform Building Code.
4. HUD: UM 35.
B. Fabricator: Conform to standards of the Society of Plastics (SP) and the American
Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA).
C. Installer: If installation of new solid vinyl windows will be by subcontractor to
window fabricator/manufacturer, installing subcontractor shall be subject to
prequalification by the Owner.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature certifying compliance with
specifications of this Section.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating proposed unit sizes, configurations,
fabrication and installation details.
C. Certification: Submit test results certifying that materials supplied meet the technical
performance requirements of this Section.
D. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of molded -in finishes/colors for
selection by the Architect.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering window components against
defects in materials and workmanship for the following periods:
9 1. Life -time warranty covering materials for all vinyl parts.
2. Three(3)-year warranty covering defects in workmanship and non -vinyl parts.
3. Three(3)-year warranty for sealed glass units. Also refer to Section 08800.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SOLID VINYL WINDOWS
0241.02 08630-1
A. Windows: Fixed units as indicated on the Drawings. Notify the Architect of size
discrepancies from design intent prior to fabrication.
1. Materials: Extruded rigid polyvinyl/chloride (PVC), minimum 0.080" thick.
2. Frame/Sash Depth: 2-3/4" minimum.
3. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard double vinyl weatherstripping.
4. Color: To be selected.
B. Glazing: Specified in Section 08800, factory glazed.
C. Design Criteria: Minor deviations from these design standards will be considered by
the Architect in evaluating requests for "equal" products.
1. Air Infiltration: .30 cfm at 2.57 psf (26 mph).
2. R-Value (with 5/8" insulating glass specified in Section 08800): 2.38 at 0° F
outside, 700 F inside, 15 mph wind. IU-Value = .42).
3. Water Resistance: No leakage at 2.57 psf.
4. Structural Performance: No damage at 25 psf exterior; no damage at 12.5
psf interior.
5. Condensation Resistance Factor (crf): 57 at 0° F outside, 700 inside and 3%
relative humidity inside.
6. Minor deviations between manufacturers in the specified design performance
criteria are acceptable as approved by the Architect.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Summit 760 Series by Wenco Windows, Cheyenne, WY, (800)242-7444, and
distributed in Loveland, CO, (303)635-3026 as the basis of design.
2. Alumax Windows, Dallas, TX, distributed locally by Alumax, Loveland, CO,
(303) 667-8660.
3. Alcoa Vinyl Windows, distributed by Morgan-Wightman Supply Co., Denver,
CO, (303)394-2301.
4. Champagne Industries, Inc., Denver, CO (303) 375-0570.
5. Philips Vinyl Windows by Norandex Inc., Denver, CO, (800)523-3526.
6. Omega Windows manufactured by Federal Building, Aurora, CO, (800) 332-
0541.
7. Grand View Vinyl Windows by Georgia-Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (800)284-
5347.
8. Sheerframe Windows manufactured by L. B. Plastics, Inc., Mooresville, NC,
and distributed by Worldwide Windows, Salina, KS, (913) 826-1701 .
9. Manufacturers. providing materials of same function, design and performance
are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding.
2.02 CONSTRUCTION AND FABRICATION
A. Frame Construction: Corners shall be coped, butted and fastened with two (2)
screws. All joints are to be sealed. Frames are to feature multi -chambered hollow
thermalized insulating system for thermal performance. Frames are to be fit with
integral nailing fin for installation.
B. Sash Construction: Sash members shall be dual durometer PVC extrusions consisting '
of rigid PVC shapes with soft vinyl fins in each glazing channel. Corners are to be i
mitered, keyed and fastened with four (4) screws. All corner joints are to be sealed.
C. Sill Construction: Sill frames for windows shall be formed with true slope for
weathertightness.
t,
0241.02 08630-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Fabricator/Installer shall inspect rough openings and conditions under which solid
vinyl windows are to be installed. Notify Contractor in writing of any conditions
which shall prevent the successful installation of the windows and doors. Intent is to
utilize manufacturer's standard sizes. Contractor to coordinate framing of rough
openings with approved shop drawings.
B. Field verify dimensions affecting the work of this Section prior to fabrication.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
B. Trim and case windows and install sills as detailed on the Drawings and specified in
Section 06200.
0241.02
END OF SECTION
08630-3
SECTION 08700
FINISH HARDWARE
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish finish hardware for exterior doors, other than specified in specific door
Sections.
B. Furnish keys in keyed groups as indicated, and deliver keys to Owner as specified.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation.
2. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
3. Section 08331, Steel Sectional Overhead Doors.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of
applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified.
1 . ANSI Al 1 5.2: Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-
3/4" Doors.
2. ANSI All5.9: Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single -
Acting.
3. ANSI Al56.1: Butts and Hinges.
4. ANSI Al 56.2: Locks and Lock Trim.
5. ANSI Al56.4: Door Controls (Closers).
6. ANSI A156.6: Architectural Door Trim.
7. ANSI Al 17.1-1992: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility.
8. Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990: Specifications for Handicapped
Accessibility.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule of each type of hardware required for job in
accordance with Section 01340, indicating door location, type, quantity required, style,
finish and keying group.
B. Templates: Supply hardware templates to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, and
respective Sections of Divisions 8 and 13 prior to hardware installation.
C. Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of
hardware supplied and necessary tools required for proper maintenance of hardware.
1.05 KEYING
A. Provide two (2) change keys for each lock.
B. Provide two (2) master keys for each master keyed group.
r C. Provide one (1) master key for installation in the key access box, specified in Section
10520, for fire department use.
0241.02 08700-1
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for the proper execution of the
work, including but not limited to:
1. Contractor will provide all required construction staking and field engineering,
not itemized as provided by the Owner in paragraph 1.02.
2. Intermediate survey at completion of formwork for foundation structures, as
specified herein.
3. Final completion survey, as specified herein.
4. Certification survey as may be required by applicable jurisdictions or utility
providers.
B. In addition to the specified surveys, Contractor shall provide any resurveying as may be
necessary by field changes or redesign.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01410, Testing.
2. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
1.02 OWNER -FURNISHED INFORMATION
A. Site Survey: Site survey prepared for the Owner by the Engineer will be provided to the
Contractor for his use on this project.
1. Such data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of
the Contract Documents. The data contained in the document prepared for the
Owner by the Engineer is believed to be reliable; however, the Architect and
Owner do not guarantee its accuracy or completeness.
B. Architectural Site Plan Drawing or Horizontal Control Plan prepared by the Archi-
tect/Engineer.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ a Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor licensed in the state of Colorado and
acceptable to the Owner and Architect.
B. Documentation and Records: Surveyor or Engineer shall maintain a complete and
accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. On request of the Architect,
submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.
1. Enter all survey notes and construction stake -out cut notes into bound, hard-
cover field books.
2. All survey data developed by the Contractor in performing the work shall be
available throughout the construction period.
0241.02 01050-1
D. Master Key Groups (review with Owner and Architect):
1 . Key entire building to Owner's existing Master key system.
2. Key all building entry doors together.
E. Stamp or engrave each key with appropriate keying designation (MASTER, 1 AA, 2AA,
etc.). When keys are turned over to Owner at completion of the project, secure keys
with same keying designation on same ring, one (1) ring for each keying designation.
F. Key Blanks: Provide Owner with specified quantity of blanks for keying separate from
this contract.
1. Quantity: 4.
G. Deliver keys to the Owner as specified in paragraph 1 .06.B. below.
H. Provide keying for wire mesh partition locks, specified in Section 10605.
1.06 HARDWARE FUNCTIONS - CYLINDER LOCKS (BHMA)
A. F-81 (451) Entry Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by knob from either side,
except when outside knob is locked by turn button in inside knob. When outside knob
is locked, latchbolt is operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Turn
button must be manually rotated to unlock outside knob.
B. Deadlocks:
1 . E-21 51 : Deadbolt operated by key from outside and turn button from inside.
Bolt automatically deadlocks when fully thrown.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Neatly and securely package hardware items and identify for individual location and
use.
B. Keys shall be delivered directly to the Owner by certified mail, unless arranged
otherwise at the Pre -Construction Conference or by subsequent written direction from
the Owner.
1.08 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH HARDWARE
A. General: Furnish hardware items of the type, function, quality and quantity to meet the
requirements of this Section and for a complete and operational installation. Products
listed are indicative of the design, grade, construction, size and type to be used by the
listed manufacturer. Alternate products of same quality, function, performance and I
design are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the j
specific requirements of Section 01600 or this Section.
1. Hinges: Stanley, Bommer, Hager or Mont -Hard. r .
2. Closers: LCN, Norton or Dorma.
3. Locksets and Latchsets:
a. Commercial Line: Corbin Russwin, Sargent or Schlage.
4. Deadbolts: Corbin Russwin, Sargent or Schlage.
0241.02 08700-2
5. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Pemko, Reese, Zero or Master Manufac-
turers or Barrier Systems by Hager.
6. Trim, Stop and Holders: Hager, Trimco, Rockwood, Quality or Master Manufac-
turers.
7. Door Gaskets and Sweeps: Pemko, Reese, Zero, National Guard Products Inc.
or Barrier Systems by Hager.
8. Manufacturers furnishing finish hardware items of the same function, design,
appearance, quality and performance are acceptable as approved by the
Architect prior to bidding except where restricted in Section 01600 or elsewhere
in this Section.
B. Consistency: Hardware lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer, at a
minimum to the extent scheduled:
1 . All closers shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project.
2. All cylinders, locksets and passage sets for hollow metal or wood doors shall be
by the same manufacturer and of the same finish, unless otherwise indicated.
Coordination of keying shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier for
these items.
3. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when
available designs are not satisfactory.
C. Handing: Handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier, to be reviewed
by the Architect as a part of the Hardware Schedule submittal.
D. Special Requirements:
1. All hinges shall be ball -bearing type, unless otherwise indicated. Provide non -
removable pins in all hinges of exterior outswinging doors.
2. All cores of cylinder locksets shall be interchangeable, unless otherwise
specified.
3. Where kickplates are specified for only one side of each door leaf, install on
active side, or as recommended by the supplier.
4. Closers shall be provided with hold -open capability, except where part of a fire -
rated door assembly.
5. Closers shall be parallel arm type for push side applications, and mounted on the
I room side of all doors where possible. Regular arm type closers are acceptable
for pull side applications.
E. Accessibility: Door hardware shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A117.1,
current edition, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for handicapped accessibility,
and the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. (edit as necessary)
1 . All doors shall have lever trim as scheduled in this Section.
F. Approved Manufacturers:
1 . Refer to paragraph 2.01 A. above for approved manufacturers for specific types
of finish hardware.
2. Manufacturers providing products of same quality, function, performance,
design and finishes are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless
limited by the specific requirements of Section 01600 or this Section.
2.02 HARDWARE DESIGNS AND FINISHES
t.
A. General: Design of finish hardware shall comply with the requirements specified in
t` paragraph 2.01 above.
L_. B. Commercial Line: Heavy-duty, commercial grade hardware.
1. Sargent 10 Line key -in -lever handle as basis of design.
C. Commercial Grade Trims:
1 . Lever trim: LL by Sargent or equal.
0241.02 08700-3
D. Panic Set Trims: FLW Design by Sargent or equal.
E. Commercial Line Finish:
1. US10, Satin Brass.
F. Threshold Finish: Mill finish cast or extruded bronze.
2.03 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE ITEMS
A. Approved models and manufacturers, as basis of design:
1. Locksets and Latchsets:
a. Commercial Line: Sargent Line 8 and 10 with lever handle as scheduled,
2-3/4" backset.
2. Hinges: Stanley or Hager B61279, steel, full -mortised, 5-knuckle ball -bearing, 4-
1/2"x4-1/2", NRP.
3. Deadbolts:
a. Commercial Line: Schlage B-600 Series, Heavy Duty.
4. Closers: LCN 4000 Series, with full molded cover. Provide delayed -action
option where scheduled.
5. Kickplates: Trimco, 10" x length recommended for door width, 16-gage, (.050"
aluminum)(polished brass), beveled edges.
6. Saddle Thresholds: Pemko 271 A-5, flat, or Reese S483AV-5" with integral
vinyl stop. All thresholds shall be handicapped accessible.
7. Sweep: Pemko 307AV.
8. Weatherstripping: Pemko 303AV for wood doors/frames; Pemko 316AV for
hollow metal doors/frames.
9. Floor Stop/Holder: Ives 450 holder and stop.
10. Door Bottom: Pemko 317AN. Mount with neoprene bulb under door if
conditions permit.
B. Furnish hardware items as listed in Schedule at the end of this Section, complete to the
function intended.
C. Furnish all accessory hardware items as required for a complete installation, including
strikes and anchorage devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the doors, frames and other substrates that are to receive finish
hardware and notify the Contractor of any existing condition that will be detrimental to
the successful installation and performance of the hardware. Do not install hardware
until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.
B. Ensure that door cut-outs or bores for hardware and frame cut-outs for strike plates are
properly aligned.
C. Do not install finish hardware until doors, frames and other substrates have been
painted, stained or otherwise finished as specified in other Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE
A. General: Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using
proper templates.
0241.02 08700-4
B. Mounting Heights: Maintain following mounting heights for doors, from finished floor
to center line of hardware item:
1 . Locksets and Latchsets: 40", unless special height requirements are specified
elsewhere.
2. Deadlocks: 48".
C. Verify compliance of mounting heights with ANSI A117.1-1992 and ADA-1990
requirements.
D. Ensure proper operation of all finish hardware items. Adjust alignments as necessary
for smooth operation.
3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: While the following Hardware Schedule is intended to cover all doors and
other movable parts of the project and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall
be the specific responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the Drawings
and Specifications and furnish proper hardware for all openings, whether listed or not.
If there are any omissions in the hardware groups, the hardware supplier shall notify
the Architect prior to bid opening for instructions; otherwise, the list will be considered
complete. No extras will be allowed by the Owner or the Architect.
B. It is intended that the following groups be complete in the coverage of required items,
but it is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to furnish finish hardware necessary
for a complete installation. Where items are referred to in the singular, they shall be
furnished in numbers sufficient for a complete installation.
C. Every attempt has been made to coordinate the finish hardware items between each
other and with doors, etc. to which they are to be installed. It is the responsibility of
the hardware supplier to ensure the compatibility of the finish hardware supplied with
both related hardware items and the doors, etc. to which they are to be used.
D. Hardware Notes:
1 . Ea. refers to each leaf.
2. LH refers to left-hand leaf only.
3. RH refers to right-hand leaf only.
4. All other handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier.
PART 4 SCHEDULE
4.01 HARDWARE GROUPS
Group A
Entry Storage
1 '/z pr.
Hinges
1 ea.
Lockset, F-81, with lever trim
1 ea.
Deadbolt with thumbturn
1 ea.
Closer
1 ea.
Kickplates
1 ea.
Stop w/holder
1 ea.
Threshold
1 ea.
Sweep
1 set
Weatherstripping
END OF SECTION
1
0241.02 08700-5
SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install glass and glazing for insulated steel door systems, unless factory
installed.
B. Furnish and install glass and glazing for solid vinyl windows, unless factory installed.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed vision lites.
2. Section 08630, Solid Vinyl Windows and Sliding Doors.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1 . Factory Sealed Insulated Glass Units: ASTM E774-84a, Standard Specifications
for Sealed Insulating Glass, when tested in accordance with ASTM E773-83,
Standard Test for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass.
2. FS DD-G-4151C: Glass, Plate, Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses.
3. FS DD-G-14038: Glass, Plate (Float), Heat -Strengthened and Fully Tempered.
4. FS TT-S-001543: Sealing Compound, Silicone Base (for caulking and glazing
in buildings and other structures).
5. NAAMM #SS-1B-68: Non -Skinning Resilient Preformed Compounds -Tapes,
Ribbons, Beads with Release Paper.
6. Sigma #67-7-2: Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
7. Uniform Building Code, current edition: Wind exposure classification.
B. Manufacturer: Certified by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
j - C. Installer: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and
1 , experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this
Section.
D. Design Criteria:
1. Wind Load (horizontal): 100 mph, Exposure C in accordance with the Uniform
Building Code, or as required by the governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
1 -
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product literature and specifications for factory
sealed insulated glass units, all glass with special coatings or film and opaque spandrel
glass, unless glazing is part of submittal by manufacturer of doors specified elsewhere.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule glass deliveries to coincide with glazing schedules.
B. Deliver glass to the site in manufacturer's original, sealed cartons.
C. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically.
D. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between individual lites. Keep glass and
interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are above dewpoint. If outside
0241.02 08800-1
storage is necessary, cover the glass and interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic
and inspect periodically.
E. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature
changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes,
comply with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and
sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
F. Stack individual lites on edge and lean against sturdy supports at a slope of 5-71 from
vertical. Cushion the bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips or
other foreign material.
G. Avoid rotating or cartwheeling factory sealed insulated glass units over their corners.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel
substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1 . Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 401 F.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Insulating Glass: Provide manufacturer's written warranty signed by manufacturer for
insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that
deteriorate within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only
deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting,
and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date
of Substantial Completion.
PART PRODUCTS r
2.01 GLASS AND GLAZING i
A. General: Furnish all types and thicknesses of glass shown on the Drawings or specified
herein.
1 . It is the responsibility of the Contractor to install tempered glass and wire glass
at all locations where required by current codes. Advise Architect of any
locations or conditions where these requirements will apply where not already
shown on the Drawings.
B. Glazed Vision Lites: Factory -installed glazing for sectional overhead doors specified in
Section 08331.
C. Approved Manufacturers: r
1 . Plate or Float Glass, Tempered Glass and Insulated Glass Units:
a. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA, and represented in 1
Denver, CO, (303) 534-6241.
b. Libby -Owens -Ford (LOF), Toledo, OH, (419) 247-4892.
C. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc., Clinton, NC, (919) 591-7101.
d. Interpane Glass Company, Clinton, NC; (800) 334-1797.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same appearance, function and perfor-
mance are acceptable.
0241.02 08800-2
2.02 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials
involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with
surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or
minus 5.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Extruded or neoprene molded fabricated into frames with molded
corners, ASTM C542.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side -walking).
F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding,
nonoutgassing, strips of closed -cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance.
G. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl type, NAAMM SS-1 B-68, with integral spacing devices,
10-15 durometer hardness, paper release, by Kawneer or equal.
1 . Color: Clear or white for painted wood or hollow metal frames; dark bronze for
bronze aluminum frames.
H. Silicone Sealer: Clear GE Silicone Sealer or equal.
2.03 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required for glazed openings
indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and
bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites in a manner that
produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Installer shall examine the openings and framing systems into which the glass and
glazing is to be installed and report any conditions in writing to the Contractor which
may prevent the successful installation of the work. Do not begin the glazing
installation until these conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Installer.
B. Clean glazing channels, stops and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free
from obstructions and deleterious substances which might impair the work.
1 . Remove protective coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond
of sealants.
2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately
prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes.
3. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Verify site dimensions of all tempered or other glazings that cannot be field cut prior to
ordering.
0241.02 08800-3
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Unpack the glass from cases in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not move partially unpacked cases or "end pick" individual lites.
B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately prior to start of installation.
1. Do not install items which are improperly sized, have damaged edges or are
scratched, abraded or damaged in any other manner.
C. Prevent contact of surfaces of individual Iites; do not slide one lite over another.
D. Installation personnel shall wear gloves, safety shoes, hard hats and glazing gauntlets at
all times during the handling and installation of the glass.
E. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction
operations that might cause damage to glass. Complete clean down of masonry shall
be completed prior to installation.
3.03 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Ensure that concrete surface treatments, including sand or water blasting, grouting and
waterproofing, have been completed prior to glazing of openings in the structural
precast concrete wall panels.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF GLASS AND GLAZING
A. General: All glazing shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations.
1 . Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements
are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
2. Glazing channel dimensions shall provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge
and face clearances, and adequate sealant thickness, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by site conditions during installation.
B. Clean surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry. Cut glazing channel to proper
length and install on glass pane. Weld joints by butting channel and dabbing with
sealant.
C. Locate setting blocks at sills 1 /4 of the width of the glass in from each end of the
glass, unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
1. Use blocks of proper size to support the glass in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Provide spacers for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, to separate glass
from stops, except where continuous glazing gaskets or felts are provided.
a. Locate spacers no more than 24" apart and no closer than 12" to a
corner.
b. Place spacers opposite one another.
C. Make bite of spacer on glass 1/4" or more.
D. Set glass in a manner which produces the greatest possible degree of uniformity in
appearance.
1. Install glass so distortion waves, if present, run in the horizontal direction. j
2. Install glass with special coatings as required for proper performance and to I
meet the design intent.
E. Do not use two different glazing materials in the same joint system, unless the joint use
is approved in advance by the Architect.
F. Mask or otherwise protect surfaces adjacent to installation of sealants.
0241.02 08800-4
G. Miter -cut and seal the joints of glazing gaskets in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, to provide watertight and airtight seal at corners and other locations
where joints are required only with specific approval of the Architect.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect installed glass with screens of plywood or plastic wherever welding, cutting,
sandblasting, fireproofing, painting or other potentially damaging work is in process.
B. Do not mark glass with X or other identity symbol after glazing.
C. Final clean all glass surfaces in accordance with Section 01710, and remove all labels.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 08800-5
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare surfaces to receive opaque painted finishes as specified.
B. Finish surfaces as indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. Generally, the
scope of work shall include painting all exposed surfaces, whether specifically noted
or not, and certain concealed surfaces, except where materials are prefinished or where
intended to remain unfinished as described in paragraph 1.02 below.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials.
2. Section 04210, Brick Masonry: Sealer.
3. Section 07180, Water Repellant Sealers.
4. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
5. Division 15, Mechanical.
6. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and
inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces
and duct shafts.
B.
Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze
and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section, except as may
be so specified.
C.
Materials, fixtures and equipment specified or supplied by the manufacturer as
prefinished shall not be painted, unless otherwise indicated in the Schedule at the end
j
of this Section. Materials supplied with factory -applied primer coats shall be field
finished by this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
r D.
Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as
valve operators, linkages, sensing devices and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Priming or finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory -applied or
installer -performed under other Sections.
F.
Restoration of painted murals and other historical restoration or reconstruction of
painted plaster surfaces shall be by separate contract.
1.03 QUALITY
ASSURANCE
A. Finish work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms
i specializing in work of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience
in projects of similar size and complexity.
B. Materials shall be applied with appropriate equipment and tools as specified herein, or
as required to provide the specified quality.
i C. Coordination of Paint Finishes, Primers and Substrates:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime
coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the
0241.02 09900-1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Surveyor or Engineer: Submit name and address of Surveyor or Professional Engineer
to be employed by the Contractor to Architect for approval before beginning work of
this Section, if requested by the Owner or Architect.
B. Completion Certificate: Upon completion of the work, submit to Architect a certificate
signed by the Surveyor or Engineer certifying that elevations and locations are in
conformance or non-conformance with Contract Documents. Refer to Section 01700,
Contract Close -Out.
C. Final Completion Survey: Upon completion of the work, submit to the Owner an ALTA
survey as specified below.
PART PRODUCTS
Not Applicable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Reference Points: The Owner shall set construction reference points itemized in
paragraph 1.02. Immediately upon entering the project, Contractor shall locate and
maintain benchmarks and all other grades, lines, levels and dimensions. Report any
errors or inconsistencies to the Architect/Engineer before commencing work.
B. Basis for Layout: Surveyor shall reference the Architectural Site Plan or other
Horizontal Control Plan in the Drawings as the basis for the layout of the Project
Grading plans, utility plans or other site -related Drawings shall not be used for basic
building layout, other than for required coordination.
C. Permanent Benchmarks: Surveyor or Engineer shall establish a minimum of two 12)
permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control
points.
1. Benchmarks shall be referenced U.S.G.S. datum based on elevations above sea
level if required by the Owner.
D. Coordination: Surveyor shall contact all jurisdictions and/or utility providers for field
locates and temporary markings of affected utility lines prior to beginning survey work.
E. Batter Boards and Levels: Engineer or Surveyor shall stake out the building and provide
and rigidly set batter boards. Such batter boards shall continue in use free to all
requiring them, but the Contractor shall remain responsible for their maintenance and
accuracy. From permanent benchmarks the engineer or surveyor shall ascertain grades
and levels to the building as needed.
F. Preservation of Monuments and Stakes: Carefully preserve all monuments, bench-
marks, property markers, reference points and stakes. In case of the destruction of
these, the Contractor will be charged with expense of replacement and shall be
responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments
or benchmarks which must be removed or disturbed shall be protected until properly
referenced for relocation. Furnish materials and assistance for proper replacement of
such monuments or benchmarks.
0241.02 01050-2
various substrates.
3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish
materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used.
4. Provide barrier coats over non -compatible primers or remove the primer and
reprime as required.
5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified
coating systems over prime coatings or substrates supplied under other
Sections.
D. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all paint materials supplied contain no lead or
other toxic substances.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications to show
compliance with the specified requirements.
B. Materials List: Submit materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this
Section.
C. Samples: Painting Contractor shall prepare samples of each substrate and finish
specified, as directed by the Architect.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's
name, type of paint, brand name, color, designation and instructions for mixing and/or
reducing.
B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature
of 45' F in a well -ventilated area.
C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes, unless moisture contents of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Exterior Wood: 15%.
B. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 40' F 1
before applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior
work is 45' F, 50' F for exterior work.
C. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain
temperatures above 45' F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application
of finishes.
D. Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be finished.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Adequately
q y protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result
of inadequate or unsuitable protection.
B. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or
droppings from soiling surfaces not being painted and, in particular, surfaces within
storage and preparation area.
C. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal
containers and remove daily from the site.
D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting
0241.02 09900-2
operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion
of work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove
Permanent lacquer finish.
1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock of not less than five (5)
gallons of each color of finish coating, except that one (1) gallon shall be adequate for
all accent and trim colors.
B. Containers are to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Paints, Enamels and Fillers: Type and brand scheduled herein, ready -mixed, except field
catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency,
capable of readily and uniformly being dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture.
Paints shall have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or
curing free of streaks or sags.
1. Paint materials shall contain no lead or other toxic substances. Refer to
paragraph 1.03.c.
B. Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not
specifically indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified, of high
quality and approved manufacturer.
C. Color(s) as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full color selection, unless
otherwise indicated. Painter shall prepare samples for the Architect's approval of each
paint color selected. Remake samples until approved, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
D. Approved Manufacturers: Use the same brand throughout the project for each type of
paint material specified:
1. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200, as basis of design.
2. Paint: Pittsburgh, Diamond Vogel, ICI Dulux, Fuller O'Brien, Benjamin Moore,
Kelly Moore, Kwal-Howell and Sophir Morris. Using product lines of same
quality, function and performance are acceptable only as approved by the
Architect prior to bidding.
3. Stain, varnish and other transparent finishes: Refer to Section 09930.
2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
i
A. For application of the specified paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for
application of the particular paint by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect,
except as limited by paragraph 2.02.C.
B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually
compatible with the material to be applied and that integrity of the finish will not be
jeopardized by use of this equipment.
C. Contractor shall use the following application equipment for the specific condition listed,
unless otherwise approved:
1 . Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is
not permitted.
2. Insulated Metal Doors, Frames and Sidelites: Spray application only. Brushing
0241.02 09900-3
or rolling is not permitted.
3. Other areas indicated in paragraph 3.03.
2.03 COLOR SCHEDULES
A. The Architect will prepare marked -up elevations or a color schedule with samples for
guidance in painting. Contractor shall furnish samples of all other related finish
materials for coordination in preparation of the color schedule.
B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the
work, subject to the following:
1. Exterior Work: A maximum of three (3) different colors will be used, plus
variations for trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work.
PART.3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted or finished
prior to commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially
affect proper application and final appearance. Do not commence work until such
defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the painting subcontractor.
Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. General: All preparatory work shall be subject to evaluation and acceptance by the
Architect. Painting subcontractor will accept responsibility for the preparation of all
surfaces, as specified herein, prior to finishing.
B. Ensure that the Contractor has corrected defects in all surfaces which may adversely
affect work of this Section, including but not limited to:
1. Hollow metal doors and frames. ) _
2. Wood siding and trim.
3. Insulated metal doors.
4. Finish carpentry items.
5. Primed hardboard siding and trims.
C. New Wood Surfaces: Wipe dust and grit from hardwood and softwood items and
millwork prior to priming. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with
sealer. Fill knots, imperfections, nail holes and cracks after primer has dried and sand
smooth. Back -prime interior and exterior woodwork.
1 . Back -prime interior woodwork which is to receive paint of enamel finish with
enamel undercoat paint.
2. Back -prime exterior wood with manufacturer's recommended primer,
D. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse j
well with clean water and allow the surface to dry completely. i E. Remove surface contamination and oils from galvanized surfaces and wash with
solvent. Apply a coat of etching -type primer.
F. Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel, ferrous metal and iron surfaces. '
Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing, sandblasting or 1
any other necessary method.
1. Clean unprimed surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of
phosphoric acid solution, ensuring that weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly
0241.02 09900-4
I
cleaned. Prime surfaces as required.
2. Sand and scrape shop -primed surfaces to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with
solvent and prime surfaces as required.
3. Back -prime structural steel and ferrous metal surfaces to be in contact with
concrete, unless furnished by other Sections.
4. Ensure that excess weld slag or flux deposits are removed, and that all exposed
welds are ground or sanded to specified appearance.
G. Prime top and bottom edges of metal doors with enamel undercoat when they are to be
painted.
H. Refer to Section 09930, Transparent Finishes, for preparation of other materials and
surfaces prior to staining or application of transparent finishes.
I. Remove all hardware from doors before painting. Masking of hardware is unacceptable.
J. Schedule painting prior to installation of prefinished materials, specialties, furnishings
and fixtures to the extent possible, including but not limited to:
1. Finish hardware.
2. Surface -mounted mechanical and electrical devices such as thermostats,
prefinished grilles and diffusers, switchplates and outlet cover plates, etc.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply finish materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Ensure that surfaces have been properly prepared and primed prior
to application of finish coats.
B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat of finish to dry before the
following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. Sand lightly
between coats to achieve the required finish.
C. Brush Applications:
1 . Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film.
2. Finish coats shall be finished by roping the paint, moving from dry to wet areas,
3. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
D. Spray Applications:
1. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, confine spray
application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work
would be inferior.
2. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding
equivalent of brush coats.
3. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two (2)
coats in one (1) pass.
E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage.
Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements.
3.04 PAINTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Painting of exposed equipment, louvers, ductwork, piping, conduits, etc. shall
be work of this Section, unless otherwise indicated.
1 . Paint all ductwork, piping, conduit and devices to be exposed to view in the
completed project, unless prefinished or in concealed areas as defined in
paragraph 1.02.
2. Coordinate extent of field finishing of mechanical and electrical equipment with
the Architect as necessary.
0241.02
09900-5
3. Architect retains the right to require prefinished diffusers, grilles and other
mechanical or electrical devices to be field finished, whether specifically called
for or not.
4. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare
ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports in exposed locations, except
where items are plated or covered with a prefinished coating, or where located
in mechanical chase spaces. Finish paint primed equipment to color selected.
B. Color Coding: Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Sections for requirements concerning
color coding, identification branding of equipment, ducting, piping and conduit, if
required.
1. Color code equipment, piping, conduit and exposed ductwork in accordance
with requirements indicated.
2. Color banding and identification (flow arrows, naming, numbering, etc.).
C. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from
location and paint separately.
D. Paint face(s) and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing
backboards and mounting equipment on them.
1. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when
painted over or spattered.
E. Do not paint gas meters, electric meters and similar exterior equipment provided by
outside utility providers, if not permitted by those agencies. Coordinate requirements
with the appropriate Subcontractor prior to painting.
1 . Exposed gas piping leading to the gas meters shall be painted.
2. Exterior surface -mounted meter centers, disconnects, CT cabinets and similar
equipment shall be painted, where not specifically excluded above.
3. Interior panelboard cabinet frames and doors shall not be painted, unless
specified elsewhere.
3.05 PAINTING ROOFTOP ACCESSORIES
A. Paint exposed roof penetrations, flues, roof vents, exhaust vent caps, pipe vents, etc.,
where located on sloped roofs or otherwise exposed to view, unless prefinished or
otherwise indicated.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove paint from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where
spilled, splashed or splattered.
B. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of
tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.
C. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal
containers and remove daily from the site.
D. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
3.07 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Painted finishes shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the ! .
Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: �-
1. Consistency and smoothness of surface.
2. Coverage and mil thickness.
0241.02 09900-6
3. Color match between adjacent areas.
4. Compliance with approved sample(s).
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
NOTE: MWF indicates minimum wet film thickness which is a per coat measurement in mils
thickness. Systems are based on Sherwin-Williams (S-W) or as noted.
A. Exterior Exposed Steel Surfaces:
1. Location: Exposed surfaces of exterior steel, connectors and metal decking.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi -gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
B. Exterior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces:
1. Location: Hollow metal doors and frames, insulated steel doors, pipe bollards,
site signage poles, ornamental fencing, handrails and guardrails.
2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi -gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product S-W Industrial Enamel.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
C. Exterior Wood Surfaces (Enamel):
1. Location: Exterior wood siding, decorative details and miscellaneous trim.
2. Primer: One (1) coat exterior wood primer, MWF 4.0 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, gloss, MWF 4.0 mils.
4. Product: S-W SWP Gloss House and Trim.
5. Color(s): To be selected.
D. Exterior Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Location: Galvanized metal decking, flashings, downspouts, roof vents and
flues.
2. Primer: One (1) coat galvanized steel primer, MWF 3.6 mils.
3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd -resin enamel, semi -gloss, MWF 4.4 mils.
4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel.
5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces, or as selected.
E. Refer to Section 09930 for transparent finishes.
F. Solid Vinyl Windows: Prefinished by manufacturer. Refer to Section 04220 for sealer,
if applicable.
G. Soffit and Roof Vents: Prefinished by manufacturer.
H. Louvers: Paint where not prefinished by manufacturer.
I. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: Primed by manufacturer. Field finished by painting
subcontractor.
J. Gutter and Downspouts: Prefinished coil stock by manufacturer for seamless
installation.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 09900-7
SECTION 09930
TRANSPARENT FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prepare surfaces to receive transparent finishes as specified.
B. Finish surfaces as indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials.
2. Section 07180, Water Repellant Sealers: Sealer for brick, stone, or concrete
unit masonry.
3. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Exterior and interior carpentry and millwork.
4. Section 09900, Painting.
1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Unless otherwise indicated, finishing is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and
inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces
and duct shafts.
B. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze
and similar finished materials will not require finishing under this Section, except as may
be so specified.
C. Materials, fixtures and equipment specified or supplied by the manufacturer as
prefinished shall not be finished under this Section.
D. Do not finish moving parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as
valve operators, linkages, sensing devices and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Priming or finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory -applied or
f ' installer -performed under other Sections.
1.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Finish work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms
specializing in work of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience
in projects of similar size and complexity.
B. Materials shall be supplied with appropriate application equipment and tools as specified
herein, or as required to provide the specified quality.
C. Coordination of Transparent Finishes, Primers and Substrates:
1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used.
2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime
coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the
various substrates.
3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish
materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used.
4. Provide barrier coats over non -compatible primers or remove the primer and
reprime as required.
5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified
coating systems over prime coatings or substrates supplied under other
Sections.
0241.02 09930-1
D. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all finish materials supplied contain no lead or
other toxic substances.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data; Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications to show
compliance with the specified requirements.
B. Materials List: Submit materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this
Section.
C. Samples: Finish Contractor shall prepare samples of each substrate and finish specified,
as directed by the Architect, including but not limited to:
1 . Transparent finish samples for exterior cedar siding and components.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver finish materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's
name, type of stain or finish, brand name, color, designation and instructions for mixing
and/or reducing.
B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature
of 45' F in a well -ventilated area.
C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes, unless moisture contents of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Exterior Wood: 15%.
B. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 400 F '
before applying finishes. Minimum application temperature for varnish and polyure-
thane finishes if 650 F.
C. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain
temperatures above 45' F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application
of finishes.
D. Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be finished.
E. Preservative Sealer: Contractor shall plan the application of the specified preservative
sealer with the forecasted weather. Prevent the rapid evaporation of solvents by i.
avoiding very sunny, hot, and windy days. Schedule for overcast or cloudy and calm
wind days, if possible.
1.07 PROTECTION
A. Adequately protect other surfaces from finish materials. Repair damage as a result of
inadequate or unsuitable protection.
B. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or
droppings from soiling surfaces not being finished and, in particular, surfaces within
storage and preparation area.
C. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal I
containers and remove daily from the site.
D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to finishing
operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion
of work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove
permanent lacquer finish.
0241.02 09930-2
E. Provide protective clothing, eyewear, etc., as necessary for workers handling solvents
and other flammable or hazardous materials.
1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock of not less than three (3)
gallons of each type and color of finish coating.
B. Containers are to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Varnishes, Polyurethanes, Stains and Fillers: Type and brand scheduled herein, ready -
mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining an adequate
consistency, capable of readily and uniformly being dispersed to a complete
homogeneous mixture. Finishes shall have good flowing and brushing properties and
be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
1. Finish materials shall contain no lead or other toxic substances. Refer to
paragraph 1.03.c.
B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically
indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified, of high quality and
approved manufacturer.
C. Color(s) as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full color selection, unless
otherwise indicated. Painter shall prepare samples for the Architect's approval of each
stain color selected. Remake samples until approved, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
D. Approved Manufacturers: Use the same brand throughout the project for each type of
varnish, stain or transparent finish material specified:
1. Stain: Olympic, Penofin, Cabot's or Okon. Using product lines of same quality,
` function and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior
1. to bidding.
2. Clear Polyacrylic Blend Finish: Environment Friendly by General Finish or
approved equal.
j 3. Paint: Refer to Section 09900.
2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
A. For application of the specified finish, use only such equipment as is recommended for
application of the particular paint by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect,
except as limited by paragraph 2.02.C.
B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually
compatible with the material to be applied and that integrity of the finish will not be
jeopardized by use of this equipment.
C. Contractor shall use the following application equipment for the specific condition listed,
unless otherwise approved:
1. Areas indicated in paragraph 3.03.
2.03 COLOR SCHEDULES
A. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in finishing.
0241.02 09930-3
Contractor shall furnish samples of all other related finish materials for coordination in
preparation of the color schedule.
B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the
work, subject to the following:
1. Exterior Work: A maximum of three (3) different pigmented stains will be used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to
commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially affect
proper application and final appearance. Do not commence work until such defects
have been corrected to the satisfaction of the painting subcontractor. Beginning work
shall be considered acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Ensure that the Contractor has corrected defects in all surfaces which may adversely
affect work of this Section, including but not limited to:
1. Exterior Redwood railings and stair components.
B. Wipe dust and grit from hardwood and softwood items and millwork prior to finishing.
Spot coat knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with sealer. Fill knots, imperfec-
tions, nail holes and cracks after stain has dried and sand smooth. Back -prime interior
and exterior woodwork.
1. Back -prime interior woodwork which is to receive stain and/or clear finish with
gloss varnish reduced 25% with mineral spirits.
2. Back -prime exterior wood with manufacturer's recommended primer.
C. Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for preparation of other materials and surfaces prior
to painting.
D. Remove all hardware from doors before finishing. Masking of hardware is unacceptable.
E. Schedule finishing prior to installation of prefinished materials, specialties,
furnishings and fixtures to the extent possible.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply finish materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat of finish to dry before the
following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. Sand lightly
between coats to achieve the. required finish.
C. Where clear finishes are required, ensure that tint fillers match wood. Work fillers well
into the grain before set. Wipe excess from the surface.
D. Brush Applications: 4
1 . Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film.
2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other
surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage.
Remove or refinish work not in compliance with the specified requirements.
0241.02 09930-4
G. Layout and Control: Surveyor or Engineer shall establish lines and levels, locate and
layout by instrumentation and similar means the stakes for finish grading. He shall set
control stakes and shall reset stakes as required during progress of the work.
H. Construction Staking: Contractor shall provide construction stakes for the following:
1. Double offset stakes on building slab corners for horizontal and vertical
alignment.
2. Sanitary and storm sewer lines as follows: The first 100' from any junction
shall be stationed every 25'. From 100' on, stationing will be every 100'. Cut
sheets shall be provided. Sewer services shall be staked with convenient
offsets.
3. Water lines shall be staked on centerline at all fittings and angle points and any
other points necessary for establishing the line. Water service will be staked
with 5' offsets.
4. Any other stakes necessary for the correct alignment of building structures or
components.
1. Completion: Upon completion of the work, the Surveyor or Engineer shall survey the
site to verify that locations and elevations required by the Contract Documents have
been achieved within the specified tolerances. Submit three (3) copies to the Owner.
3.02 CERTIFICATION SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Certification Survey: Upon completion of sitework, the Surveyor shall perform a
certification survey as may be required by applicable jurisdictions or utility providers,
including submittal of properly formatted drawings or other documentation to these
authorities. Certification surveys may be required for, but are not limited to:
1. Storm drainage facilities, including detention/water quality pond construction.
3.03 FINAL COMPLETION SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. ALTA Survey: Upon completion of the work, the surveyor or engineer shall perform an
ALTA survey of the as -constructed conditions, including all required documentation and
reference points, and submit three (3) copies plus one (1) reproducible copy to the
Owner.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 01050-3
3.04 APPLICATION OF PRESERVATIVE SEALER
A. General: Apply specified preservative sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's
instruction and recommendations.
B. Apply preservative sealer to a small test area to verify formulation, penetration rate,
coverage, equipment, and application method before proceeding with full treatment.
C. Apply in a minimum two (2) flood coats using high volume/low pressure spray
equipment. Allow initial flood coat to stand at least seven (7) days before application
of succeeding coat(s). Continue applying flood coats until material stands on the
surface.
D. Application Rate: Apply at the rate of 1 gal./150 sq. ft./coat. Refer to Section 01022
for unit prices related to quantities in excess of the two (2) flood coats specified above.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove finishes from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where
spilled, splashed or splattered.
B. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of
tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.
C. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal
containers and remove daily from the site.
D. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
3.06 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Transparent finishes shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of
the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics:
1 . Consistency and smoothness of surface.
2. Coverage.
3. Color match between adjacent areas.
4. Compliance with approved sample(s).
5. Renovation Projects: Satisfactory match to adjacent materials or surfaces.
PART 4 SCHEDULES
4.01 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Wood Surfaces (Stained):
1. Location: Exterior wood siding, decorative details and miscellaneous trim.
2. Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Finish: One (1) coat semi -transparent water-repellent natural linseed oil stain.
4. Sealant: Integral with finish.
i5. Product: Olympic Weather Screen Semi -Transparent Water -Repellent Oil Stain.
6. Color: To be selected.
r : B. Refer to Section 09900 for painted finishes.
t
1.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 09930-5
SECTION 10520
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish portable fire extinguishers, complete with surface -mounted wall brackets.
B. Furnish key access box for use by the local fire department, complete with mounting
hardware.
C. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers".
B. UL Labels: Provide units which have been approved and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories.
C. All accessories shall be furnished by one (1) manufacturer throughout the project.
D. Certification: Supplier shall certify that the fire extinguisher type specified for each
space or building is appropriate for the type of materials and/or hazards anticipated to
be encountered in each space, particularly specialized areas such as electrical
equipment rooms.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data on all fire protection accessories and
specialties for approval by the Architect.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and
workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Type: Units shall be 10-lb. multi -purpose dry chemical pressurized type equipped with
pressure gauge and which do.not need recharging, except after use.
1. Units shall be tested and approved by UL with a minimum 4A-60B:C rating. UL
rating shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached to, and a part of, fire
extinguisher units.
2. Instructions for repairs, maintenance and recharging shall be attached.
3. Refer to certification requirements specified in paragraph 1.02 above.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. MP Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 571-1181.
10520-1
0241.02
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER WALL BRACKETS
A. Type: Manufacturer's standard mounting bracket, suited to fire extinguisher supplied,
white baked enamel finish, complete with anchorage devices.
1 . Supply each bracket with one (1) fire extinguisher specified above.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. B Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 571-1181.
2. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are
acceptable.
2.03 KEY ACCESS BOX
A. Furnish surface -mounted heavy-duty key access box, complete with all mounting
hardware, as required by the Poudre Fire Authority, located as shown on the Drawings.
1 . Series 3200 Knox -Box, manufactured by the Knox Company, Newport Beach,
CA, (714) 650-2885, or equal approved by the agency with jurisdiction.
B. Quantity: One (1).
C. Owner shall furnish a facility master key for use by the fire department.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Installer shall examine the substrates and conditions under which the fire protection
accessories are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the
proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and conditions governing the work of this
Section. Ensure that openings for recessed or semi -recessed cabinets are properly sized
and located.
C. Ensure that blocking in walls for semi -recessed and surface -mounted specialties is
properly installed.
D. Verify servicing, charging and tagging of all fire extinguishers.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection accessories where shown on the Drawings and in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Securely
fasten all components in position, square and plumb, in accordance with recognized
industry practices.
B. Install in locations as shown on the drawings or as required to comply with governing
regulations.
C. Install fire extinguishers and/or cabinets at mounting height to comply with handicapped )
accessibility requirements.
D. Install key access box at mounting height to comply with requirements of the governing
10520-2
0241.02
fire department:
1. Knox -Box:
Authority.
6'-0" to centerline of access door, or as required by the Poudre Fire
END OF SECTION
10520-3
0241.02
Southridge Pavilion
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
SECTION 15010 -MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. SPECIAL NOTE
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the applicable
provisions of General Requirements are hereby adopted and made part of
Division 15, Mechanical Work.
B. The Mechanical Drawings and the Division 15 sections listed below
constitute the Mechanical Construction portion of this project.
15010 Mechanical Special Conditions
15050 Materials and Methods
15440 Plumbing
15850 Heating and Ventilating
15950 Automatic Temperature Control
15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
C. Where 'Project Manager" is used in this Specification, we mean that
person so designated by the Owner.
2. DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. Contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended
to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of
equipment, ducts, conduits, piping, and approximate sizes and locations of
equipment and outlets. Mechanical trades shall follow these drawings in
laying out their work, consult general construction drawings to familiarize
themselves with all conditions affecting their work, and shall verify spaces
in which their work will be installed. Coordinate work with other trades
as job conditions reasonably require.
S,
B. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations
and arrangement, make such changes without extra cost to Owner.
C. The drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing in measurements
nor to serve as shop drawings.
D. The installation details, instructions and recommendations of the
manufacturer of the product used, modified, to obtain the best end result
shall form the basis of installation of the products for usage on this project
except where definite and specific instructions are set forth therein or
details are shown on plans.
r
15010 - 1
i
Southridge Pavilion
3. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. Shop Drawings must be submitted for the following equipment:
Unit Heaters
Exhaust Fans
Louvers
Temperature Controls
All items followed by'*'
B. Shop Drawings must first be checked by the Contractor for space
conformance and for performance characteristics established by Plans
and/or Specifications, and so stamped. Contractor's stamp shall include
name and address of Contractor, specification paragraph, item designation
and the following statement: "Item(s) has (have) been checked for
compliance with specification requirements and space limitations and will
meet these conditions; checked by; Date."
C. Shop Drawings not stamped as specified will be returned to the Contractor
without action.
D. Contractor must submit a minimum of 5 sets of complete drawings to
Engineer.
4. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A. Materials or products specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade
name, or catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless
changed by an Addendum or a Contract Modification. Where two or more
materials are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the
Contractor.
B. Prior to award of the Contract, interested parties may request approval of
substitute materials. Such request shall be made in writing and be
delivered to the Engineer no later than 6 days (excluding Sundays and
holidays) prior to date and time of receipt of bids. All substitutions
approved will be listed in an Addendum. One set of specific detailed
technical data for each item shall be delivered to the Engineer.
C. See Section 01030, Alternates and Basic Section 01600, Material and
Equipment, for Alternates and Substitutions.
D. After the award of the Contract, any request for a substitution must be
made in writing by the Contractor (not material supplier or subcontractor). l
Such request shall state the name of the product specified, the name of the
product proposed for substitution, the reason for requesting the j
substitution, and any change in Contract Amount resulting from the
substitution. No such substitution shall be made until an appropriate
15010 - 2
Southridge Pavilion
Contract Modification has been issued and approved by the Engineer and
the Owner.
E. The cost of any changes of other trades as a result of use of the substitution
materials or equipment must be borne by the Contractor submitting such
materials or equipment.
5. ORDINANCES, PERMITS AND CODES
A. All work shall be executed in accordance with the latest revision of the
Uniform Fire, Plumbing, and Mechanical Codes, and the Local, State, and
other attending rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected and be
subject to the inspection of these departments.
B. Obtain all permits and licenses required for work performed under
Division 15 and pay all fees in connection with same.
C. Where work required by the drawings and specifications is above the
standard required by local regulations, it shall be done as shown and/or
specified.
6. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials, apparatus and equipment for the work shall be new and shall
be of first class quality, presently being manufactured. Absolutely NO
"close-out" type materials, apparatus or equipment shall be allowed. All
materials, apparatus and equipment shall be furnished, delivered, erected,
connected and finished in every detail, and shall be selected and arranged
to fit properly into the allotted space allowing proper room for
maintenance.
7.. TESTS
A. Tests shall be performed on the systems specified herein. Any one or all
of the systems listed herein may be provided. See Drawings and
Specification Section to determine which systems are to be provided. Tests
shall be repeated until each system is proven acceptable. All tests shall be
made in the presence of the Engineer and/or the Owners. A letter must be
obtained by the Contractor and be filed with the Engineer's Office, if the
tests were witnessed by the Owner. Where required, perform such tests in
the presence of local or state building inspection officials.
B. General
The pipe systems shall be tested to assure they are installed leak
tight and structurally safe for the intended purpose.
15010 - 3
Southridge Pavilion
2. Cleaning and flushing tests and approvals shall be completed
before performing pipe system tests to eliminate retesting.
3. If the pipe tests fail, the pipe system shall be repaired and retested.
4. The installing supervisor shall confirm the safe test pressure for
vessels, equipment and accessories in the pipe system from
drawings, specifications, or name plate data.
5. Notify the Owner's Project Manager 24 hours in advance of each
test.
C. New System Test
1. Instruments, vessels, equipment and accessories which cannot
withstand the test pressure required of attached piping shall be
isolated from the piping. Remove or block and vent direct
operated or self-contained regulators. Each part of a pipe system
shall be tested, divided as indicated, for the time specified for the
given class of test.
2. Safety valves, relief valves, and rupture discs shall be removed
during the pipe system test and reinstalled after the test. New
gaskets shall be used when reinstalling all flanged items. Do not
change scoring settings or make inoperative any safety and relief
valves, except valves designed to be pinned or yoked. Normally
closed control valves shall be opened before test.
3. The pipe system installer shall provide all necessary connections,
vents and drains to test and drain the system completely.
i
4. Allowance shall be made by the Project Manager for variations of .
pressure and volume due to temperature changes in determining
satisfactory maintained test pressure.
5. The Project Manager shall check the test pressure at the beginning
and end of each test before acceptance of the system.
6. Pipe systems shall be tested and accepted before insulation, paint,
or other covering or coating is applied. The only exceptions are for
those parts, including vessels, which have been painted, covered or
coated, and have had previous certification tests. 1
15010 - 4
Southridge Pavilion
D. Natural Gas Line Testing
1. General: Test gas supply lines with air under pressure before being
covered. Use a static gauge graduated to one pound per square
inch.
2. Testing shall be of the complete piping system, before concealing,
or of individually separable larger portions of the system.
3. Test Procedures: Use either of the following methods at the
Contractor's option:
a. 30 psig air pressure for a period of 24 hours with no drop in
gauge pressure, indicating the line to be airtight, 60 psig for
welded pipe.
b. 100 psig air pressure, with joints tested with standard soap
and brush inspection.
4. Only the last connection to the appliance may be tested under
operating conditions. This connection will be tested with soap and
brush under line pressures. This connection must remain exposed.
5. Retesting: Retest piping failing initial tests following correction of
defective work. Requirements of initial tests shall apply.
E. Final Test
1. After final connections to the existing system are made and prior to
application of insulation, a final test shall be made of the complete
new system.
2. The test shall be visual inspection in normal service test.
3. Systems to be tested - ALL piping systems.
4. The test pressure shall be the working pressure as a minimum or as
specified.
5. The test medium shall be the system's working fluid, or as
specified.
6. Trapped air shall be removed.
7. Piping shall be visually inspected for leaks.
15010 - 5
Southridge Pavilion
F. Report
1. The Report shall contain the following and be submitted within 24
hours of each test:
- Date, time and place of test
- Duration of test
- Person responsible for testing
- Results of test
- Action taken to correct deficiency
- Outside dry bulb temperature
- Inside dry bulb temperature
- Specific section of piping tested
2. The Report shall be required for final payment.
G. Notify the Project Manager after successful testing.
8. WARRANTY
A. All systems shall be warranted for one (1) year after Owner occupancy in
accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions,
etc. of the contract.
B. In addition, the Contractor is hereby forewarned that expansive soils may
exist in the construction area. Any slab heave and resulting damage during
the above warranty period attributable to moisture from any leaking water,
sewer, or storm drainage piping installed under this Contract shall be
corrected at no cost to the Owner. Restore structure and repair all damage.
C. All lubrication, filter changes, and normal maintenance shall be the
responsibility of the Owner.
9. START-UP
A. At a time set by the Contractor and agreed to by Owner, arrange to place
equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required,
representatives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting
equipment, to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove
satisfactory operation prior to turning facility over to Owner.
B. Any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., shall be repaired or replaced as
required prior to acceptance. {
1:
C. Run operating test for (3) 8 hour periods and submit test data for approval.
D. All equipment shall be freshly oiled, cleaned, and installation completely
finished prior to acceptance.
15010 - 6
SECTION 01060
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 APPROVAL AND RECOMMENDATION AGENCIES
A. The City of Fort Collins has jurisdiction for review and approval of the project, including
but not limited to, the following departments:
1. Planning and Zoning.
2. Building Inspection.
3. Fire Prevention.
4. Engineering and Traffic Engineering.
5. Stormwater Utility.
6. Electric Utility.
7. Handicapped Advisory Commission.
B. Codes which have been adopted by City of Fort Collins applicable to the project include,
but may not be limited to:
1. Uniform Building Code, 1997 Edition.
2. Uniform Mechanical Code, 1997 Edition.
3. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, Current Edition.
4. National Electrical Code, Current Edition.
5. ANSI A117.1, American National Standards Institute Specifications for Making
Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped
People, Current Edition.
6. Americans with Disabilities Act, provisions for accessibility by physically
handicapped people, 1990.
7. Any other local, state or federal codes which are applicable.
8. In case of a conflict between referenced applicable codes, the one having the
more stringent requirements shall govern.
i
1.02 SERVICES AND UTILITIES
A. Utility services are provided to the area of the project by the following jurisdictions:
1. Natural Gas: Excel.
2. Electric: City of Fort Collins.
B. Specific on -site utility extensions and service lines are shown on the Drawings.
1 . The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work of outside utility
providers, as well as the coordination of utilities with those shown on the
Drawings. Refer to Section 01040.
1.03 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS
A. In addition to any applicable regulations referenced elsewhere, all Contractors shall
strictly adhere to all applicable federal and state laws, orders, and all applicable
standards, regulations, interpretations or guidelines issued pursuant thereto.
1.04 HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY
A. Construction shall be in substantial compliance with the requirements of the American
01060-1
Southridge Pavilion
10. MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prepare three (3) typed portfolios with complete sets of high quality copies
of Shop Drawings used in the erection of mechanical system. Each piece
of equipment shall have information on installation, testing, cleaning, and
maintenance instructions, list of materials for maintenance, parts list,
wiring diagrams, and name and address of authorized service organization,
with 24 hour phone number. List shall be alphabetized, within each
category.
B. Complete manuals shall also include "As Built" temperature control
drawings, final balance report.
C. Include operating instructions for complete system, including emergency
procedures for fire or failure of major equipment, normal starting,
operating and shut down, and long term shut down.
D. Include maintenance instructions, identified equipment lists, proper
lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment,
necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule.
E. Information shall be folded, if necessary, and included in 8-1/2" x I I" hard
cover, indexed, loose-leaf 3 ring binder. Multiple binders shall be used if
required to contain materials. All material shall be properly identified
with job name, date, name and address of Contractor, Architect, and
Engineer.
F. Portfolios shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of material and
completeness, and when approved by Engineer, portfolios will be turned
f over to the Owner.
G. Contractor shall instruct Owner's Project Manager and Maintenance
1 Supervisor in the operation and maintenance of all other equipment and
systems, using the O & M Manual as a guide, including paragraph C
above. Final payment will not be made until this is done to the Owner's
satisfaction.
11. PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR EQUIPMENT
A. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment (including open-ended
piping and ductwork) provided under Division 15 and equipment
furnished by Owner for installation under Division 15 to protect from
mortar, paint, debris, etc., during construction. A polyethylene covering
tied securely around the equipment will be acceptable for this purpose.
15010 - 7
Southridge Pavilion
12. CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from Mechanical
Contractor's work or operations, leaving the job and equipment in a clean
condition.
B. Air surfaces of all coils, fans, air units, etc., shall be wiped clean or
washed if required. Clean all items furnished, such as motors, etc., leaving
the entire installation in a first-class condition.
C. Equipment and materials provided under Division 15 will be painted by
the General Contractor except where specified otherwise. However, any
mechanical equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's
prime and finish coats of paint shall be restored to the original condition
and appearance prior to application of finish paint.
13. FINAL INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
writing to make arrangements for a final inspection.
B. After the final inspection is made, the Contractor will receive a list of
items requiring adjustment, correction, replacement or completion.
C. The Contractor shall comply completely with all the listed requirements
within thirty (30) days of receipt of list. Should the Contractor fail to
perform within this time limit, the Engineer and/or Owner reserves the
right to have the work completed by others and the cost deducted from the
contract price.
D. The Contractor shall initial and date each item as completed and return
copy to Engineer prior to re -inspection.
14. EXISTING OUTSIDE UTILITIES
A. Utility companies shall be contacted and advised of proposed work prior
to the start of excavation.
B. Active Utilities: When encountered in work, protect, brace, support
existing active sewers, gas, electric, other services where required for
proper execution of work. If existing active utilities are encountered that
are not indicated and which required relocation, make request in writing {
for determination. Do not proceed with work until written directions are i
received. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to
remain.
f
i_
15010 - 8
Southridge Pavilion
f
7
i
C. Inactive Utilities: When encountered in work, remove, cap, or plug
inactive services. Notify utility companies or municipal agencies having
jurisdiction; protect or remove these services as directed.
D. Interruption of Utilities: Where work makes temporary shutdown of
services unavoidable, shut down at night, or at such times as approved by
Owner, which will cause least interference with established operating
routine. Arrange to work continuously, including overtime, if required, to
make necessary connections to existing work.
15. PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
I. Brady
2. Seton
3. Westline Products
4. Approved Equal
B. Mark all pipe on both sides of partitions and slabs, at take -offs, valves,
connections to equipment and at intervals not exceeding 25 feet,
identifying markers, black on background color band; over 3" diameter
pipe, 2" letters on 2 1/4" color band. Marker shall indicate "Gas",
domestic "CW", etc.
C. Show flow direction with arrows, immediately adjacent to all pipe
identification markers. 1 1/8" x 4 2/3" arrows shall be black on
background color scheduled for respective service.
D. Attach identifying markers and arrows on lower quadrant of overhead
pipes, and tape ends.
E. Application on soft insulation or chalky surface; binding tape shall be
spirally wrapped and overlapped around the circumference of the
insulation for a sufficient distance to mount identification markers and
arrows to taped surface.
F. Pipe Identification List - Note: Any one or all of the following services
may be provided. See Drawings and Specifications Sections to determine
which services are to be provided.
IDENTIFICATION BACKGROUND COLOR
Gas Yellow
15010 - 9
Southridge Pavilion
16. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all key equipment, fans, thermostats, controls, relays, dampers,
etc., using Dymo Embossing Tape punched with M-3 Dymomite hand
embossing tool. Punch out 3/32" holes at each side of label and secure
with Parker-Kalon self -tapping screws in addition to adhesive.
17. TEMPORARY HEATING OF BUILDING
A. Provide temporary smokeless unit heaters as required.
1. Installation, maintenance, and fuel cost for temporary heat shall be
at the expense of this Contractor,
•'
B. As specified in the General Conditions and Supplemental General
Conditions of this Specification. Permanent heating system shall not be
used for temporary heat during construction until all walls are taped and
textured, without specific approval by the Owner in writing.
18. ASBESTOS
A. Products, equipment or materials that contain asbestos shall not be allowed
in the construction of the mechanical and plumbing systems on this
project.
END OF SECTION
15010 - 10
Southridge Pavilion
SECTION 15050 - MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. GENERAL
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including
references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, is hereby
adopted and made part of this section of the specifications.
B. Materials and methods specified herein apply to all sections under
Division 15 of the specifications. Intent of this section is to set forth
common requirements and to avoid repetition under each particular
section. See drawings and/or Division 15 Specification sections to
determine which systems are to be provided.
2. PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Provide pipe and fittings of type and materials scheduled herein, of
quantities shown on the drawings and as required to connect fixtures and
equipment. All fittings shall have ANSI tolerances and dimensions and
have ASTM materials for conformance with piping below.
B. Provide standard weight IPS brass nipples and adapters where required
between copper tubing and fixtures. Steel or iron nipples are not permitted
between copper lines and brass valves or trim.
C. Joints: Joints in all copper domestic piping systems shall be made using
95/5 tin/antimony or equal tensile strength solder that contains no lead.
Engelhard "Silvabrite 100", Oatey "Safeflo" or Canfield "Watersafe" are
all acceptable. Use flux recommended by solder manufacturer.
Absolutely no lead containing solders or fluxes will be allowed in any
portion of the work. The Owner reserves the right to inspect solders,
fluxes and joints. Any joint found containing lead solder shall be cause for
resoldering all joints made in all systems in the building.
D. Pipe and Fitting Schedule
1. Water underground.
a. Piping 2 1/2" and smaller, Type "K" soft drawn copper
water tube. Fittings, buried in ground, wrought copper,
solder joint. There shall be no buried fittings under the
building.
15050 - 1
Southridge Pavilion
2. Natural gas in building above ground.
a. 2-1/2" and smaller, piping shall be black steel, Schedule 40,
screw ends. Fittings black malleable iron screwed, standard
weight 150 lb. banded. Support pipe at 10 ft. intervals for
1-1/4" pipe and larger, and at 8 ft. intervals for 3/4" or 1"
pipe.
3. VALVES*
A. Provide valves in piping where indicated and provide shut-off valves in
lines serving each njece of equipment.
1. Eccentric plug valves shall be manufactured by DeZurik or
Milliken.
2. Valves by other manufacturers must have prior approval.
B. Valve Schedule.
1. Shut-off valves for gas shall be eccentric plug valve ball, double
seal seats, and seal, rated 175 pound WOG.
a. DeZurik 400 series.
b. Milliken 600 series.
C. Approved equal.
4. UNIONS
A. Make connections at each piece of equipment with unions or flanges
located for quick/easy disconnect for maintenance. Provide unions or
flanges on:
1. Equipment
B. Use the same materials and finish as the piping system.
C. Unions and flanges are not required at equipment where flanged valves,
strainers, control valves, etc., are used.
D. Omit unions and flanges in straight pipe runs or in concealed locations,
except for flanged valve applications.
l:
15050 - 2
Southridge Pavilion
E. Union Schedule:
I . Natural gas.
a. Piping sizes 2" and smaller:
i Malleable iron unions with ground joint brass to
iron seat, 150 pound working steam pressure.
Grinnell 463, Stockham 694, black or galvanized.
ii Flexible gas connectors shall not be used.
5. PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS*
A. Provide pipe hangers and supports as specified herein and/or indicated,
conforming to manufacturer's standardization society specification SP-69.
Locate at changes in direction and at concentrated loads. Hanger design
shall permit vertical adjustment and lateral movement to allow pipe
expansion.
B. Use carbon steel adjustable hangers as follows:
1: Steel, plastic and cast iron, 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. 69, Fee
and Mason Fig. 400, Elcen Fig. 202.
C. Support horizontal steel piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more
stringent:
Pine Size Rod Diameter Maximum
S acin
Up to 1 1/4" 3/8" g ft.
1 1/2" to 3 1/2" 1/2" 8 ft.
D. Support vertical piping as follows:
1. Steel - 8 feet maximum
E. In steel framed structures, support pipe hangers from beam clamps,
attachments and brackets bolted to steel joists or beams. Use steel washer
plates for pipe supported from steel joists, Grinnell Fig. 60, Elcen Fig. 84,
Fee and Mason Fig. 91. Hang near joist panel point, where possible.
t Bolting to steel deck is prohibited. Hang pipes over 5" diameter from
more than 1 joist. Absolutely no piping shall be supported directly on the
roof joists.
F. Wall mounted piping shall be supported by Uni-strut type channel and
clamp system.
15050 - 3
Southridge Pavilion
6. PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are nominal pipe sizes, not
outside diameters. Use straight round pipe reamed to full size after
cutting. Remove all chips from reaming.
2. Arrange pipe in group runs where feasible. Coordinate locations
with all trades. Avoid traps in piping.
3. The right is reserved to authorize minor changes in pipe location to
avoid conflicts with other trades at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Domestic Water Piping
1. All water pipe underground outside of building shall be buried a
minimum of 5'-0" deep. Where waste and water piping is run in
the same trench, installation shall conform to all governing codes.
C. Gas Piping (Natural)
All gas piping shall be installed with plugged drip pockets at low
points. Pipe shall be extended as shown on the plans to all gas
equipment in building. The entire gas piping installation shall be
in accordance with the latest requirements of the AGA and NBFU.
2. Valves or cocks and unions shall be installed on inlet pipe to all
equipment, including safety valves where required or noted to be
installed.
7. EXCAVATING TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavation. Trenches for all underground pipe lines shall not be carried
below the required depths except as necessary for special pipe bedding or
to remove unstable soil or rock. Furnish and backfill with thoroughly
compacted sand -gravel mixtures or excavated materials approved by the
Engineer's representative, all excess excavation below required levels.
Rock will be encountered and shall be excavated to allow for 6" granular
bed between bottom of pipe and rock.
B. Trench Preparation. The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded !
and shaped to fit the lower 1/4 circumference so as to provide uniform .
bearing and support for each section of the pipe except where necessary to
excavate for pipe jointing. Where pipe elevations run below the granular 1
fill in to natural soil, provide a minimum of six (6) inches of granular
15050 - 4
Southridge Pavilion
material below the pipe, granular material equal to material specified
above.
C. Shoring and sheeting required to protect the trench construction, adjacent
buildings and property, as well as the safety of employees and the public,
shall be constructed all in accordance with local, state, or federal safety
regulations that apply or as specified herein.
1. The side of trenches in hard compact material five (5) feet or more
in depth and eight (8) feet or more in length shall be securely held
by shoring and bracing or sloped to the angle of repose of the
material being excavated.
2. The sides of the trenches four (4) feet or more in depth in partly
saturated, filled or unstable soil, or where running material is
encountered, such as quicksand, loose gravel, loose shale, or
completely saturated material, shall be secured by the use of
continuous vertical sheet piping and suitable braces. Wooden
sheet piling shall be not less than two (2) inches in thickness.
3. One horizontal cross brace, strut or trench jack, shall be furnished
for each four (4) feet in depth or major fraction thereof.
4. All sheeting in areas that are unstable shall be left in place as
directed by the Architect -Engineer, and shall be cut off 1-foot
above the top of the pipe in these areas. Sheeting shall not be
removed until the trench is substantially backfilled. Any sheeting
left in place shall be included in the lump sum price of this
Contract.
D. Grading and Stacking. All grading in the vicinity of trench excavations
shall be controlled to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches.
Any water accumulated in the trenches shall be removed by pumping or by
other approved methods. During excavation, materials suitable for
backfilling shall be stacked in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back
from edges of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins.
E. Crossing Protection. Provide adequate temporary crossovers for
pedestrian and vehicular traffic, including guard rails, lamps, flags, as
directed; remove same when necessary for such protection ceases.
F. Backfrlling. After pipe lines have been tested, inspected and approved by
the Architect -Engineer, and prior to backfilling, all forms shall be removed
and the excavation shall be cleaned of all trash and debris. Material for
backfilling shall consist of the excavated granular material, or borrow
equal to that specified above, and shall be free of trash, lumber, or other
15050 - 5
Southridge Pavilion
debris. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding nine (9)
inches in thickness. Moisten and hand or machine compact to 95% of
standard proctor density. Bring fill to elevations indicated. If backfill fails
the proctor density test, conducted by an independent testing laboratory
retained by the Owner, Contractor shall recompact and retest until
satisfactory density is reached. First backfill layer shall be coarse sand to
6" above top of pipe.
G. Restoration of Area. All areas disturbed by the Mechanical Contractor
shall be restored to their original condition unless otherwise indicated.
1. Replace pavement, curbs, sidewalks, other appurtenances removed
or damaged in connection with work and restore to original
conditions, unless otherwise directed.
8. ELECTRICAL
A. Electric Motors.
1. Provide electric motors with all equipment furnished and installed
under Division 15, unless specified otherwise.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers
a. G.E.
b. U.S. Motors
C. MagneTek (Century)
3. Include the following features on all motors:
a. Ball bearings with lube lines extended to accessible
location.
b. Cast iron or steel base with provision for slide adjustment
unless directed otherwise.
C. Conduit box with ample room for lead terminal
connections.
d. Numbered leads of ample length for connection,
terminating in the conduit box.
e. Permanently stamped nameplate.
f. Single speed 1750 RPM, unless specified otherwise.
g. Rated for continuous duty in ambient not exceeding 40 i
degrees C.
15050 - 6
National Standards Institute Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities
Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People, ANSI A117.1, Current
Edition, and the Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990.
B. Refer to specific Sections of the Specifications for specific requirements relating to each
section.
1.05 SAFETY OF LIFE, HEALTH AND PUBLIC WELFARE
A. Contractor shall have sole responsibility for compliance on the job site with all
applicable portions of the Williams -Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
and compliance with the Equal Employment Opportunity Act (EEO).
1. Contractor shall fully comply with OSHA requirements for maintaining Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on the site.
B. Protection of life, health and public welfare as it relates to construction of the project
is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner will not provide observation,
inspection, supervision or any comment on plans, procedures or actions employed at
the project as they relate to safety of life, health or public welfare. If conditions are
imposed by the Owner which interfere with or imply actions detrimental to safety,
written notice shall be returned to the Contractor for action prior to affecting any
unsafe conditions.
C. The Architect shall not have control or charge of, and shall not be responsible for,
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures for safety
precautions and programs in connection with the work, for the acts or omissions of the
Contractor, subcontractors or any other persons performing any of the work or for the
failure of any of them to carry out the work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1 . The Architect shall have no responsibility for the discovery, presence, handling,
removal or disposal of or exposure of persons to hazardous materials in any form
at the project site, including but not limited to asbestos, asbestos products,
lead -based paint, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic substances.
Refer also to Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal.
1.06 PERMITS AND FEES
i
A. Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees and inspections required by the
regulatory agencies referenced above, including but not limited to:
1 . Plan review fees.
2. Building permit fees.
3. Utility tap and meter fees.
4. City use tax.
5. Subcontractor fees.
6. Any other local or state permits or fees.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for applying for, and acquiring, all building permits,
inspections and any other permits required for the construction of this project. ( .
END OF SECTION
01060-2
Southridge Pavilion
4. All motor wiring and windings shall be copper.
5. Power Factor
a. Motors shall have a labeled power factor, at name plate
rating and rated voltage, of not less than 85%. If a motor
draws less than 1000 watts labeled rating, it is excluded
from the 85% P.F. requirement. If, through motor or design
(i.e. RPM less than 1200), an 85% power factor is not
available, the supplier of that motor shall furnish power
factor correction components capable of correcting that
non -conforming motor to 90% or better.
6. Horsepower ratings -- in V-belt drive applications, size motor for
120 percent of brake horsepower requirement, or scheduled
horsepower, whichever is greater.
7. Single phase motors-- furnish for all applications 1/6 through 3/4
HP, single phase, capacitor start, capacitor run, dripproof,
thermally protected motors, unless indicated otherwise, for 120
volt 60 hertz current.
B. V-Belt Drives
1. Capacity of V-Belt Drives at rated RPM shall be not less than 150
percent of motor nameplate horsepower rating.
C. Unit manufacturer shall provide belt guard.
D. Motor starters will be provided under Division 15, Mechanical, as
t , specified below.
1. Starters shall be across -the -line, with manual reset, trip -free
thermal overload relay in each ungrounded conductor, necessary
auxiliary contacts, proper NEMA Standard enclosure for location,
and hand -off -automatic switches in cover. Provide manual motor
starters for locally controlled single phase motors. For single phase
motors which are interlocked with external devices provide H-O-A
magnetic starters or relay and switch rated at locked rotor motor
amps and manual starter. Starters, except those furnished mounted
in or on equipment, shall be by the same one of the following
manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley
b. Cutler Hammer
C. Square D
15050 - 7
Southridge Pavilion
E. Electrical wiring, except where otherwise specified in Division 15, will be
provided under Division 16, Electrical Work.
1. Electrical wiring provided under Division 15 of the Specifications
shall conform to all applicable requirements of Division 16,
Electrical Work.
2. Control Wiring: Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contactors,
starters, relays, etc., and wiring for valve and damper operators.
3. For single-phase devices where power current passes through
controller and device, wiring shall be considered power wiring.
F. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for
Division 15 equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in
accordance with the following schedule:
Set In Power Control
Furnished Place Wiring Wiring
Under Under Under Under
ITEM Division Division Division Division
Equipment Motors 15 15 16 -
Starters/Contactors:
Separate 15 16 16 15
Factory Mounted
and Wired 15 15 16 15
Pushbutton Stations:
Separate 15 16 - 15
In Starter Enclosure 15 16 - 15
Disconnect Switches 16 16 16 -
Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16
Control Relays 15 15
15
Control Transformers 15 16 16 15
Operating Switches 16 16 16 -
Line Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15 `
Low Voltage Thermostat 15 15 15
i
Sub -Base Low Voltage 15 15 15
15050 - 8
Southridge Pavilion
Set In Power Control
Furnished Place Wiring Wiring
Under Under Under Under
ITEM Division Division Division Division
Time Switches Not In
Control Panel 15 15 16 15
Thermostat and Controls
Integral with Equipment
of Directly Attached to
Ducts, Pipes, etc.
15
15
15
Equipment in Temperature
Control Panels
15
15
15
Valve Motors, Damper
Motors, Solenoid Valves,
etc.
15
15 -
15
Control Circuit Outlets
16
16 16
-
Smoke Detectors Including
Relays for Fan Control
16
15 16
15
Equipment Interlocks
15
15 -
15
END OF SECTION
15050 - 9
Southridge Pavilion
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING
1. GENERAL
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including
references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and
Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part
of this section of the specifications.
2. SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings
consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and
equipment necessary to install all complete systems listed below, including
minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating installation.
Domestic Water System
Natural Gas System
B. Also included is the work involved to remove and/or relocate existing
associated equipment, remodeling of existing systems, including
connections between new and existing systems.
3. CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Make all domestic water, waste, vent, drain, air, gas, etc., connections to
all equipment in this building whether or not such equipment is furnished
under this section or under other sections of this specification. This
includes installation, furnishing piping and shut-off valves on branches to
and from each piece of equipment from mains or branch mains.
4. PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and related components from damage before, during and after
installation to date of Final Acceptance or Owner move -in. Provide
protective coverings or other protection as required.
5. NATURAL GAS SERVICE
A. Make all arrangements with the local gas company for the installation of
the gas service, including meter installation. If the gas service and/or
meter is furnished and installed by the Gas Company, make all
3 arrangements and include all costs for permits, street repair, utility
company cost, etc., in bid form. Provide main gas shut-off just outside of
building.
i.
15440 - 1
Southridge Pavilion
B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully
survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service
installation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone
cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc.
6. WATER SERVICE
A. Connect to existing water service as indicated on the plans. Provide
minimum 5'-0" cover over water line outside of building.
B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully
survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service
installation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone
cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc.
C. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including street and
sidewalk repair, permits, etc., in his bid.
END OF SECTION
15440 - 2
Southridge Pavilion
SECTION 15850 — HEATING AND VENTILATING
GENERAL
A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including
references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and
Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part
of this section of the specifications.
2. SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work in this section of the specification and the accompanying
drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material
and equipment necessary to install heating and ventilating systems as
indicated on drawings and specified herein, including minor items
obviously necessary for complete and operating systems.
3. SHEET METAL WORK - LOW VELOCITY SYSTEMS
A. Construction. Construct ducts from zinc coated iron or steel sheets
conforming accurately to the dimensions indicated on the drawings. All
ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints.
Construct ducts in accordance with the recommendations in the current
edition of the "SMACNA" duct construction standards, 2" W.G. pressure
class.
4. DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Securely attach all ductwork to the building construction in a manner to be
free from vibration and swaying under all conditions of operation. Hanger
attachments shall be appropriate for the building structure and shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval. Hang ducts from beams and joists
whenever possible.
B. All hangers shall be made of V wide galvanized iron straps, 18 gauge, or
per latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
Hanger straps to be secured to the bottom of the duct using sheet metal
screws. Additional screws to be added to sides of ductwork as conditions
dictate. Trapeze hangers per SMACNA standards may also be used.
5. DUCT INSTALLATION
A. All ductwork will be run substantially as shown on the plans. Changes in
size or cross section shall be made with long tapers. The Engineer
reserves the right to slightly change the run of certain ducts without extra
cost to the Owner, if necessary to avoid unforeseen structural or other
interferences.
15850 - 1
Southridge Pavilion
B. No obstructions will be allowed in ducts except places where absolutely
necessary and prior approval has been received from the Engineer. In such
cases they shall be installed so as to least interfere with the passage of air.
6. EXHAUST FANS*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Acme
2.
Cook
3.
Greenheck
4.
Penn
5. Prior approved equal
A. Provide exhaust fans where indicated and as scheduled on the plans.
Arrangement shall be as shown on the plans.
B. All fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced at the factory.
C. Fan ratings shall be based upon tests performed in strict accordance with
the AMCA Standard 210-67 Test Code for Air Moving Devices. Each fan
shall carry, near the manufacturer's nameplate, the seal authorized by
AMCA indicating that ratings are certified. Fans not bearing this seal will
not be acceptable.
7. FLUE VENT *
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Dura-vent
2. Metalbestos
3. Metal Fab Inc.
4. Prior approved equal
B. Flue shall be double wall Type B vent with high wind vent caps. Install
per Uniform Mechanical Code and NFPA No. 54. U.L. approved.
15850 - 2
Southridge Pavilion
8. STATIONARY LOUVERS*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. American Warming and Ventilating
2. Arrow
3. Dowco
4. Greenheck
5. Industrial Louvers
6. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
7. Prior approved equal.
B. Provide stationary outside air intake and exhaust louvers where indicated
on the plans.
C. See schedule on the plans for exact type, construction, and accessories.
D. Install louvers, where indicated on the plans, according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide anchor clips and caulk as required for a sound,
watertight installation.
9. UNIT HEATERS*
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Lennox
2. Reznor
3. Prior approved equal
B. Manufacturer, Model, and Size:
1. As scheduled on the plans.
C. Description
1. AGA certified natural gas fired unit heater, rated and tested
according to D.O.E. test procedures. Test operated prior to
shipment to insure proper operation. Completely factory
assembled with all controls installed.
2. Aluminized steel heat exchanger designed to prevent fatigue
failure, ticking, resonance and cleanability problems. Aluminized
steel burners.
3. Outside air inlet collar and separated combustion from room air on
units so indicated on plans.
4. Induced draft blower with pressure switch to prove there is no
blockage.
15850 - 3
Southridge Pavilion
5. Automatic spark ignition from solid state electronic igniter on each
operating burner cycle. 100 percent safety shut-off. 24 volt
combination gas control valve with automatic safety pilot and
bleed gas filtrations, automatic dual electric valve, and gas pressure
regulator. Main gas valve opens only when pilot burner is proven
to be lit. If flame loss occurs, main valve closes, and pilot spark
ignites.
6. Heavy gauge cold rolled steel cabinet with baked on paint finish.
Adjustable louvers for air flow direction control.
7. With 24 VA control transformer factory installed with fan timer
and limit controls.
8. Direct drive, propeller fan statically and dynamically balanced.
Internal overload protected motor.
9. Provide gas modification kit for 5000 feet elevation if needed, or
otherwise adjust the unit for altitude.
10. Concentric roof (vertical) or wall inlet air/vent terminal kit as
noted on schedule.
END OF SECTION
�:1.YIE!
Southridge Pavilion
SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
1. GENERAL
A. Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements, in its entirety, including
applicable provisions of other Specification sections, are hereby adopted
and made part of this section of the Specifications.
2. SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings
consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all materials and
equipment necessary to provide the Automatic Temperature Control
System for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning systems as specified
herein, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and
operating installation.
3. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Control system shall be electric and electronic as manufactured by
Johnson Controls, Inc., Honeywell, Robertshaw, Kreuter, Siemens, or
Siebe.
B. The system shall be installed under the full-time supervision of an
authorized Installations Engineer employed by one of the above, or by
Long and Assoc., Carrier Commercial Services, ECI, Commercial Systems
Integrators, or prior approved equal.
C. The Mechanical Contractor is given the option of installing the
temperature control system in lieu of having it installed by a Temperature
Control Contractor. Prior to start of work, the Contractor shall submit
control shop drawings as stated in this Section. Shop drawings shall be
prepared by an authorized temperature control contractor as listed above,
or by a licensed Professional Engineer with experience in controls design.
Work shall not begin until shop drawings are approved by the Engineer.
4. CONTROL INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT*
A. In general, the control instruments and equipment furnished for this
installation shall be the best product of its type produced by the
manufacturer.
i B. Dampers and Damper Operators:
Damper Operators: 120 V electric type and fully proportioning.
Damper operators shall have metal bodies. Provide operators with
ample power to overcome friction of damper linkage and air
15950-1
SECTION 01070
ABBREVIATIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Wherever used in these Specifications, the following abbreviations shall have the
meanings indicated:
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
AIA American Institute of Architects
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWS American Welding Society
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
EEI Edison Electric Institute
FS Federal Specifications
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ISA Institute Society of America
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council
MCC Motor Control Center
MCIP Motor Control Instrument Panel
MSL Mean Sea Level
MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NEC National Electric Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council
NFoPA National Forest Products Association
NPT National Pipe Thread
NRS Non -Rising Stem
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association
RPM Revolutions per minute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
UBC Uniform Building Code
UFC Uniform Fire Code
UL Underwriter's Laboratories
UMC Uniform Mechanical Code
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
END OF SECTION
01070-1
Southridge Pavilion
pressure acting on the damper blades. Locate the damper operator
mounting arrangement outside the airstream wherever possible.
Provide the operators with external adjustable stops to limit the
stroke. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit
normally open or normally closed positions of the damper as
indicated.
2. Dampers:
a. Damper Frames: 13 gauge galvanized steel channel on 1/8"
extruded aluminum with reinforced comer bracing.
b. Damper Blades: Not to exceed six (6) inches in width.
Blades shall be suitable for high velocity performance.
Opposed blades.
C. Damper Bearings: Nylon or Teflon. Bushings that turn in the
bearing shall be oil impregnated sintered metal.
d. The damper linkage shall provide equal percentage
characteristics as required.
e. Low leakage type, with blade edge seals and side seals.
C. Thermostats:
Unit Heaters:
a. Unit Heaters in Foundation Level: Heating thermostat with
fan "ON -AUTO" switch and system "HEAT -OFF" switch.
40 to 90 degrees F. range. Honeywell T87FI849 with
Q539GIO00 subbase.
2. All room thermostats shall be mounted on the back or side of the
unit, insulated from the unit.
3. Coordinate electrical requirements with Electrical Contractor.
5. WIRING
A. Except where otherwise specified under sequence of controls, wire all
electrical controls furnished under this section of the specifications.
B. This installation shall comply with all rules and regulations of the National i
Electrical Code and all state and local codes and regulations.
i.
15950-2
Southridge Pavilion
C. Install all conduits in a neat and orderly manner with conduit grouped as
much as possible following horizontal and vertical building lines and rigidly
secure conduit to the building construction.
D. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be coordinated
with associated work being done under Division 16.
E. Except where otherwise specified, voltages for control of circuiting
associated with motors and their starters, and all control devices shall be
rated at 120 volts or 24 volts.
6. INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate the installation of temperature control equipment furnished
under this section but installed under other sections of this Division.
B. Unit Heaters, etc.: The manufacturer will provide all control devices,
transformers, relays, and other appurtenances as required per manufacturer's
system wiring and interlock submittals.
7. SERVICE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. After completion of the installation, adjust all thermostats, motors, and
other equipment provided under this Section.
B. Following complete adjustment, have a qualified representative fully
acquainted with the installation instruct the Owner's operators in the
fundamentals and operations of the system. This instruction period shall not
be less than one (1) hour.
C. Submit typewritten and/or printed sets of operating and maintenance
instructions, to be included in the O&M Manuals, including sheets
describing fundamentals of each system and an explanation of the operation
and function of each system device in the installation as part of the
maintenance and operating instructions portfolio required under Section
15010.
8. CONTROL DRAWINGS*
A. Before proceeding with the work required under this section, the Contractor
shall submit for approval complete temperature control diagrams, including
1 a written description of the systems and descriptive literature covering each
item of control equipment. Diagrams shall indicate all control functions
required. Submit to Engineer.
15950-3
Southridge Pavilion
9. OPERATING TESTS
A. A complete system -operating test shall be made for a period of two (2)
weeks with controls set in their respective positions to ensure proper
operation. All tests and final adjustments, including calibration of all
controllers and thermostats, shall be made to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer.
B. At the completion of the test, Contractor shall prepare a list showing
temperature settings of all thermostats together with actual thermostat
readings. This list shall be submitted to the Engineer as part of the
maintenance and operating instruction portfolios.
10: "AS -BUILT" DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor will, at the same time, insure that the control diagrams for
the project are brought up-to-date and that they reflect the control system
"As -Built". These control diagrams will be included in the Maintenance
Manuals, which shall be turned over to the Owner following the acceptance
of the above procedure by the Consulting Engineer.
B. The "As- Built" diagrams will have an indication on them as to what
changes occurred to the control system between the system originally
specified and the system as installed. If necessary, the description of
operation shall be changed to adequately describe the completed control
system.
C. Provide reproducible set of "As-Builts."
11. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. General: The following description gives the intent of the sequence of
operation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate controls
furnished with the equipment with necessary supplementary controls under
this section to provide a working system as described below.
B. Exhaust Fans and Louvers:
EF-1 shall be controlled by a CO sensor to maintain less than 50
PPM. A wall switch shall over -ride the sensor and energize the fan.
Louver damper shall open when fan is on.
i
2. Provide an industrial quality CO sensor, with calibration
instructions.
IF WIM,
Southridge Pavilion
C. Unit Heaters:
1. Thermostat shall cycle unit burner and fan to maintain a heating
setpoint of 49 degrees F. (adjustable).
2. Fan switch on thermostat shall energize unit fan, burner shall cycle
as required to maintain set point.
END OF SECTION
"WS1115i
Southridge Pavilion
SECTION 15990 - TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
1. GENERAL
A. Balancing shall be done by a firm specializing in this work. Prequalified
firms are:
1. Griffith Engineering Service, Denver, Co.
2. Fort Collins/Midwest
3. TAB Services of Denver, Colorado
4. Lawrence H. Finn & Assoc., Greeley, Colorado.
5. Air -Right, Denver
B. Other firms desiring to furnish services for this project shall submit for
written approval during bid time. A brochure shall be provided listing the
qualifications of personnel in the organization, instruments available to be
used and a list of projects successfully balanced within the last two years.
Information regarding qualifications must be in the office of the Design
Engineer at least six days, excluding Sundays and holidays, prior to the
date set for receiving bids.
C. The balancing work shall be performed by a firm having total professional
responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire air
system. All balancing shall be performed by qualified technicians in the
employ of the pre -qualified firm.
D. This firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders that are
required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and
make all necessary adjustments.
E. Instruments shall be used and applied which are best suited to the system
function being tested. Instruments shall be in first-class state of repair and
have been calibrated within a period of six months prior to starting the job.
Instruments shall be recalibrated upon completion of the job if required by
the Design Engineer to prove reliability.
F. Exhaust system shall be balanced using an applicable proportionate
procedure.
G. After all adjustments are made, a detailed written report shall be prepared
and submitted for approval. Final acceptance of this project will not be
made until a satisfactory report is received and field verified.
H. The Design Engineer may field verify the report.
15990 - 1
Southridge Pavilion
2. AIR BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Before any adjustments are made, room is to be closed off with windows
& doors closed. The systems are to be checked for such items as damper
leakage, equipment vibrations, correct damper operations, etc. Fan system
is to be adjusted to deliver design air quantities within plus or minus 5 %.
After balancing is completed, check motor amperage.
B. Sheaves and/or belts shall be exchanged as required to adjust the RPM of
all fans so they handle specified air quantity.
3. MISCELLANEOUS
A. All installed thermal overload protection shall be observed and noted in
the data sheets. If thermal overload protection is incorrect, it shall be the
responsibility of the balancing firm to see that proper overload protection
is installed at the completion of the job.
B. The adjusting crew shall measure, make tests and record data as required
in "REPORT" below.
4. REPORT
A. A bound report shall be provided which shall contain a general
information sheet listing instruments used, methods of balancing, altitude
correction, and manufacturer's data.
B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating,
etc., of all mechanical equipment, including fans, motors, starters, and
drives. Operating data shall include rotational speed, inlet and outlet J
pressures, and measured motor current and voltage. j
C. The report shall outline any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in
the above.
D. Final report shall be included in the 0&M Manuals.
END OF SECTION
15990 - 2
SECTION 16000
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this section shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and
materials unless otherwise specified and of performing all operations necessary for the
installation of complete electrical systems as required by these Specifications and/or as
indicated on the Drawings.
1. All work under this section shall also be governed by the project general conditions, along
with all supplements and amendments thereto, as published by the Architect.
B. Work shall also include the completion of all labor and the supply of all materials, whether
specifically mentioned or not, for the successful operation of all electrical systems described on
the Drawings or required by these Specifications.
1. Oversights at the bidding stage will not relieve the Contractor of providing complete
electrical systems including equipment, materials, tools and labor.
C. The scope of electrical work shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Underground secondary service and service entrance equipment.
2. Power distribution and branch circuit wiring to all equipment.
3. Installation of building lighting system.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Codes and Regulations: Comply with all applicable state and local codes, regulations and
ordinances and the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code as interpreted
by the local inspection authority who shall have final jurisdiction.
B. Permits and Fees: Secure and pay for all permits, fees, taxes, royalties, licenses and
inspections in connection with the electrical work. Upon completion of work, furnish to the
Architect a Certificate of Inspection indicating final approval by the local inspection authority.
C. Examination of Premises: Examine the premises prior to bidding and become fully familiar with
existing conditions.
D. Construction Power and Lighting: Provide all temporary power, lighting and wiring as required
during the construction period for the use of all the trades. Temporary facilities shall be
installed per NEC and are to be properly grounded throughout. Remove all temporary facilities
upon completion of the project.
1.3 DRAWINGS
r A. The Drawings show functional requirements of the system described herein; components not
itemized on the Drawings and Specifications shall be provided by the Contractor to provide a
f ' complete working system as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Before installing any wiring, equipment, outlets or other devices, examine architectural,
structural and mechanical drawings and specifications; if any discrepancies occur
- between them and the electrical drawings and specifications, report same to the Architect
in writing and obtain written instructions for changes in the work. The architectural,
structural and mechanical drawings and specifications take precedence over the
electrical.
Southridge Pavilion 16000-1 4/5/02
2. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual
construction of the building and work of other trades will permit. All changes from
Drawings necessary to make the electrical work conform to the building as constructed
and to fit work of other trades shall be made without cost to the Owner and shall be
marked on the documents for later submittal to the Architect.
3. Data given herein and on the Drawings is as exact as could be secured, but absolute
accuracy is not guaranteed. Specifications and Drawings are for assistance and
guidance to the Contractor. Exact locations, distances, levels and dimensions will be
governed by the building; the Contractor shall use same with this understanding.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment shall be manufactured, tested and installed in accordance with the
following:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. Underwriters' Laboratory (U.L.).
3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
B. The Contractor shall submit proof, if requested by the Architect, that the materials, equipment
or devices that he installs under this contract meet the requirements of the Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. in regard to fire and casualty hazards.
C. All electrical material shall display a U.L. label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION i
A. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate electrical work with the progress of other work
and with the work of other trades on the job without cost to the Owner. r
B. Power Interruptions: Provide for the interruption of electrical power to the existing building or
areas therein as necessary for new work. Keep all power interruptions to the minimum
practicable time duration. Coordinate power outages with the Owner. Coordination includes
discussion with and approval of the Owner for preparations prior to shutdown, switch over
procedures, date, time of day for start of shutdown, and anticipated duration of the down time.
Begin coordination work with the Owner at least 7 calendar days prior to any anticipated
interruption.
C. Cleanup: If so directed by the Architect, remove any materials not installed in the work which
conflict with the work of other trades. At completion of work, clean up and remove from
premises all debris and materials not installed so premises will be left clean. 4
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. When and if directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall test, under supervision of the t
Architect, all wiring and connections for continuity and grounds.
Southridge Pavilion 16000-2 4/5/02
i
R When directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall demonstrate by megger test the insulation
resistance of any circuit. Where such a test indicates the presence of faulty insulation, the
Contractor shall locate the point of fault, replace with no additional cost to the Owner and
demonstrate by further test the elimination of such a fault.
C. After the installation has been completed and at such time as the Architect may direct, the
Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval in accordance with the requirements of
this Specification.
n
Southridge Pavilion 16000-3 4/5/02
i
SECTION 16100
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all new materials consistent with the requirements of Section 16000 and as specified
below.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog cut sheets on all basic materials to be used and receive Architect's acceptance.
1. See supplemental conditions for distribution and count.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAYS - ACCEPTABLE CLASSES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide raceways as required below for raceway systems.
2. Conduit sizes not noted on Drawings shall be in accordance with NEC requirements for
the quantities and size of wire installed therein.
3. Where nonmetallic raceways are utilized, size as required to conform with the grounding
conductor considered as an insulated additional conductor.
4. Where metallic raceways are used, they must establish positive low -resistance paths to
ground and effectively isolate conductors so that any short-circuit arcs will be confined.
5. Reference Section 16450, Grounding.
B. Acceptable Classes,
1. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
a. Use for all branch circuit wiring inside the maintenance facility.
b. Galvanize on the outside and coat on the inside with a smooth hard finish of lacquer,
varnish or enamel.
C. Fittings.
1) Steel set screw.
d. Comply with Underwriters' Laboratories Standard U.L. 797 and USA Standards
Institute C80-3.
2. Poly -Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Conduit.
a. Provide in the following locations.
1) In or below slabs on grade.
2) In earth or gravel.
b. Schedule 40 Heavy Wall, 90 degrees Celsius, U.L. listed for above ground and
underground uses.
C. Conform to NEMA TC-2 and U.L.-651 standards.
d. U.L. listed in conformity with Article 347 of the National Electric Code.
e. 1-1/2" and larger shall conform to NEMA Publications No. TC-1-1965.
3. Flexible Metal Conduit.
a. Provide in sufficient lengths for:
1) Make-up of equipment raceway connections.
b. Non-liquidtight type: Steel, galvanized, flexible metallic, same manufacturers as for
rigid.
Southridge Pavilion 16100-1 4/5/02
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Owner and Architect shall schedule and administer Pre -Bid and Pre -Construction
Conferences.
B. Contractor shall schedule and administer periodic progress meetings and specially
called meetings throughout progress of the work.
1. Prepare agenda for meetings and conduct meetings.
2. Record the minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions.
3. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within five (5) days after each
meeting to all participants in the meeting and parties affected by decisions
made at the meeting.
4. Prepare and regularly update an "open items list" to document and track
required decisions and pending changes.
C. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall'
be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
D. Architect and Owner's representative will attend meetings to ascertain that work is
expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.
1.02 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Owner and Architect shall schedule and administer the Pre -Construction Conference
within five (5) working days after the date of Notice to Proceed.
B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Owner.
C. Attendance:
c - 1. Owner's principal representative.
2. Architect and his professional consultants, as necessary.
3. Contractor's project manager and superintendent.
4. Major subcontractors.
D. Agenda:
1 . Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors.
b. Project construction schedules.
C. Schedule of Values.
d. Contractor's staging plan.
2. Critical work sequencing.
I 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
4. Project coordination.
a. Designation of responsible personnel.
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions.
rr b. Proposal requests.
I;
C. Submittals, shop drawings and samples.
d. Change Orders.
e. Applications for Payment.
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.
8. Use of premises:
01200-1
C. Liquidtight: American Brass Company Sealtite Type VA, General Electric Type UA
or equal.
2.2 WIRES AND CABLES
A. General.
1. All wire and cable shall be 600 volt rated and U.L. listed. Wire and cable shall be
manufactured in accordance with the latest editions of the following National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (Insulated Cable Engineers Association) standards as
applicable.
a. WC3 (5-19-1981) Rubber -insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy.
b. WC5 (5-61-402) Thermoplastic -insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy.
C. WC7 (5-66-524) Cross -linked thermosetting polyethylene -insulated wire and cable
for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
d. WC8 (5-68-516) Ethylene propylene rubber -insulated wire and cable for the
transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
B. Description of System.
1. Provide a complete system of conductors in raceway systems with minimum wire size to
be No. 12, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, wire sizes noted on Drawings are to be extended for the
entire length of a circuit including taps and risers.
3. 120 volt branch circuits shall be No. 10 or larger where the distance to the first outlet
exceeds 75 feet.
C. Conductor Material.
1. Copper conductors shall be high conductivity annealed copper in compliance with ASTM
B-3, stranded per ASTM B-3, stranded per ASTM B-3, and if coated per ASTM B-33 and
ASTM B-189.
a. Use copper conductors for all wiring.
D. Insulation.
1. Thermoplastic Insulated, Nylon Sheathed - Use for all branch circuit conductors installed
in conduit.
a. U.L. Type THWN, suitable for operation at 600 volts in wet or dry locations at
conductor temperatures not to exceed 75°C.
b. Poly -vinyl chloride insulation that is U.L. defined as heat, abrasion, moisture and oil
resistant.
2.3 JUNCTION BOXES
A. General Requirements.
1. Construct junction or pull boxes less than 100 cubic inches as "junction boxes."
2. Construct junction or pull boxes greater than 100 cubic inches as "cabinets."
3. Provide all covers of same gauge metal and include screws.
B. Concealed Junction Boxes.
1. Provide code gauge sheet metal boxes located and sized as required with suitable covers
and trims.
a. Make of material resistant to corrosion or suitably protected, both internally and
externally, by galvanizing.
Southridge Pavilion 16100-2 4/5/02
b. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be U.L. approved for the purpose.
C. Comply with U.L. Standard 50.
d. Metal boxes to meet NEC construction specifications.
C. Exposed Junction Boxes.
1. Boxes exposed or surface mounted shall be die-cast or permanent -mold cast aluminum
body with threaded external hub and cast cover.
2.4 OUTLET BOXES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide outlet boxes for all wiring devices.
2. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with actual structural
conditions to eliminate obstructions and interference with other work and equipment.
a. Verify final location for all outlets, panels and equipment with Architect - see
Architectural drawings.
B. Concealed Boxes.
1. Furnish sheet steel boxes and fittings which shall be made corrosion resistant both
internally and externally by galvanizing.
a. Provide with matching manufactured cover.
C. Surface Boxes.
1. Furnish die-cast or permanent -mold cast aluminum boxes with threaded external hubs.
a. Provide threaded plugs for unused hubs.
2. Boxes shall be of a corrosion -resistant alloy.
3. Boxes shall be deep -body series, single -gang through four -gang with corresponding
device cover plates.
4. Manufacturers.
a. Appleton: Series "FDH."
2.5 WIRING DEVICES
A. Description of System.
1. Provide wiring devices and device plates as specified below. Provide in the quantities
i
and at the locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Specification Grade Receptacles.
1. Specification grade receptacles shall be 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding duplex, 20 amp, 125
volts.
2. Manufacturers.
a. Leviton 5362.
b. Hubbell 5362.
C. Ground Fault Interrupting Receptacles.
1. GFI receptacles shall be 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding duplex,
20 amp, 125 volts.
2. Ground -fault receptacles shall have NEMA 5-20 configuration with the following
characteristics:
a. 5 milliamp sensitivity to earth leakage current.
b. 1/30th of a second trip time.
t W C. Local "test' button.
d. Local "reset' button.
3. Manufacturers.
a. Leviton 6399.
b. Hubbell GF-5362.
Southridge Pavilion 16100-3 4/5/02
D. Switches.
1. Switches shall be heavy duty, AC quiet type, toggle handle,
20 amp, 120-277 volts, corrosion resistant.
2. Manufacturers.
a. Single -pole.
1) Leviton: No. 54521-I.
2) Hubbell1221-I.
b. Three-way.
1) Leviton: No. 54523-I.
E. Provide stainless steel wall plates for all receptacles and switches.
F. Materials shall conform and be consistent throughout.
2.6 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall be of deadfront construction incorporating switching and protective devices
of the number, rating and type noted herein or indicated on the Drawings.
1. Electrical characteristics, ratings and branch circuit wiring of panelboard shall be in
accordance with panel schedules and elementary drawings.
2. Panelboard circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type.
a. Breakers shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amperes RMS
symmetrical short circuit capacity.
b. Breakers shall be operated by a toggle -type handle and shall have a quick -make,
quick -break switching mechanism with overload or short circuit tripping being clearly
indicated.
3. Panelboard shall be rated for use as service entrance equipment
2.7 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Provide a main enclosed circuit breaker having the electrical characteristics, ratings and
modifications indicated.
1. Each pole of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit
protection.
2. Switching mechanism shall be trip -free type.
3. Service entrance rated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Raceways.
1. Layout work in advance to avoid excessive concentrations of multiple raceway runs.
2. Run concealed raceways in a direct line and use long sweep bend and offsets where
possible.
3. Securely fasten raceways at intervals and locations required by NEC or the type raceway
employed.
4. Route exposed conduit and surface metal raceways parallel or perpendicular to building
lines with neat right angle turns.
5. Turn conduits with neat symmetrical concentric bends.
6. Lengths of flexible metal conduit shall contain a separate grounding conductor.
Southridge Pavilion 16100-4 4/5/02
B. Wire and Cable.
1.
Install wire in approved raceways only after all moisture has been swabbed from conduits.
2.
All wiring shall be furnished and installed complete from point of service connection to all
receptacles, lighting fixtures, utilization equipment, etc., as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Suitable installation equipment shall be provided to prevent cutting and abrasion of
conductors and conduits during the pulling of feeders and branch circuits. Repeated
bending shall be avoided, and the minimum bending radius for the particular conductor
shall be strictly observed.
4.
Ropes used for pulling feeders shall be made of polyethylene.
a. Metallic ropes shall not be used.
5.
Wire pulling lubricants shall conform to U.L. requirements applicable to the several
insulation and raceway materials used.
6.
Pulling lines are to be attached to wires and cables by means of either woven basket
grips or pulling eyes.
a. Rope hitcher shall not be used.
7.
All cables to be installed in a single conduit shall be installed together.
C. Wire Connectors and Devices.
1.
Any connectors and lugs installed shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended
connecting combinations.
2.
Install wire connecting devices to provide a tight mechanical and electrical make-up.
3.
Re -check splices and terminations and make tight prior to substantial completion.
D. Junction
Boxes.
1.
Install junction boxes so that covers are readily accessible after the completion of the
installation.
2.
Do not embed junction boxes made of aluminum in concrete.
3.
Mount rigidly in place with fronts straight and plumb.
4.
Support sheet steel adequately to maintain shape.
5.
Secure covers with corrosion resistant screws and bolts.
E. Outlet Boxes.
1.
Except as required otherwise by actual construction conditions, locate outlets as follows
(all dimensions given are from finished floor to centerline of outlet boxes).
a. Wall Switches: 4'-T.
i .
b. Receptacles: 48" above finished floor..
2.
Adjust height so the height of all units will be consistent in one direction.
F. Wiring Devices.
1.
Install ground fault interrupting receptacles at locations indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Install specification grade receptacles in all remaining areas as indicated on the Drawings.
3.
Install the proper type of device and plate for the particular appliance or equipment.
a. Verify with Architect.
G. Panelboards.
1. Mount panelboards rigidly in place with fronts straight and plumb.
2. Provide complete mounting brackets and hardware as necessary for complete support of
panelboards at locations indicated on Drawings.
3. Provide a typed panel directory for each panelboard; enclose in plastic.
a. Label panel as indicated on one -line diagram. Submit sample of label to Architect
for approval.
H. Enclosed Circuit Breakers.
1. Install enclosed circuit breakers adjacent to protected conductor and equipment. Make all
terminations.
Southridge Pavilion 16100-5 4/5/02
SECTION 16410
ELECTRIC SERVICE
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The electric service includes all conductors and equipment from the point at which the electric
utility delivers the power to the site to the metering equipment and to the line side of the service
disconnecting means.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and coordinate with the local electric utility for
installation of the metering equipment and the service conductor terminators inside the existing
transformer.
B. Size of the service entrance conductors, number of conductors, service entrance raceway size
and type, service voltage and associated equipment are indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. National Electric Code.
B. Local Electric Utility Specifications.
C. Local Codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable classes of materials for use in conjunction with the electric service shall be in
accordance with the appropriate reference sections listed below,
1. Basic Materials and Methods, 16100,
2. Grounding, 16450.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
` A. Coordinate the installation of the new secondary service with the local utility. The transformer
l , is existing and the contractor will install the service entrance raceways and conductor.
1. The electric utility will make all the necessary terminations inside their transformer.
B. The Contractor shall install the service entrance conductors from the padmount transformer
t ' and terminate them at the main breaker.
C. Coordinate underground conduit installations with other work to eliminate conflict and avoid
interference with other underground piping systems.
Southridge Pavilion 16410-1
8
4/5/02
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Description of System.
1. The grounded neutral of the secondary distribution system shall be supplemented by an
equipment grounding system to properly safeguard the equipment and personnel. The
equipment grounding system shall be installed so all metallic structures, enclosures,
raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, machine frames, portable equipment
and other conductive items in close proximity with electrical circuits operate continuously
at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. System to comply with NEC.
1. Reference Article 250.
B. Reference Standards.
1. ANSI,
2. Local Codes.
3. NEC.
C. Installation Tests,
1. Grounding Tests.
2. Continuity.
0
? PART 2-PRODUCTS
l
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding circuit conductors, grounding electrodes,
grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances required for complete grounding.
1. Grounding electrode: 3/4" x 10'-0" copperclad.
B. All grounding circuit conductors for general purpose branch circuits serving appliances and
utilization equipment shall be insulated high conductivity copper wire.
Southridge Pavilion 16450-1 4/5/02
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide separate grounding conductor securely connected to grounding screws, clamps, etc.
on each side of new raceways.
B. Install a driven ground rod as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Bond the nearest metal concrete encased electrodes (concrete foundation reinforcing
steel) and driven ground rod together to the unspliced grounding electrode conductor.
M
Southridge Pavilion 16450-2 4/5/02
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete lighting system as indicated on Drawings and in fixture schedules, all wired,
assembled and in working order.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards.
1.
IES minimum standards.
2.
UL approved auxiliaries.
3.
NEMA.
4.
CBM-ETL certified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit catalog cut sheets for all lighting fixture types to the Architect. These shall include the
following information:
1. Photometric data.
2. Mounting provisions and accessories.
B. Submit catalog cut sheets for all ballasts to be employed by fluorescent and HID lighting
fixtures. Provide a typed chart listing each ballast to be used, the manufacturer, the number
and the type lamps it will operate, and include the following information on that ballast listing
chart for each ballast type.
1. Indicate the maximum ambient temperature in degrees Fahrenheit in which the ballast will
function continuously without interruption.
2. Indicate the minimum temperature for starting the lamp for which the ballast is applied.
3. Indicate the ballast factor, the harmonic distortion, the current crest factor, the power
factor, and the sound rating for each type of ballast specified.
C. Reference supplemental conditions for distribution.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Fixtures installed in damp or wet locations shall be suitable for the environment and display
appropriate UL label.
B. All fixtures shall be constructed of adequate gauge steel, including interior barriers, channels,
end caps and reflectors.
i C. Ballast case temperatures not to exceed the UL 900C limit in a 250C ambient.
Southridge Pavilion 16500-1 4/5/02
2.2 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS
A. All fluorescent ballasts shall conform to the following:
1. Reference codes and standards.
a. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. approved, listed and labeled.
b. Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM) and Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)
certified, class P.
C. National Appliance Energy Conservation Act (Public Law 100-357 dated June 28,
1988) Requirements for energy efficient ballasts.
2. Ballasts shall have a nominal power factor of 0.95.
3. Ballasts shall have a maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.7.
4. All electronic ballasts shall have less than 10 percent total harmonic distortion, and a third
harmonic distortion less than 15 percent.
5. Ballasts shall have an "A" sound rating or better.
6. All electronic ballasts shall be warranted for parts and replacement labor for one full year
from the date of installation.
7. Ballasts shall meet or exceed FCC regulations Part 18.
B. All HID ballasts shall be designed and constructed to meet the American National Standard
Institute specifications. They shall also comply with UL 1029 and be UL listed and be
accordingly labeled.
1. All ballasts shall be encased.
2.3 FIXTURES
A. Provide as specified in the fixture schedule.
2.4 LAMPS
A. Lamps shall be manufactured by General Electric, Osram, or North American Phillips.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set luminaries true and free from light leaks, warps, dents and other defects.
B. Provide length of stems as required to hang luminaires level in the same horizontal plane.
C. Provide fixtures having proper flanges, trim and mounting.
D. Install fluorescent lamps aligned for proper lamp contact.
E. Fixture Wiring: conform to NEC.
F. Protect wiring with tape or tubing at points where abrasion is likely to occur.
G. Provide chase nipples where field wiring through knockouts.
H. Install wire in fluorescent fixtures that meets temperature requirements with a minimum rating
of 900C (1940F).
Install incandescent lamps rated at 130 volts.
J. Install exterior lighting systems as indicated on Drawings with supporting equipment and
accessories.
Southridge Pavilion 16500-2 4/5/02
0
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT
SOUTHRIDGE CART STORAGE FACILITY
SOUTHRIDGE GOLF COURSE
5750 SOUTH LEMAY AVENUE
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
TERRACON PROJECT NO.20015034
March '13, 2001
Prepared for.•
CITY OF`FORT COLLINS
CULTURAL, LIBRARY AND RECREATION FACILITIES
281 NORTH COLLEGE AVENUE
FORT COLLINS, CO 80524
ATTN: 'MS. ALISON BRADY
Prepared by:
Terracon
301 North Howes Street
Fort Collins, Colorado 80521
1rerr
a. Field office, work and storage areas.
b. Owner's use of site and grounds.
9. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids.
10. Temporary utilities.
11. Safety and first -aid procedures.
12. Security procedures.
13. Housekeeping procedures.
14. Pending changes and substitutions by Change Order.
15. Installation of project sign.
1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Contractor shall schedule and administer regular meetings as determined at the Pre -
Construction Conference and specially called meetings as required by progress of the
work.
B. Location of the Meetings: As designated by Contractor and coordinated with the
Owner's principal representative.
C. Attendance:
1. Contractor's project manager and on -site superintendent.
2. Owner's principal representative.
3. Architect and his professional consultants, as needed.
4. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda.
5. Others as appropriate.
D. Suggested Agenda:
1. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
2. Field observations, problems and conflicts.
3. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules.
4. Revisions to the construction schedule.
5. Progress and schedule during succeeding work period.
6. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required.
7. Maintenance of quality standards.
8. Pending changes and substitutions, with review of the proposed changes for:
a. Effect on construction schedule and on completion date.
b. Effect on other contracts of the project.
9. Review of Contractor's application for progress/final payment.
10. Walk-through inspection of the work in progress by the Owner's j
representative, Architect and his consultants, as necessary, and General
Contractor. Subcontractors will only be involved in these walk-throughs as
requested by the Owner or Architect.
END OF SECTION
01200-2
's
n�
Irerracon
301 N. Howes •oP,O. Box 503
Fort Colons, Colorado 80521-0503
(970) 484-0359 Fax (970) 484-0454 -
March 13, 2001
City of Fort Collins
Cultural, Library and Recreation Facilities
281 North College Avenue
Fort Collins, CO 80524
Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report
Southridge Cart Storage Facility
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Fort Collins, Colorado
Terracon Project No. 20015034
Terracon has completed a geotechnical engineering exploration for the proposed golf cart
storage facility at Southridge Golf Course located at 5750 South Lemay Avenue in Fort
Collins; Colorado. This study was performed in general accordance with our Proposal No.
D2001079 dated February 15, 2001.
The results of our engineering study, including the boring location diagram, laboratory test
results, test boring records, and the geotechnical recommendations needed to aid in the
design and construction of foundations and other earth connected phases of this project
are attached. t
The subsurface soils at the site consisted of lean clay with sand, sandy lean clay and
r
clayey sand with gravel extending to depths explored and/or to the bedrock below.
Siltstone/claystone bedrock was encountered at an approximate depth of 14 feet below
existing site grades in Test Boring No. 1. Groundwater was encountered at an
approximate depth of 14 feet below existing site grades in both test borings when
measured during initial drilling operations.
Based on the geotechnical engineering analyses, subsurface exploration and laboratory '
test results, we recommend that the proposed residence be supported by a spread footing
foundation system. Slab on grade may be utilized for the interior floor system.
Other design and construction recommendations, based upon geotechnical conditions, are
f, presented in the report.
, t
Arizona III Arkansas ■ Colorado ■ Georgia ■ Idaho ■ Illinois ■ Iowa ■ Kansas ■ Kentucky ■ Minnesota ■ Missouri ■ Montana
44� Nebraska ■ Nevada IN New Mexico ■ Oklahoma ■ Tennessee ■ Texas ■ Utah ■ Wisconsin ■ Wyoming
Quality Engineering Singe 1965
s
{
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
We appreciate being of service to you in the geotechnical engineering phase of this
project, and are prepared to assist you during the construction phases as well. If you have
any questions concerning this report or any of our testing, inspection, design and
consulting services please do not hesitate to contact us.
Sincerely,
TERRACON
Prepared by:
Daniel R. art, E.I.T
Geotechni I Engineer
�opies'to: Addressee (3)
Revie ed by:
avid A. Rich r, P
Geotechnical Enoii
u
[f
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Letter of Transmittal .........................................
Page No.
r6
f'
INTRODUCTION
......................................................... ....................................................
1
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
.......................................
2
SITEEXPLORATION
..........................................................................................
2
FieldExploration..........................................................................................................2
Y
LaboratoryTesting.................................................................
(
. SITECONDITIONS.......................................................................
,
................ 3
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ........................
SoilConditions........................................................
4
GroundwaterConditions..............................................................................................4
ENGINEERING ANALYSES A14D RECOMMENDATIONS
...................................................4
Geotechnical Considerations .................. .................................................
4
Foundation Systems - Spread Footings......................................................................5
s;
Below Grade/Lower Level Construction....................................................................:
5 R
LateralEarth Pressures...............................................................................................6
SeismicConsiderations...............................................................................................7
x<
Floor Slab Design and Construction............................................................................8
Earthwork.............................................................
8
General Considerations......................................................................................8
Site Preparation.................................................................................................9
Fill Materials and Placement..............................................................................9
f
Additional Design and Construction Considerations..................................................10
i
Exterior Slab Design and Construction.............................................................10
CorrosionProtection
.........................................................................................11
SurfaceDrainage.............................................................................................11
GENERALCOMMENTS.....................................................................................................11
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont'd)
APPENDIX A
Site Plan
Logs of Borings
APPENDIX B
Laboratory Results
APPENDIX C
General Notes
Unified Soil Classification
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT
SOUTHRIDGE CART STORAGE FACILITY
SOUTHRIDGE GOLF COURSE
5750 SOUTH LEMAY AVENUE
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
TERRACON PROJECT NO. 20015034
March 13, 2001
INTRODUCTION
This report contains the results of our geotechnical engineering exploration for the proposed golf
cart storage facility for the Southridge Golf Course located at 5750 South Lemay Avenue in Fort
Collins, Colorado. The site is located in the Northwest 1/4 of Section 7, Township 6 North, Range
68 West of the 6th Principal Meridian, Larimer County, Colorado.
The purpose of .these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineering
recommendations relative to:
• subsurface soil and bedrock conditions
• groundwater conditions
• foundation design and construction !
• lower level construction
• lateral earth pressures
• floor slab design and construction
• earthwork
• drainage
The recommendations contained in this report are based upon the results of field and laboratory
testing, engineering analyses, and experience with similar soil conditions, structures and our
understanding of the proposed project.
1,
;Trh
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
The project, as we understand it, is to construct a below grade golf cart storage facility,
approximately 50 feet by 80 feet in plan dimension, southwest of the existing clubhouse. Maximum
wall and column loads are assumed to be on the order of 1 to 4 klf, and 10 to 40 kips respectively.
Y
Although final grading plans were not available prior to the field exploration, it is anticipated the
ground level will be placed at or slightly above existing site elevations.
SITE EXPLORATION
The scope of the services performed for this project included a site reconnaissance by an
engineering geologist, a subsurface exploration program, . laboratory testing and engineering
analyses.
Field Exploration
Two test borings were drilled on February 21, 2001. The borings were located within the footprint
of the proposed cart storage facility, as shown on the Site Plan, Figure 1, and drilled to
approximate depths of 15 to 20 feet below existing site grades. The borings were located in the
1, r.
field with the aid of the client and advanced with a truck -mounted drilling rig, utilizing 4-inch
diameter solid stem augers.
Continuous lithologic logs of each boring were recorded by the engineering geologist during the
drilling operations. At selected intervals, samples of the subsurface materials were taken by
means of pushing thin -walled Shelby tubes, or by driving split -spoon samplers.
Penetration resistance measurements were obtained by driving the split -spoon into the subsurface
materials with a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches. The penetration resistance value is a useful
index in estimating the consistency, relative density or hardness of the materials encountered.
j''� The groundwater condition was evaluated in the boring at the time of site exploration.
-j
l
{
�,, 2
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
Laboratory Testing
All samples retrieved during the field exploration were returned to the laboratory for observation by
the project engineering geologist and were classified in accordance with the Unified Soil
Classification System described in Appendix C. Samples of bedrock were classified in accordance
with the General Notes for Bedrock Classification. At that time, the field descriptions were
confirmed or modified as necessary and an applicable laboratory testing program was formulated
to determine engineering properties of the subsurface materials. Boring logs were prepared and
113 are presented in Appendix A.
Laboratory tests were conducted on selected soil and bedrock samples and are presented in
Appendix B. The test results were used for the geotechnical engineering analyses, and the
development of foundation and earthwork recommendations. All laboratory tests were performed
in general accordance with the applicable ASTM, local or other accepted standards.
Selected soil and bedrock samples were tested for the following engineering properties:
• Water Content
• Dry Density
• Soluble Sulfate Content
• Expansion
SITE CONDITIONS
• Compressive Strength
• Consolidation
• Plastic Limit
The site is located southwest of the existing clubhouse facility adjacent to the No. 15 and 17 tee
box area. The site has similar rolling terrain as the surrounding golf course, is presently
landscaped with grass and several trees, and exhibits overall drainage in the southwest direction
,71 toward Fossil Creek which meanders along hole No. 14 and continues across Lemay Avenue. A
J paved parking area lies to the north, and the driving range is, to the east.
r
I
r
r
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20016034
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
Soil Conditions
The subsurface soils at the site consisted of lean clay with sand, sandy lean clay and clayey sand
with gravel extending to depths explored and/or to the bedrock below. Siltstone/claystone bedrock
was encountered at an approximate depth of 14 feet below existing site grades in Test Boring No.
1.
Field and Laboratory Test Results
Field test results indicate that the clay soils vary from medium stiff to very stiff in consistency and
the sand soils are loose in relative density. Laboratory test results indicate that the on -site
overburden soils have low expansive potential and low to moderate load bearing capabilities. The
bedrock stratum varies from weathered moderately hard to hard with increased depths.
Groundwater Conditions
Groundwater was observed at an approximate depth of 14 feet below existing site grades during
initial drilling operations. These observations represent groundwater conditions at the time of the
field exploration, and may not be indicative of other times, or at other locations. Groundwater
conditions can change with varying seasonal and weather conditions, and other factors.
ENGINEERING ANALYSES AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Geotechnical Considerations
The following foundation systems were evaluated for use on the site:
e Spread footings bearing on undisturbed soils or engineered fill.
Slab -on -grade construction is considered acceptable when subgrade materials consist of the on -
site clays or moisture controlled non -to -low -expansive soils.
4
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
j Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20016034
Design and construction recommendations for foundation systems and other earth connected
phases of the project are outlined below.
Foundation Systems - Spread Footings
Due to the presence of low swelling subsurface soils, spread footing foundations bearing upon
J undisturbed subsoils, and/or engineered fill are recommended for support for the proposed
structure. The footings may be designed for a maximum bearing pressure of 2,000 psf bearing on
the undisturbed soils and/or engineered fill material. In addition, the footings should be sized to
maintain a minimum dead -load pressure of 500 psf.
Exterior footings should be placed a minimum of 30 inches below finished grade for frost protection
and to provide confinement for the bearing soils. Finished grade is the lowest adjacent grade for
perimeter footings.
Footings should be proportioned to reduce differential foundation movement. Proportioning on the
basis of equal total settlement is recommended; however, proportioning to relative constant dead -
load pressure will also reduce differential settlement between adjacent footings. Total settlement
resulting from the assumed structural loads is estimated to be on the order of 3/4 inch or less.
Differential settlement should be on the order of 1/2 to 3/4 of the estimated total settlement.
Additional foundation movements could occur if water from any source infiltrates the foundation
soils; therefore, proper drainage should be provided in the final design and during construction.
Footings and foundation walls should be reinforced as necessary to reduce the potential for
distress caused by differential foundation movement. The use of joints at openings or other '
discontinuities in walls is recommended.
The geotechnical engineer should observe foundation excavations. If the soil conditions
encountered differ significantly from those presented in this report, supplemental recommendations
will be required.
Below Grade/Lower Level Construction 1
in
Groundwater was encountered at an approximate depth of 14 feet below existing site grades and
siltstone/claystone bedrock was encountered at approximately 15 feet below existing site grades.
5
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
a 5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
^'= Therefore, lower level construction is considered feasible for the site if the lower level slab is a
minimum of 4 feet above the bedrock and a dewatering system is installed.
To reduce the potential for surface water infiltration and/or groundwater fluctuation from impacting
foundation bearing soils and entering the lower level of the structure, installation of a perimeter
drainage system is recommended. The drainage system should be constructed around the exterior
perimeter of the lower level foundation, and sloped at a minimum 1/8 inch per foot to a suitable
outlet, such as a sump and pump system, and/or daylighted away from the foundation system.
` The drainage system should consist of a properly sized perforated pipe, embedded in free -draining
gravel, placed in a trench at least 12 inches in width. Gravel should extend a minimum of 3 inches
beneath the bottom of the pipe, and at least 1-foot above the bottom of the foundation wall. The
( gravel should be covered with drainage fabric prior to placement of foundation backfill.
"} Lateral Earth Pressures
For soils above any free water surface, recommended equivalent fluid pressures for unrestrained
foundation elements are:
• Active:
Cohesive soils (on -site clays).................................................45 psf/ft
Cohesionless soils (on -site sand or imported material).......... 35 psf/ft
• Passive:
Cohesive soils (on -site clays)...............................................250 psf/ft
Cohesionless soils (on -site sand or imported material)........ 350 psf/ft
• Adhesion at base of footing .................................................... 500 psf
Where the design includes restrained elements, the following equivalent fluid pressures are
recommended:
' At rest:
Cohesive soils (on -site clays).................................................50 psf/ft
i
SECTION 01310
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect estimated construction progress
schedules for the work with subschedules of related activities which are essential to
its progress.
B. Submit revised progress schedules periodically.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. General and Supplementary Conditions, and Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01040, Coordination.
3. Section 01200, Project Meetings.
4. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
5. Section 01700, Contract Close -Out.
I
1.02 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Type: Schedules will be computer generated, using software specifically designed for
this intent, and shall be capable of automatically adjusting critical path entries.
B. Prepare schedules in a continuous flow, both daily and weekly formats.
1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade, supplier or subcontractor.
2. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify the first work day of each week.
3. Scale and Spacing: As required to allow space for notations and future
revisions.
4. Minimum Size: 8-1/2" x 11 ".
C. Format of Listing: Table of Contents of this project manual.
3 ' D. Format of Scheduling: Chronological order of the start of each item of work.
E. Identification of Listings: By major specification section numbers as a minimum.
1. Listings shall be complete enough to include each item of work that is sizable
( enough to affect either the start of, or completion of, other areas of the work.
1.03 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES
A. Construction Progress Schedule:
1 . Show the complete sequence of construction by activity.
I 2. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of
construction, based upon the Schedule of Values.
3. Substantial completion, punch list completion, final completion and contract
close-out shall be included.
1 B. Final Completion Schedule: Contractor shall update the latest progress schedule
through contract close-out.
C. Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be a usurpation of the Contractor's
authority and responsibility to plan and schedule the work as he sees fit, subject to all
other requirements of the Contract Documents.
01310-1
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
m'} Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20016034
Cohesionless soils (on -site sand or imported material).......... 50 psf/ft
The above -referenced lateral earth pressures do not include any factor of safety and are not
applicable for submerged soils/hydrostatic loading. The following values are for lateral earth
pressures for the potential submerged soils/hydrostatic loading conditions for various structures,
which may be constructed beneath the groundwater level.
• Active: Submerged Soils/Hydrostatic Loading
Cohesive soil backfill (clays)..................................................85 psf/ft
Cohesionless soil backfill (on -site sands) .............................. 80 psf/ft
• Passive: Submerged Soils/Hydrostatic Loading
Cohesive soil backfill (clays)................................................125 psf/ft
Cohesionless soil backfill (on -site sands) ............................175 psf/ft
• At -Rest: Submerged Soils/Hydrostatic Loading
Cohesive soil backfill (clays) .................................................. 90 psf/ft
Cohesionless soil backfill (on -site sands) .............................. 85 psf/ft
Fill against grade beams and retaining walls should be compacted to densities specified in
Earthwork. Compaction of each lift adjacent to walls should be accomplished with hand -operated
tampers or other lightweight compactors. Overcompaction may cause excessive lateral earth
pressures, which could result in wall movement.
Seismic Considerations
The project site is located in Seismic Risk Zone I of the Seismic Zone Map of the United States as
indicated by the 1997 Uniform Building Code. Based upon the nature of the subsurface materials,
a soil profile type Sc should be used for the design of structures for the proposed project (1997
Uniform Building Code, Table No. 16-J).
7
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
_ l Terracon Project No. 20015034
Floor Slab Design and Construction
Some differential movement of a slab -on -grade floor system is possible should the subgrade soils
become elevated in moisture content. To reduce potential slab movements, the subgrade soils
1 should be prepared as outlined in the earthwork section of this report.
Additional floor slab design and construction recommendations are as follows:
• Positive separations and/or isolation joints should be provided between slabs and all
foundations, columns or utility lines to allow independent movement.
• Control joints should be provided in slabs to control the location and extent of
cracking.
• Interior trench backfill placed beneath slabs should be compacted in accordance
with recommendations outlined below.
• In areas subjected to normal loading, a minimum 4-inch layer of sand, clean -graded
gravel or aggregate base course should be placed beneath interior slabs. For heavy
loading, reevaluation of slab and/or base course thickness may be required.
• A minimum El -inch layer of free -draining gravel should be placed beneath lower level
floor slabs in conjunction with the underslab drainage system.
• Floor slabs should not be constructed on frozen subgrade.
Earthwork
• General Considerations
The following presents recommendations for site preparation, excavation, subgrade
° preparation and placement of engineered fills on the project.
I,
8
vs
Tf?k
i
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
4 Southridge Golf Course
$ 5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
All earthwork on the project should be observed and evaluated by Terracon. The
evaluation of earthwork should include observation and testing of engineered fill, subgrade
preparation, foundation bearing soils, and other geotechnical conditions exposed during the
construction of the project.
• Site Preparation
Strip and remove existing vegetation, debris, and other deleterious materials from proposed
building areas. All exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions, which
could prevent uniform compaction.
Stripped materials consisting of vegetation and organic materials should be wasted from the
site, or used to revegetate landscaped areas or exposed slopes after completion of grading
operations.
It is anticipated that excavations for the proposed construction can be accomplished with
conventional earthmoving equipment.
The individual contractor(s) is responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary I
excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. All
excavations should be sloped or shored in the interest of safety following local, and federal f
regulations, including current OSHA excavation and trench safety standards. i
• Fill Materials and Placement f
Clean on -site soils or approved imported materials may be used as fill material.
i
Imported soils (if required) should conform to the following:
Gradation
Percent fines by weight
fASTM C1361
..1
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
• Liquid Limit.......................................................................30 (max)
• Plasticity Index.................................................................15 (max)
Engineered fill should be placed and compacted in horizontal lifts, using equipment and
procedures that will produce recommended moisture contents and densities throughout the
lift. Recommended compaction criteria for engineered fill materials are as follows:
Material
Minimum Percent
(ASTM D698)
Scarified subgrade soils.........................................................................95
On -site and imported fill soils:
Beneath foundations..................................................................95
Beneathslabs............................................................................95
Beneath pavements...................................................................95
Aggregate base (beneath slabs)............................................................95
Miscellaneous backfill (non-structural areas).........................................go
On -site soils should be compacted within a moisture content range of 2 percent below to 2
percent above optimum unless modified by the project geotechnical engineer.
Additional Design and Construction Considerations
• Exterior Slab Design and Construction
Exterior slabs -on -grade, exterior architectural features, and utilities founded on, or in backfill
may experience some movement due to the volume change of the backfill. Potential
movement could be reduced by:
• minimizing moisture increases in the backfill
• controlling moisture -density during placement of backfill
10
r f
i
4 Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
• using designs which allow vertical movement between the exterior features and
adjoining structural elements
• placing effective control joints on relatively close centers
• Corrosion Protection
r
ASTM Type 1-II Portland cement is suitable for all concrete on and below grade. Foundation
concrete should be designed in accordance with the provisions of the ACI Design Manual, f
Section 318, Chapter 4.
w1 Surface Drainage
Positive drainage should be provided during construction and maintained throughout the life
of the proposed project. Infiltration of water into utility or foundation excavations must be
prevented during construction. Planters and other surface features, which could retain
water in areas adjacent to the building or pavements, should be sealed or eliminated. In
Jr areas where sidewalks or paving do not immediately adjoin the structure, we recommend 1
that protective slopes be provided with a minimum grade of approximately 5 percent for at
least 10 feet from perimeter walls. Backfill against footings, exterior walls, and in utility and
sprinkler line trenches should be well compacted and free of all construction debris to
reduce the possibility of moisture infiltration.
Downspouts, roof drains or scuppers should discharge into splash blocks or extensions
when the ground surface beneath such features is not protected by exterior slabs or paving.
Sprinkler systems should not be installed within 5 feet of foundation walls. Landscaped
irrigation adjacent to the foundation system should be minimized or eliminated.
GENERAL COMMENTS
Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can
be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the 6
design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide testing and observation
during excavation, grading, foundation and construction phases of the project.
+ t..
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Proposed Cart Storage Building
Southridge Golf Course
5750 South Lemay Avenue
Terracon Project No. 20015034
The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from
the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report.
This report does not reflect variations, which may occur between borings or across the site. The
nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until construction. If variations
appear, it will be necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this report.
The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any
environmental assessment of the site or identification of contaminated or hazardous materials or
conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination, other studies
should be undertaken.
1 This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the
i
project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical
engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. In the
a event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report, are
planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered
T valid unless Terracon reviews the changes, and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this
report in writing.
12
NO.2
I I
N0.1
FIGURE I: SITE PLAN
llll�u
OUTHRIDGE GOLF COURSE CART STORAGE BUILDING
CITY OF FORT COLLINS PARKS DIVISION
FORT COLLINS, COLORADO
jAppM.�d
No.
rarracon
I 200i 50
Scoleet
WBy,.FORT
N
Date' 2 26
301 N. HOWES STREET
DreMn By: S
DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY,
COWNE, CGLORAOo E0621
AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES.
FlW Nome:
50WIG1
Figure No.
1
of Fort Collins Parks D
5750 S. Lemay Ave
Fort Collins. Cnlnrnr
0
H
DESCRIPTION
r�
x
D:
�^
Approx. Surface Elev.: 96.2 ft.
0.5 6" TOPSOIL
;i
LEAN CLAY wi i SAND
Brown, moist, very stiff
4.0
SANDY LFANCLAY
Tan, brown, calcareous, moist,
medium stiff to very stiff
`Tan, brown, moist to wet, loose
WEATHERRD
SILTSTONE/CT AYSTONE
Olive, gray, tan, rust, moist,
moderately hard
SLL TSTONE/CLAYSTONE
Olive, gray, tan, rust, moist, hard
LOG OF BORING NO. 1
Pa eIof1
ARCHITECT I ENGINEER
on
PROJECT
p
HWm
H
W
LL
L
NZN
JH#
=
N
W
ZLL
Cr
Z
HIx-
W
>
(n
a
IL
U
�
OW.
U
F-O
H
OW
�U
C]
�
Z
F
t.Y
Ul m
M
O:U
OIL
a
J 1
f~!l
CL
1
SS
12"
18
11
R
10
82.2
81.2 15
20
25
- CL1 31 SS 1 12"1 8 1 19 1 —�
-{ SC 1 5 1 SS 1 12" 1 9 J 24-F----T---7
-1 1 6 1 SS j 12" 1 24 1 24 1 1 - 1
7 I SS
STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT THE APPROXIMATE BOUNDARY LINES
!EEN SOIL AND ROCK TYPES: IN -SITU, THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRARUAL.
WATER LEVEL OBSERvATIONS
JU 14.0' irerracon
99
37/20/84
SWELL
TEST
24' =
155 PSF
STARTED 2-21-01
COMPLETED 2-21-01
CME-55 iFOREMAN MTZ
ED DAR !JOB# 2nni cnQe
a
CLIENT
City of Fort Collins Parks Dii
SITE 5750 S. Lemay Ave
Fort Collins, Coloradc
DESCRIPTION
rox. Surface Elev.: 96.5 ft.
6" TOPSOIL
_LEAN CLAY with CAABrown, moist, very stiff
[4.5
ANDY TFeN nT Av
brown,
an, calcareous, moist,
medium stiff to very stiff
LOG OF BORING NO. 2
Page 1 of 1
ARCHITECT /ENGINEER
on
g
C:iAYEY LAND v^th CRA��'T
Tan, brown, moist to wet, loose
ri%uj6
i
Southrid
a Golf
Course
-
Cart Storage Buildi
SAMPLES
TEST:
>
'Jo
CM
H W
y
}
Q:
Z1L
IX
Z HH
LU
O
3
U)
toZZ
ILU
W
O
to
O
0-
U
W
HO
D_J
H
O
}lt UOt U.
W_ U ZF f17
=
Z
H
rz
tnCo
oo- Arno
0
CL
1
SS
12"
24
16
3 I ST 112"1 I 23 102 2010
4 SS 12"1 6 1 23
10
ISCI SIS1II2" 4 21
15 —i�--
THE STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT THE APPROXIMATE BOUNDARY LINES
BETWEEN SOIL AND ROCK TYPES: IN -SITU, THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRADUAL.
VVWATIEROBSERVATIONSWD a1rerracon
r Level Reathlawg
al,lnv 2-21-01
COMPLETED 2-21-01 f-
CME-55 FOREMAN MTZ 1
D DAR JJOB# 20015034 +
V
O
1
D
R
A
T
I
O
APPLIED PRESSURE, TSF
Boring and depth (fr.) Classification DD MC%
i 2 7.0 SANDY LEAN CLAY CL 106 23
JOB NO.
5750 S. Lemav Ave DATE
CONSOLIDATION TEST
TERRACON
1.04 SUBMISSIONS
A. Submit initial schedule within fifteen (15) days after Award of Contract. _
1 . Architect/Engineer will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10)
days after receipt, if modifications are required.
2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit revised progress schedules with each Application for Payment indicating actual
work progress in comparison to scheduled progress. Schedules will be reviewed at
normally scheduled meetings, as set forth in Section 01200.
C. Submit final schedule with contract close-out documentation.
1.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULES
A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:
1 . Job site file.
2. Owner's representative.
3. Architect.
4. Other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor in writing any problems
anticipated by the projections shown in the schedules.
END OF SECTION
01310-2
s
w
E
L
L
C
O
N
S
O
L
I �
D
A
T
I
O
N
8
10
I_
APPLIED PRESSURE, TSF
Boring and depth (ft.) Classification DD MCA
101 2 7.0 SANDY LEAN CLAY CL 106 23
_ 1
-- -• • . , uum - � arc JOB NO. 20015034
Buildin - 5750 S. Lemav Ave DATE 2128/01
CONSOLIDATION TEST
TERRACON
M[
No Text
wy•
DRILLING AND EXPLORATION
DRILLING & SAMPLING SYMBOLS:
R : Ring Sorrell - 2.42" I.D., 3" O.D., unless otherwise noted
SS : Split Spoon - 1 " I.D., 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted
ST : Thin -Walled Tube 2" O.D.,
PS : Piston Sample
- unless otherwise noted
PA ; Power Auger
WS : Wash Sample
HA : Hand Auger
FT: Fish Tail Bit
DB : Diamond Bit = 4", N, B
RB :Rock Bit
AS : Auger Sample
BS : Bulk Sample
HS :Hollow Stem Auger
PM : Pressure Meter
DC : Dutch Cone
WB : Wash Bore
Penetration Test: Blows per foot of a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches on a 2-inch O.D. split spoon, except where
noted.
WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS:
WL Water Level WC] WS :While Sampling
: Wet Cave in DCI WD :While Drilling
: Dry Cave in BCR : Before Casing Removal
AB :After Boring ACR : After Casting Removal
Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the time indicated. In pervious soils,
the indicated levels may reflect the location of groundwater. In low permeability soils, the accurate determination of
groundwater levels is not possible with only short term observations.
DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION:
Soil Classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification system and the ASTM Designations D-2487 and D-2488.
Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are described as: boulders,
cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are
described as: clays, if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non -plastic. Major constituents may be
added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In
addition to gradation, coarse grained soils are defined on the basis of their relative in -place density and fine grained soils
on the basis of their consistency. Example: Lean clay with sand, trace gravel, stiff (CL); silty sand, trace gravel, medium
dense (SM).
CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS:
Unconfined Compressive
Strength, Qu, psf
Consistency
< 500
Very Soft
500 - 1,000
Soft
1,001 - 2,000
Medium
2,001 - 4,000
Stiff
4,001 - 8,000
Very Stiff
8,001-16,000
Very Hard
RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF
SAND AND GRAVEL
Descriptive Term(s)
(of components Also Percent of
Present in Sample) Dry Weight
Trace < 15
With 15 - 29
Modifier > 30
RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES
Descriptive Terms)
iof Components Also
Percent of
Present in Sample)
Dry Weight
Trace
< 5
With
5 - 12
Modifier
> 12
RELATIVE DENSITY OF
COARSE -GRAINED SOILS:
N-Blowstft. Relative Density
0-3 Very Loose
4-9 Loose
10-29 Medium Dense
30-49 Dense
50-80 Very Dense
80+ Extremely Dense
GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY
Major Component
of Sample
Boulders
Cobbles
Gravel
Sand
Silt or Clay
Size Range
Over 12 in. (300mm)
12 in. to 3 in.
(300mm to 75mm)
3 in. to #4 sieve
(75mm to 4.75mm)
#4 to #200 sieve
(4.75mmto 0.075mm)
Passing #200 Sieve
(0.075mm)
Irerracon
-I.
LABORATORY TESTS
SIGNIFICANCE AND PURPOSE
TEST
SIGNIFICANCE
PURPOSE
California
Bearing
Used to evaluate the potential strength of subgrade soil,
Pavement
Ratio
subbase, and base course material, including recycled
materials for use in road and airfield pavements.
Thickness
Design
Consolidation
Used to develop an estimate of both the rate and amount of
Foundation
both differential and total settlement of a structure.
Design
Direct
Shear
Used to determine the consolidated drained shear strength of
soil or rock.
Bearing Capacity,
'&
Foundation Design
Slope Stability
Dry
Density
Used to determine the in -place density of natural, inorganic,
fine-grained soils.
Index Property
Soil Behavior
Expansion
Used to measure the expansive potential of fine-grained soil
Foundation & Slab
and to provide a basis for swell potential classification.
Design
Gradation
Used for the quantitative determination of the distribution of
Soil
particle sizes in soil.
Classification
Liquid &
Used as an integral part of engineering classification systems
Soil
Plastic Limit,
Plasticity
to characterize the fine-grained fraction of soils, and to
specify the fine-grained fraction of construction materials.
Classification
Permeability
Used to determine the capacity of soil or rock to conduct a
Groundwater
liquid or gas.
Flow Analysis
pH
Used to determine the degree of acidity or alkalinity of a soil.
Corrosion
Potential
Resistivity
Used to indicate the relative ability of a soil medium to carry
Corrosion
electrical currents.
Potential
R-Value
Used to evaluate the potential strength of subgrade soil,
Pavement
subbase, and base course material, including recycled
Thickness
materials for use in road and airfield pavements.
Design
Soluble
Used to determine the quantitative amount of soluble
Corrosion
Sulphate
sulfates within a soil mass.
Potential
Unconfined
Compression
To obtain the approximate compressive strength of soils that
Bearing Capacity
possess sufficient cohesion to permit testing in the
Analysis
unconfined state.
for
Foundations
Water
Content
Used to determine the quantitative amount of water in a soil
Index Property
mass.
Soil Behavior
llrerracon
REPORT TERMINOLOGY
(Based on ASTM D653)
Allowable Soil
Bearing Capacity
The recommended maximum contact stress developed at the interface of the
foundation element and the supporting material.
Alluvium
Soil, the constituents of which have been transported in suspension by flowing
water and subsequently deposited by sedimentation.
Aggregate Base
Course
A layer of specified material placed on a subgrade or subbase usually beneath
slabs or pavements.
Backfiil
A specified material placed and compacted in a confined area.
Bedrock
A natural aggregate of mineral grains connected by strong and permanent
cohesive forces. Usually requires drilling, wedging, blasting or other methocs of
extraordinary force for excavation.
Bench
A horizontal surface in a sloped deposit.
Caisson (Drilled pier
or Shaft)
A concrete foundation element cast in a circular excavation which may have an
enlarged base. Sometimes referred to as a cast -in -place or drilled
Coefficient of
Friction
pier shaft.
A constant proportionality factor relating normal stress and the corresponding
shear stress at which sliding starts between the two
surfaces.
Cllluvium
Soil, the constituents of which have been deposited chiefly by gravity such as
at the foot of a slope or cliff.
Compaction
The densification of a soil by means of mechanical manipulation.
Concrete Slab -on-
Grade
A concrete surface layer cast directly upon a base, subbase or subgrade, and
typically used as a floor system.
Differential
Movement
Unequal settlement or heave between, or within foundation elements of a
structure.
Earth Pressure
The pressure or force exerted by soil on any boundary such as a foundation
wall.
ESAL
Equivalent Single Axle Load, a criteria used to convert traffic to a uniform
standard, (18,000 pound axle loads).
Engineered Rll
Specified material placed and compacted to specified density and/or moisture
conditions under observations of a representative of a geotechnical engineer.
Equivalent Ruld
A hypothetical fluid having a unit weight such that it will produce a pressure
against a lateral support presumed to be equivalent to that produced by the
actual soil. This simplified approach is valid only when deformation conditions
are such that the pressure increases linearly with depth and the wall friction is
neglected.
Existing Rll (or
man-made Rig
Materials deposited through the action of man prior to exploration of the site.
Existing Grade
The ground surface at the time of field exploration.
lrerracon
i
9
REPORT TERMINOLOGY
(Based on ASTM D653)
Expansive Potential The potential of a=soil to expand (increase in volume) due to absorption of
moisture.
Finished Grade The final grade created as a part of the project.
Footing A portion of the foundation of a structure that transmits loads directly to the
soil.
Foundation
The lower part of a structure that transmits the loads to the soil or bedrock.
Frost Depth
The depth of which the ground becomes frozen during the winter season.
Grade Beam
A foundation element or wall, typically constructed of reinforced concrete,
used to span between other foundation elements such as drilled piers.
Groundwater
Subsurface water found in the zone of saturation of soils, or within fractures in
bedrock.
Heave
Upward movement.
Lithologic
The characteristics which describe the composition and texture of soil and
rock by observation.
Native Grade
The naturally occuring ground surface.
Native Sol/
Naturally occurring on -site soil, sometimes referred to as natural soil.
Optimum Moisture
content
The water content at which a soil can be compacted to a maximum dry unit
weight by a given compactive effort.
Perched Water
Groundwater, usually of limited area maintained above a normal water
elevation by the presence of an intervening relatively impervious continuing
stratum.
Scarify
To mechanically loosen soil or break down existing soil structure.
Settlement
Downward movement.
Skin Friction (Side
Shear)
The frictional resistance developed between soil and an element of structure
such as a drilled pier or shaft.
Sol/ (earth)
Sediments or other unconsolidated accumulations of solid particles produced
by the physical and chemical disintegration of rocks, and which may or may
not contain organic matter.
Strain
The change in length per unit of length in a given direction.
Stress
The force per unit area acting within a soil mass.
Strip
To remove from present location.
Subbase
A layer of specified material in a pavement system between the subgrade and
base course.
Subgrade The soil prepared and compacted to support a structure, slab or pavement
system.
lrerracon _
UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
a
I
Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests°
Group Symbol Group Names
Coarse -Grained Gravels more then Clean Gravels Less
Soils more than 50% of coarse than 6% finesc Cu > 4 and 1 < Cc <3e GW Well -graded gravely
60% retained on fraction retained on
No. 200 sieve No. 4 sieve Cu < 4 and/or 1 > Cc > 3' GP Poorly graded grave
Gravels with Fines F! I 'f
more then 12% finesc Ines c assl y as ML or MH GM Silty gravel,G,H
(--
Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravelFA"
Sands 50% or more
of coarse fraction
Clean Sands Less Cu > 6 and 1 < Cc < 3r SW Well -graded d'
than 5% fines' send'
Passes No. 4 sieve
Cu < 6 end/or 1 > Cc > 3E SP Poorly graded send'
I
Sands with Fines Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand""more
than 12% fines°
Fines Classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand0A1
Fine-Greined Soils Silts and Clays
50% or more Liquid limit less
inorganic PI > 7 and plots on or above "A line' CL Lean clay"'`""
-
Passes the than 50
No. 200 sieve
PI < 4 or plots below "A" line' ML Silt"'`''"
I
organic Liquid limit - oven dried Organic clay"+'se"'
< 0.75 OL
Liquid limb -not dried Organic siksa,u.o
i ..
Silts and Clays
Liquid limit 50
inorganic PI plots on or above "A" line CH Fat clayc
or more
PI lots below "A" line MH Elastic Silt"'`"'
organic Liquid limit - oven dried Organic clay°•"'�
< 0.75 OH
f
- —_
Liquid limit - not dried Organic slltw"4
Highly organic soils Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor PT Pest
ABased on the material passing the 3-in.
1f l sieve
z "If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add
(D'D) "with
field
'if field sample contained cobbles or
,acu-D,°/D10 cc " sand" or "with gravel", whichever is
D10 x D,°
boulders, or both, add 'with cobbles. or
predominant.
''If
r
boulders, or both" to group: name.
soil contains > 30% plus No. 200
c Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual
predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group
Flf soil contains > 15 %sand, add "with
f
symbols:
GW-GM well -graded gravel with silt
name.
sand" to group name. "4f soil contains > 30% plus No. 200,
elf fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol "gravelly"
l
GWGC well -graded gravel with clay
predominantly gravel, add to group
GC -GM, or SC-SM.
GP -GM poorly graded gravel with sift
GP -GC poorly graded gravel with clay
name.
"If fines are organic, add "with organic fines" "PI > 4 and plots on or above "A" line.
to oPl
°Sande with 6 to 12% fines require dual
group name. < 4 or plots below 'A" line.
'If soil contains 15% gravel, add "with "PI plots on or above "A" line,
t
symbols:
SW-SM well -graded sand with silt
gravel" to group name. OR plots below "A" line.
'If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is
SW -SC well -graded sand with clay
a CL-ML, silty clay.
f -
SP-SM poorly graded sand with sift
SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay
`
x
.D
Li
O
2
SD
5
c
D
D
f
i
+
i
o +0 +E 00 so w 50 CD m ec +DD n<
LIQUID LIMIT (LL)
I
far lat.lrbe,bn el IM.-anlnw aa+"
itm-
na mme rw.nen , aw
u.n n
Eevmbn v' - ly.
v.rlic"1 elt LL le t" PI ),
Inv. A. O.Y Ifu - el
I
QQ
G� I
I
MH O'R
OH
'CL-M'L
ML 01R OL
I
Irerracon I ;
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES .
PART GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Coordinate and submit shop drawings, product data and samples required by the
Contract Documents.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract: Definitions and additional responsibilities of parties.
2. Section 01040, Coordination.
3. Section 01200, Project Meetings.
4. Section 01310, Construction Schedules.
5. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
6. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner, with sufficient detail and
completeness to clearly illustrate all conditions of the specific installation.
1. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room
numbers shown on Contract Drawings.
2. Shop drawings shall be returned unreviewed if, in the opinion of the Architect
or consultants, the drawings lack sufficient completeness or clarity to allow their
review.
B. Sheet size for all shop drawings shall be 8-1/2"x11 ", 11 "x17" or 24"x3611
.
C. Quantity and Format: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide the following:
1. Shop Drawings: One (1) reproducible and three (3) prints or copies.
D. Cover Sheet: Each copy shall contain the Shop Drawing Identification Form, located at
the end of this Section.
1.03 PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation:
1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models.
2. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
3. Show dimensions and clearances required.
4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.
B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams:
1 . Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to
the work.
2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable
to the work.
C. Quantity and Format: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide the following:
1. Product Data: Minimum five (5) complete sets.
1.04 SAMPLES
A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate:
01340-1
1. Functional characteristics of the product with integral related parts and
attachment devices.
2. Full range of color, textures and pattern.
B. Contractor shall coordinate and submit all samples requiring finish, texture or color
selection by the Architect so that these materials may be reviewed by the Architect as
a complete package. The Architect reserves the right to withhold finish and color
selections until all such samples have been submitted.
1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a log of shop drawing, product
data and sample submittals, indicating schedules for submission and review of
individual products or equipment.
B. Contractor shall coordinate and make submittals promptly, in accordance with the
approved submittal schedule. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall be responsible for
delays in the work caused by the Contractor's failure to make submittals in a timely
manner, the completeness and/or accuracy of such submittals, or failure to allow
adequate time for review of submittals by the Architect or his professional consultants.
C. Contractor shall review shop drawings product data and samples prior to submission
to Architect. Contractor shall determine and verify:
1. Quantities.
2. Field measurements.
3. Field construction criteria.
4. Catalog numbers and similar data.
5. Conformance with Specifications.
6. Completeness of submittal and compliance with the requirements of this
Section. ,
D. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall coordinate submittals between related items of work prior
to purchasing or fabricating.
E. Review of shop drawings and submittals by the Architect/Engineer is only for general
conformance with design intent of the project and general compliance with the {
information given in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for j.
meeting all requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications whether noted in the
Architect/Engineer review or not.
F. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the
submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must submit
in writing any requests for modifications to the Drawings and Specifications. Shop
drawings submitted to the Architect/Engineer for this review do not constitute "in
writing" unless it is noted that specific changes are being requested. Changes by
means of shop drawings become the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
G. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals with
Architect/Engineer approval.
1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Make submittals promptly, in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence
as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other Contractor.
B. Number of submittals required:
1. Shop Drawings: As specified in paragraph 1.02.C.
2. Product Data: As specified in paragraph 1.03.C.
3. Samples: Submit one sample or set of samples of each item requested.
01340-2
4.
The Architect reserves the right to withhold review and approval of submittals
until all required copies have been furnished.
C. Submittals shall contain the following information, to be completed on the attached
Shop Drawing Identification Form:
1 .
Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Contract identification.
4.
Names of:
a. Contractor.
b. Supplier.
C. Manufacturer.
5.
Field dimensions clearly identified as such.
6.
Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials.
7.
Applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.
8.
Identification of any deviations from Contract Documents.
9.
Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal,
verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria and
coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the
work and of Contract Documents.
1.07 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Upon receipt, Architect shall distribute submittals to his professional consultants as
applicable.
B. Architect and consultants shall review submittals in a timely manner, in accordance
with the requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions.
C. Architect shall return submittals to the Contractor, with stamp indicating approval,
rejection, required revisions, or description of requirements for resubmittal, if applicable.
D. Architect shall retain copy or copies of submittals for the Owner.
1.08 REQUIRED SHOP DRAWING, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLE SUBMISSIONS
A. Provide complete information for products specified in but not limited to:
1. Division 2, Sitework: Site utility materials and accessories.
2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing.
3. Section 03250, Concrete Accessories.
4. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
5. Section 04100, Mortar and Masonry Grout.
6. Section 04210, Brick Masonry.
7. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals.
8. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry.
9. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood.
10. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry.
11. Section 07150, Damproofing.
12. Section 07200, Building Insulation.
13. Section 07312, Fiberglass Shingles.
14. Section 07466, Wood Siding.
15. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashings and Trim.
16. Section 07900, Sealants & Joint Fillers.
17. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
18. Section 08331, Steel Sectional Overhead Doors.
19. Section 08630, Solid Vinyl Windows.
01340-3
20. Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
21. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
22. Section 09900, Painting.
23. Section 09930, Transparent Finishes.
24. Section 10520, Fire Protection Specialties.
25. Division 15, Mechanical.
26. Division 16, Electrical.
1.09 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required bN the
Architect/Engineer and resubmit until approved. Resubmittals may be required for the
following reasons:
1. Incomplete or unclear submittals, or submittals which have not first been
reviewed and approved by the Contractor.
2. Lack of required number of copies of product data or shop drawings.
3. Extent of the revisions necessary in the submittal to meet the design intent and
to be properly reviewed.
4. Materials and/or fabrication details that do not meet the design or technical
requirements of the specifications.
5. All color and/or finish selections have not been submitted as a complete
package.
B. Shop Drawing and Product Data: Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as speci-
fied for the initial submittal. Identify any revisions made.
C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.
1.10 DISTRIBUTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall distribute reproductions of shop drawings and copies of product data
which carry the Architect/Engineer stamp of review to:
1 . Job site file.
2. Record Documents file.
3. Subcontractors.
4. Supplier or fabricator.
B. Architect shall distribute returned copies of shop drawings and product data to:
1 . Owner's representative.
2. Consultants, as applicable.
01340-4
DATE:
PROJECT:
ARCHITECT:
CONTRACTOR:
SHOP DRAWING IDENTIFICATION FORM
ALLER•LINGLE ARCHITECTS, P.C.
748 WHALERS WAY, BLDG. E-200
FORT COLLINS, CO 80525
(970) 223-1820
NAME:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
SUBCONTRACTOR: NAME:
CONTACT PERSON:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
PRODUCT(S):
i
SPEC. SECTION(S):
'STAMP"
END OF SECTION
01340-5
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Submit to the Owner and Architect a Schedule of Values allocated to the various
portions of the work. Upon request of the Architect, support the values with data
which will substantiate their correctness.
B. Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications
for Payment.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1 . Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01026, Application for Payment.
1.02 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Schedule of Values shall be submitted to the Architect within fifteen (15) days of
Award of Contract.
B.
Format: Contractor's standard forms or computer printouts. Identify schedule with:
1 . Title of project and location.
2. Architect and project number.
3. Name and address of Contractor.
4. Contract designation.
5. Date of submission.
C.
Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in
sufficient
detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during
construction.
1. List separately the costs associated with the materials and labor for each
} =
component part of the work.
D.
Basis: At a minimum, the Table of Contents of this Project Manual shall be used as
the format for listing component items. Contractor may include additional listings at
their option.
1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major
section of the Specifications.
2. Mechanical and Electrical: Provide separate line items for rough -in and finish
work for a plumbing, mechanical and electrical work.
E.
For each major line item, list subvalues of major products or operations under the
item.
F.
Contractor's overhead and profit shall be listed as a separate line item.
G.
The sum of all values listed in the
schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum.
END OF SECTION
01370-1
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. General quality control of the materials, equipment and labor for the project.
B. Manufacturer's field services, support, and testing requirements.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01600, Materials and Equipment: Quality of materials and equipment
to be installed in the work.
2. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required,
these shall be the products of a single manufacturer. However, the component parts
of the system need not be the products of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise
specified.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Design equipment for operations at an elevation of 4,900 feet above mean sea
level, unless otherwise indicated in Division 15 and/or 16.
2. Coordinate details of the equipment with other related parts of the work,
including verification that all structures, piping, wiring and equipment
components are compatible.
3. Design equipment to operate under all conditions of load without objectionable
sound or vibration. Sounds or vibrations noticeable outside of room in which
equipment is installed, or annoying sounds or vibrations noticeable inside room,
will be considered objectionable. Correct conditions considered objectionable
- to Architect/Engineer by means of approved vibration eliminators or by replacing
equipment at Owner's option.
Nameplates: Provide a permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power -
operated equipment indicating the manufacturer, product name, model number, serial
number, speed, capacity, power characteristics, labels of tested compliances and
similar essential operating data. Locate nameplates in easily read locations.
1.03 QUALITY CONTROL AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
conditions and workmanship to produce work of specified quality.
t B. Comply with industry standards, except when more restrictive tolerances or specified
jrequirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
C. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
i'
D. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed for the appropriate
i_
loads and sized to withstand stresses, vibration and racking.
1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When required by individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's printed
01400-1
instructions in the quantity specified for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-
up, adjusting and finishing.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions in full detail. Include each step in sequence.
Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. When required by individual Specification section, submit manufacturer's written
maintenance instructions for the Owner's use after occupancy.
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When required by individual Specifications section, submit manufacturer's certificate,
in duplicate, that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in respective Specifications section, require supplier and manufacturer
to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, installation and workmanship,
start-up, testing and balancing of equipment as applicable and to make appropriate
recommendations.
B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
01400-2
SECTION 01410
TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Materials testing by an independent, approved testing laboratory including, but not
limited to:
1 . Concrete testing.
2. Compaction testing.
3. Asphalt paving testing.
4. Piping and pressurized systems testing.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
2. Section 02513, Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
3. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
4. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
5. Division 15, Mechanical.
6. Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Geotechnical Investigation Report by
Terracon dated March 13, 2001, is not intended as representation or warranty of
accuracy or continuity between said borings. Data is available for inspection at the
office of the Architect or upon request of the General Contractor. The Owner will not
be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom.
1.03 ACCESS TO SITE AND NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing laboratory will be allowed access to the site as required in the performance of
their work. Contractor shall provide testing laboratory at least 48 hours notice prior to
time testing is required prior to the next phase of work.
B. Asphalt Paving: Testing laboratory will be allowed access to the mixing plant for
verification of weights or proportions, character of materials used and determination of
temperatures used in the preparation of asphalt concrete mix.
1.04 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Open -Hole Inspection: Soils Engineer shall perform an open -hole inspection for each
building site within the project to verify the findings of the above -referenced
Geotechnical Investigation Report, prior to placement of any foundation structures or
footings.
1 . Notify the Architect at the completion of excavation, prior to placement of any
formwork. Contractor shall be responsible for notification of the Soils Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with formwork or foundation construction until results have been
verified.
B. Concrete:
1. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent
testing agent recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner.
01410-1
2. Submit proposed concrete mix design to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of work.
3. Test cylinders shall be taken and materials tested in accordance with require-
ments of Section 03300.
4. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Compaction at Foundations, Building Slabs and Utility Trenches:
1. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing
agent recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner.
2. Notify the Architect at completion of each phase of excavation prior to
placement of backfill of all foundations and utility trenches.
3. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing
laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of
work until results have been verified.
3. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements,
remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Asphaltic Concrete Paving:
1 . Inspection and testing of asphalt pavement mix and testing of placed stabilizing
base course and asphalt pavement shall be performed by an independent testing
laboratory recommended by the contractor and approved by the Owner.
2. When and if required, the testing laboratory will perform laboratory tests on
proposed asphalt pavement mix to determine conformity with requirements.
3. The testing laboratory will perform one (1 ) series of compaction tests for
stabilizing base course and for asphalt pavement.
4. When stabilizing base course or portion thereof has been placed and compacted
in accordance with requirements, notify the testing laboratory to perform
density tests. Do not place asphalt pavement until results have been verified
and base course installation approved.
5. Test results shall include:
a. Type of sub -base.
b. Depth and density of base.
C. Depth and Density of paving. f `
d. Compliance with Specifications in materials used.
6. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
E. Contractor shall conduct the following tests as specified in Division 2, Sitework and/or
required by local jurisdiction with authority over the installation and testing of utility
systems.
1. Pressure and leakage tests.
1.05 TESTING FEES
A. Fees for required materials testing will be paid for by the Owner as provided in the
General and Supplementary Conditions.
B. Fees for additional testing required due to improper performance of the work will be
paid by the Contractor. }
1.06 TESTING RESULTS
A. Testing laboratory shall furnish copies of the required test results to the following:
1 . Owner's representative.
2. Architect.
01410-2
r
t
t
0
3. Structural Engineer for open -hole inspection, concrete and steel testing.
4. Contractor.
END OF SECTION
01410-3
SECTION 01510
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utility services required for construction.
Remove upon completion of work.
B. Furnish, install and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for use by construction
personnel. Remove upon completion of work.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
2. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
3. Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
4. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
5. Section 01710, Cleaning: Trash removal during construction.
1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with the current editions of all applicable building codes. Refer to Section
01060.
B. Comply with applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations.
C. Comply with applicable utility company requirements.
1.03 UTILITY FEES
A. Utility charges and expenses for temporary construction usage for the following shall
be paid by the Owner, unless indicated otherwise:
3 1. Temporary electricity.
2. Temporary construction water.
B. Utility charges and expenses for temporary construction usage for the following shall
r be paid by the Contractor, unless indicated otherwise:
1. Temporary sanitary facilities.
2. Temporary local and long-distance telephone, including cellular.
3. Temporary heat and ventilation until start-up or use of the building's permanent
mechanical systems, including the cost of fuel used during construction.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials for temporary construction uses may be new or used but must be
adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions and
must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Contractor may utilize existing 120/240V power service in the existing facility.
01510-1
B. Install circuit and branch wiring with area distribution boxes located so that power and
lighting is available throughout the construction area by the use of construction -type
power cords.
C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not
adequate for work and for areas accessible to the public.
2.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, all temporary heating,
including all fuel and required attendance necessary to protect and dry all work during
cold weather.
B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials,
to disperse humidity and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or
gases.
1. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls. Do
not store materials near sources of intense heat or open flame.
C. Permanent building heating system may be used upon installation, testing and
acceptance by the jurisdiction having authority over this area of the work, as allowed in
Division 15, Mechanical.
1. The project shall be substantially enclosed and secured with the building's
permanent glazing systems and either construction or permanent hardware.
2.04 TEMPORARY COOLING
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, all temporary cooling.
2.05 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Contractor shall maintain a job telephone. Contractor shall pay all costs for installation,
maintenance, removal and service charges for local calls. Toll charges shall be paid by
the party who places the call.
B. Telephones within the existing facility shall not be used by construction personnel
during the construction period.
2.06 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Contractor may utilize existing water service in the existing facility.
2.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities for use by construction personnel in
compliance with current laws. and regulations.
1. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in accordance with local
governing health agencies.
B. Toilet facilities within the existing facility shall not be used by construction personnel
during the construction period.
0241.02 01510-2
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A. General: Install and maintain temporary utility services in accordance with requirements
of applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations, and applicable utility
company requirements.
B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15, Mechanical, and Division
16, Electrical.
C. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service.
D. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires.
3.02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when use is no longer required,
or upon completion of the work.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary construction services to original or
specified condition.
1. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps in all
lighting fixtures used during the construction period.
2. Prior to final inspection, clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters in
all mechanical equipment used during the construction period. Clean blowers
and coils if units were operated during the construction period without filters.
END OF SECTION
01510-3
SECTION 01520
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND AIDS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish and maintain required construction equipment.
B. Furnish, install and maintain required construction aids and remove upon completion of
work.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
3. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
4. Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
5. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Equipment and construction aids for temporary construction uses may be new,
used or rental equipment, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate
requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. Provide construction equipment required by specific sections of the Specifications or
as necessary to facilitate execution of the work, including but not limited to:
1. Miscellaneous hand tools.
2. Miscellaneous power tools.
3. Goggles, masks, hardhats and other personal safety equipment.
4. Cranes, forklifts and other material handling equipment.
5. Rolling or vibrating plate compactors.
6. Concrete batching and pumping trucks and equipment.
7. End loaders, scrapers, backhoes and other heavy equipment.
8. Air compressors.
9. Portable electrical generators.
10. Mortar batching equipment.
11. Paint spraying equipment.
12. Other equipment as required.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids and temporary equipment required by personnel to facilitate
execution of the work. Refer to respective Sections of the Specifications for the
particular requirements of each trade, including but not limited to:
1 . Scaffolding, staging, ladders and platforms.
2. Stairs, ramps, runways and guardrails.
01520-1
3. Warning signs and traffic barricades.
4. Pedestrian sidewalk enclosures.
5. Hoists, platform lifts and chutes.
6. Concrete curing and thermal protection blankets.
7. Drop clothes and other protective materials.
8. Other facilities as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Consult with Architect, review site conditions and other factors which affect
construction procedures and construction aids, including adjacent properties and public
facilities which may be affected by execution of the work.
B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Divisions 2 through 16.
C. Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, by storage or work
requirements and to accommodate legitimate requirements of other subcontractors
employed at the site.
3.02 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment and services:
1 . When construction needs can be met by use of the permanent construction; or
2. At completion of the project.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities.
1 . Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids.
2. Grade areas of site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and
slopes and clean the area.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified condition.
END OF SECTION
01520-2
SECTION 01530
BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary construction barriers and enclosures.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01030, Alternates.
2. Section 01046, Access to Site.
3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities.
5. Section 01520, Construction Equipment and Aids.
6. Section 01560, Temporary Controls: Dust partitions.
7. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds.
8. Section 02100, Site Preparation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Prior to commencing site work, erect and maintain protective fencing around existing
trees and vegetation to remain as identified on the Drawings or as indicated by the
Architect.
1 . Approved Materials: Expanded plastic or chain link fencing.
B. Individual trees shall have protective fencing erected beyond drip line to the satisfaction
of the Architect and Owner.
C. Groups of trees and other vegetation shall have protective fencing erected around the
E entire group to the satisfaction of the Architect.
D. Areas within protective fencing shall remain undisturbed and shall not be used for any
purpose.
E. Any trees damaged or scarred during construction shall be repaired immediately by an
approved tree surgeon. Where separations expose or damage the root system of trees
designated to remain, remedial measures shall be taken immediately at the direction of
the Owner to ensure the health of the trees. Trees designated to remain but damaged
beyond repair or which subsequently die shall be replaced with a similar size and
species chosen by the Owner at the sole expense of the Contractor.
2.02 SAFETY BARRICADE FENCING
A. Prior to commencing such work, Contractor shall erect and maintain protective safety
barricade fencing around the areas of work, as required by the approved plan.
1 . Approved Materials: Expanded plastic fencing.
2. Color: Orange, or as approved by the governing agency with jurisdiction over
this work. Refer to Section 01060.
B. Provide adequate room within fenced enclosures for workers and construction activities.
C. Maintain all required clearances for vehicular and/or pedestrian circulation within public
right-of-ways that will be allowed during the construction period. Refer to Section
01046.
01530-1
D. Consult with the City of Fort Collins for any additional barricading or public safety
requirements.
E. Promptly remove temporary safety fencing upon completion of work and restore site
area to original condition. Contractor shall repair or replace any existing materials or
finishes damaged as a part of this work at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
01530-2
SECTION 01560
TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities required for dust, erosion and pollution
control.
B. Implement and maintain temporary controls required for noise and construction work
hours limitations.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01010, Summary of Work: Special site restrictions.
2. Section 01040, Coordination.
3. Section 01046, Access to Site.
4. Section 01 510, Temporary Utilities.
5. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials for temporary controls may be new or used, but must be adequate
in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions and must not
violate requirements of applicable codes and standards.
2.02 DUST CONTROL
A. Furnish and maintain such facilities or procedures as may be necessary to prevent air-
borne dust generated by the construction activities of this project from affecting either
the Owner's use of this site or neighboring properties. Implementation of such require-
ments will be at the sole discretion of the Owner or the City of Fort Collins.
2.03 EROSION CONTROL
A. Furnish and maintain such facilities as might be necessary to prevent erosion damage
to the Owner's property or to adjacent properties.
1 . Comply with any restrictions placed upon the approval of this project by the City
of Fort Collins.
2. Refer to Section 01010 for other special site restrictions.
I
( 2.04 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent spilling or littering of water -
polluting substances. Do not allow any foreign materials to be dumped into any portion
of the sewer or storm drainage collection system or into any water runoff collection
basin. The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, equipment and materials
necessary to remedy any such pollution as deemed appropriate by governing agencies
with such jurisdiction.
01560-1
B. No burning of debris or any other air -polluting methods or equipment will be allowed.
All motorized equipment shall be adjusted to minimize exhaust pollution.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Construction Work Hours: Construction activity will be limited to 7:00 a.m. to 5:00
P.M. Monday through Friday during the construction period, except as limited in
paragraphs 3.01.B. and 3.02. Sunday or holiday construction will not be allowed.
B. Specific activities that may limit the Contractor's working hours, if applicable,
shall be determined at the Pre -Construction Conference.
3.02 NOISE CONTROL
A. Construction activities that generate noise in excess of 85 db shall be limited to hours
as established at the Pre -Construction Conference.
1. Prohibited after 5:00 p.m. every weekday.
2. Prohibited on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 01560-2
SECTION 01590
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary secured storage facilities.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STORAGE SHEDS
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain secured, weathertight storage sheds or
enclosures for tools, materials and equipment requiring such conditions, with
adequate heat and ventilation. Provide space for organized storage, and access and
artificial lighting for inspection of stored materials.
1 . Structures shall be provided and maintained in good condition, as determined
by the Owner's representative.
2. Signage and other advertising allowed on the structures shall be as
determined at the Pre -Construction Conference.
B. Temporary Site Fencing: Refer to Section 01530.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Completely remove temporary facilities when use is no longer required, or upon
completion of the work.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary construction services to original or
specified condition.
END OF SECTION
01590-1
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work:
1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved
in writing by the Architect/Engineer.
3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering
and shop practices.
b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages to
be interchangeable.
C. Two (2) or more items of the same kind shall be identical by the same
manufacturer.
d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be
adhered to, unless variations are specifically approved in writing.
4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it
is designed or specified.
B. Provide specified maintenance materials, equipment and tools to the Owner at the
completion of the project.
C. Provide equipment or systems start-up, commissioning and operational testing, as
specified in individual Sections.
D. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract.
2. Section 01010, Summary of the Work.
3. Section 01040, Coordination.
4. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
5. Section 01400, Quality Control.
6. Section 01710, Cleaning.
7. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data.
8. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
manufacturer's printed instructions, contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such
instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two (2) copies to the
Architect.
1. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at the job site during installation
and until completion.
B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with
such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's
instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions. Do not proceed
with work without clear instructions.
01600-1
C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any
preparatory step or installation procedure, unless specifically modified or exempted by
Contract Documents.
1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate
to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site.
1. Deliver products in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original containers
or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible.
2. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure that materials and
equipment are in compliance with approved submittals, required quantities have
been provided and that products are properly protected and undamaged.
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or
damage to products or packaging.
1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Preparation for Shipment:
1. Prepare in a manner to facilitate unloading and handling.
2. Provide skids, boxes, crates or other effective shipping devices to protect
equipment against damage from rough handling, moisture, dust, excessive heat
or cold.
3. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration and other
damage.
4. Apply grease packing or lubricating oil to all bearing and similar items.
5. Tag or mark each item as identified in the delivery schedule or on the shop
drawings. Package or bundle items consisting of multiple similar pieces. Tag
or mark the package or bundle.
6. Include complete packing lists or bills of material with each shipment.
7. Do not ship equipment requiring cranes or special equipment for unloading or
handling without notice or until Contractor is prepared to receive and care for i it properly.
8. Protect electrical equipment, controls and insulation from moisture or water
damage.
B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
intact and legible.
1 , Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures.
2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Exterior Storage:
1. Store fabricated products above the ground on blocking or skids. Prevent soiling
or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious
sheet coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.
2. Store wood and wood products above the ground on blocking or skids, and l
cover to protect from weather exposure.
D. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic
inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified
conditions and free from damage or deterioration.
E. Protection after Installation:
a. Protect materials, fixtures and equipment with original protective
01600-2
wrappings until substantial completion of the project, as specified in
individual Sections.
2. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from
damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no
longer needed.
1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products List:
1 • Within thirty (30) days after Award of Contract, submit to Architect a complete
list of major products proposed to be used with the name of the manufacturer
and the installing Subcontractor.
B. Contractor's Options:
1 . For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting
that standard.
2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any
one of the products or manufacturers named which complies with the
specifications.
3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and
"or equal", Contractor shall submit a request for substitutions of any product or
manufacturer not specifically named. When the phrase "equal approved prior
to bidding" is used, consideration of equals will not be made after Bid Opening.
4. Naming approved manufacturers does not relieve the Contractor from meeting
all specification requirements.
5. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is
no option.
6. Manufacturer's material or equipment listed in Schedules, Specifications or on
the Drawings are types to be provided for establishment of size, capacity, grade
and quality. If other acceptable manufacturers are used, cost of any change in
construction required by their use shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. Substitutions:
1. For the period up to seven (7) working days before the Bid Date, Architect will
i . consider written requests from Contractors for substitution of products.
2. Submit a separate request for each product supported with complete data with
drawings and samples as appropriate, including:
a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that
specified.
b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the
substitution.
C. Effect on the construction schedule.
d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified.
e. Any required license fees or royalties.
f. Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials.
i 3. Architect and Owner's representative shall judge the acceptability of the
1 proposed substitution and respond to the Contractor in writing by addenda,
provided the request for substitution has been made in accordance with the
f requirements listed above. Requests made after this timeline will not be
responded to by addenda; any use of these products will be at the sole risk of
the Contractor.
4. Requests for substitutions received later than the deadline stipulated above will
not be considered.
D. Contractor's Representation: A request for a substitution constitutes a representation
i
01600-3
that Contractor:
1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or
superior in all respects to that specified.
2. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product
specified.
3. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work and
make such other changes as may be required to make the work complete in all
respects.
4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may
subsequently become apparent.
E. Contractor shall use any approved equal material or equipment at no additional cost to
the Owner if the material or equipment used in his Bid is unavailable or causes undue
delay in fabrication or delivery.
F. Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness and notify
Contractor in writing of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution.
1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish to the Owner at the completion of the work all maintenance materials,
equipment and tools specified in respective Sections of these Specifications, including
but not limited to:
1 • Wood siding and trims specified in Section 07466.
2. Paints and stains specified in Sections 09900 and 09930.
B. Materials specified for the Owner's maintenance stock shall not be used by the
Contractor for replacement of defective or damaged materials during the course of
construction or to remedy any defect in workmanship caused by the Contractor's own
forces or his subcontractors. Maintenance materials may be used, with the written
permission of the Owner, to replace materials damaged during construction as a result
of vandalism or natural causes.
C. Contractor shall certify in writing that all specified maintenance materials have been
furnished and turned over to the Owner's representative or delivered to the location on
the site directed by the Owner.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: Use materials of commercial quality suitable for the anticipated service
conditions.
B. All materials and equipment to be installed in the permanent construction shall be new,
unless otherwise permitted.
C. Unless required otherwise, use components of standard sizes to assure future
availability and permit field installation of repair parts. Make like parts of duplicate units
interchangeable.
i-
2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. Workmanship and Materials: Design, fabricate and assemble equipment in accordance
with the best engineering and shop practice.
B. Lubrication:
1. Include lubrication systems which do not waste lubricants, require attention
01600-4
during start-up or shutdown or more frequently than weekly during normal
operation.
2. Furnish sufficient lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment
manufacturer to fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during start-up,
testing and operation prior to the Owner's acceptance of the equipment.
C. Drive Units: Refer to Division 15, Mechanical, and/or Division 16, Electrical.
D. Anchor Bolts:
1 . Furnish with each piece of equipment required to be anchored.
2. Minimum Diameter: 3/4", or as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Minimum Length: Provide for required embedment in structural concrete and
extend through concrete base, 1-1/2" of grout, baseplate and nuts. Concrete
base will be 4" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Include two (2) nuts with each bolt.
5. Deliver anchor bolts with templates or setting drawings in time for installation
when structural concrete is placed.
E. Special Tools and Accessories:
1 . Furnish all special tools, instruments and accessories required for proper mainte-
nance.
2. Furnish such special devices as are required for proper lifting and handling.
F. Shop Painting:
1 . Protect iron and steel surfaces with paint or other protective coating applied in
the shop.
2. Use coating good for anticipated useful life of equipment on surfaces inaccessi-
ble after assembly.
3. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, clean and filled to obtain uniform base for paint.
4. Apply one (1) or more shop coats of a primer capable of protecting surfaces to
receive finish paint coats after installation.
a. Shop Primer for Ferrous Surfaces: Cook 391-N-142 barrier coat, Mobile
13-R-50 Chromox Q.D. primer, Tnemec 77 Chem -Prime or equal.
5. Apply finish coats in the shop with a high-grade oil -resistant enamel on electric
motors, speed reducers, starters and other self-contained or enclosed
components.
6. Do not paint machined, polished or non-ferrous surfaces. Coat such surfaces
with rust -preventive compound, Houghton Rust Veto 334, Rust-Oleum R-9 or
equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment with or under the guidance of qualified personnel having the
knowledge and experience necessary for proper results.
B. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Locate
services requiring maintenance on valves and similar units in front of services requiring
less maintenance. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of
interference with other work.
C. Locate operating and control equipment, dampers, valves, traps, clean -outs, motors,
controllers, switchgears, drain points, maintenance items and devices for easy access.
Install access panels where units are concealed by finished and similar work.
D. Provide required clearances in front of, and around, equipment as necessary for access
01600-5
and ventilation. Comply with all applicable codes and regulations.
3.02 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION
A. Before starting up each system:
1 . Check each piece of equipment for proper drive rotation, belt tension and any
other condition which may cause damage to equipment or endanger personnel.
2. Clean, blow-out or flush lubricating oil, water systems and other pipelines.
3. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Test lubrication system safety interlocks and system performance.
5. Perform final alignment checks under observation of the Owner's principal
representative and, where required, manufacturer's field representative.
6. Demonstrate that no abnormal stresses are transmitted to equipment from
piping, ducts or other attachments.
7. Check anchor bolt tensions, grout and shims. Use calibrated torque wrenches
for tightening anchor bolts. Do not overstress bolts.
B. Place equipment into successful operation in accordance with the written instructions
of the manufacturer or the instruction of the manufacturer's field representative,
including required adjustment, tests and operation checks.
3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. Tests may be required, whether or not specifically called for, to determine if equipment
will perform as specified or guaranteed. Final acceptance of equipment, or Substantial
Completion of that part of the work, is contingent upon acceptable test results.
B. Do not conduct tests on equipment for which manufacturer's field service is specified,
unless manufacturer's field representative is present and declares the equipment ready
for test.
C. Conduct tests as set forth in the Specifications, unless another manner of testing is
approved.
D. Equipment or systems that fail to satisfy the performance requirements shall be
modified or replaced at Architect/Engineer's option. If modifications are allowed, make
modifications necessary to produce an installation which will satisfy the performance
requirements. Retest after modifications or equipment replacement is complete.
Modifications, additional equipment, retesting and structural, piping or electrical
modifications necessary to accommodate modified equipment or replacement
equipment shall be made at no additional cost.
END OF SECTION
e
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Comply with requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract and in Specifications
for administrative procedures in closing out the work.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals and additional
administrative requirements.
2. Section 01050, Field Engineering: Surveying certificate and final completion
survey.
3. Section 01310, Construction Schedules.
4. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials.
5. Section 01710, Cleaning.
6. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
7. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data.
B. Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds.
g. Respective Sections of Specifications: Testing requirements and close-out
submittals required of specific trades or subcontractors.
1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Definition of Substantial Completion: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions
of the Contract.
B. When Contractor considers that the work is substantially complete, he shall submit to
the Architect:
1 • Written notice that the work or designated portion thereof is substantially
complete.
2. "Punch list" of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the
Contractor prior to inspection by the Architect and/or Owner.
3. Temporary Certificate of Occupancy, or other evidence of acceptance by the
building official or other authority with jurisdiction over the project.
C. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect will make an inspection
to determine the status of completion.
D. Should Architect or Engineer determine that the work is not substantially complete:
1 . Architect or Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the
reasons therefor.
2• Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a second written
notice of substantial completion to the Architect.
3. Architect or Engineer will reinspect the work, as appropriate.
E. When Architect concurs that the work is substantially complete, he will:
r 1. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA form G704 or other
Owner -provided form, accompanied by Contractor's list of items to be
completed or corrected as verified and amended by the Architect.
2. Submit the Certificate to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance
of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.
01700-1
1.03 FINAL INSPECTION
A. When Contractor considers the work is complete, he shall submit written certification
that:
1 . Contract Documents have been reviewed, and that the work has been inspected
for compliance with Contract Documents.
2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
3. Corrective or incomplete work has been completed from "punch lists" provided
at Substantial Completion.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's
representative and are operational.
5. Final cleaning has been completed and project is ready for final inspection.
6. Final Certificate of Occupancy has been issued.
B. Architect will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable
promptness after receipt of such certification.
C. Should Architect consider that the work is incomplete or defective:
1. Architect or Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the
incomplete or defective work.
2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and
send a second written certification to Architect that the work is complete.
3. Architect or Engineer will reinspect the work, as appropriate.
D. When the Architect finds that the work is acceptable under the Contract Documents,
he shall request the Contractor to prepare and deliver close-out submittals.
E. Should Architect and/or Engineer perform reinspection due to failure of the work to
comply with the claims of status of either Substantial or Final Completion made by the
Contractor:
1 . Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment
due the Contractor.
1.04 SYSTEMS TESTING
A. Contractor shall conduct tests for operational systems and equipment as specified
herein or as required by individual Sections, prior to Final Inspection. Testing of
systems or equipment shall include but not be limited to:
1. Drainage and weathertightness of roofing systems.
2. Leak detection system of above -ground or below -ground fuel tanks, containment
tanks or other sealed storage units.
3. Natural gas or other pressurized site utilities.
4. Other systems as specified in Division 15, Mechanical, or Division 16, Electrical,
or Section 01600, Material and Equipment.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
1 . Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection, including plumbing, mechanical, electrical.
B. Final Completion Schedule: Refer to Section 01310.
C. Project Record Documents: Refer to Section 01720.
D. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel: Refer to Section
01730.
01700-2
E. Warranties and Bonds: Refer to Section 01740.
F. Keys and Keying Schedule: Refer to Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: General and Supplementary Conditions.
H. Maintenance Materials: Evidence that all required maintenance materials have been
furnished and stored as directed by the Owner.
I. Test Results: Written approval from the testing agency for systems or equipment
requiring final testing, as specified above.
J. Certifications: Written certifications of material or equipment compliance, as required
by various Sections of the Specifications.
1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Architect. Statement shall reflect all
adjustments to the Contract Sum:
1 . The original Contract Sum, including accepted Bid Alternates.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Deductions for uncorrected work.
C. Deductions for reinspection payments.
d. Other adjustments.
3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
4. Previous payments.
5. Sum remaining due, including retainage.
B. Contractor will prepare a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to the
Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders.
1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures
and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
END OF SECTION
01700-3
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Execute cleaning during progress of the work and at completion of the work.
B. Furnish, maintain and service trash removal dumpsters and/or roll -offs.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Conditions of the Contract.
2. Respective Sections of Specifications: Cleaning for specific products or work
1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with applicable codes, ordinances,
regulations and anti -pollution laws.
B. Disposal of waste materials, debris and rubbish shall be at a legal dump site or landfill.
1. Contractor shall be responsible for all dump fees and expenses associated with
hauling materials to the landfill.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property
and which will not damage surfaces.
B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturers of the
surface material to be cleaned.
C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufac-
turer.
2.02 WASTE REMOVAL CONTAINERS
A. Furnish and maintain trash and waste removal dumpsters and/or roll -off dumpsters for
the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish, in quantities sufficient for the
Work.
1. Dumpsters shall be provided with tightly fitted covers to prevent debris from
being blown out.
2. Roll -offs shall not be required to be covered, but shall be serviced frequently
enough to prevent debris from accumulating and being blown out.
B. Location of roll -offs and trash dumpsters shall be as arranged at the Pre -Construction
Conference.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING
01710-1
A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from
accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from
construction operations.
B. Maintain parking areas, access drives and city streets clean from mud and other debris.
C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at
legal dump sites or landfills away from the site.
3.02 CLEANING PRIOR TO PAINTING
A. Clean prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as -needed basis
until painting is finished.
B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning
process will not fall on wet or freshly finished surfaces.
3.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. Final cleaning shall be performed by personnel or subcontractors skilled in this work.
B. In general, the extent of final cleaning shall be to remove grease, mastic and adhesives,
dust and dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight -exposed
interior and exterior surfaces.
C. Interior cleaning shall include, but not be limited to:
1 . Wash and polish glass and glazing. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.
2. Wipe down all finish carpentry.
3. Broom clean and dry vacuum all interior sealed concrete floor slabs to be left
exposed. Apply specified finish/sealer.
D. Exterior cleaning shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Power -wash or wash and wipe down wood siding and trim.
2. Power -wash and/or scrub with wire brush all surfaces of brick masonry, as
specified in Division 4.
3. Power -wash or wash and wipe down vinyl windows and other prefinished siding
and trim materials.
4. Power -wash or wash and wipe down prefinished metal gutters, downspouts,
counterf lashings and trim.
5. Wash and wipe down doors and frames.
6. Wash and polish glass and glazing.
7. Wash and wipe down site furnishings and pipe bollards.
E. Site cleaning shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Broom clean and wash down all areas of exterior concrete flatwork and asphalt
paving.
F. Ventilating Systems:
1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated
during construction.
2. Clean blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
{
G. Prior to final completion or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an inspection
of the site, all sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas to verify
that work of the entire project is clean.
END OF SECTION
0241.02 01710-2
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Maintain at the site one (1) record copy of each of the following documents:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications or Project Manual.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Architect field orders or written instructions.
6. Approved shop drawings, product data and samples.
7. Field test records.
8. Architect's and Engineers' field reports.
B. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
2. Section 01410, Testing.
1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Prior to beginning work, separate one (1) clean, complete set of project documents from
construction sets and hold for record document purposes. The Architect and Owner
will not furnish additional sets for the Contractor's use at the end of construction,
unless compensated for by the Contractor.
B. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used
for construction. Provide files and rack for storage of documents.
C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
(` record documents for construction purposes.
{ D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Architect,
Engineers and Owner's representative.
1.03 RECORDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work
until required information is recorded.
B. Drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual construction:
1 . Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished first floor datum.
2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface locations.
3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by field order or by Change Order.
6. Details not included in original Contract Documents.
r' C. Specifications and Addenda shall be legibly marked to record:
1 . Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item
of equipment actually installed.
2. Changes made by field order or by Change Order.
01720-1
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. At contract close-out, deliver all Record Documents to the Architect for the Owner.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter containing:
1 . Date, project name and number.
2. Contractor's name and address.
3. Title and number of each Record Document.
4. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.
C. Architect shall prepare and furnish the Owner with one (1) set of reproducible Record
Documents in accordance with the Contract requirements.
END OF SECTION
01720-2
SECTION 01730
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and
operation of products furnished for this project.
1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as
referenced in other pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment
and systems.
C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
3. Section 01700, Contract Close -Out.
4. Section 01720, Project Record Documents.
5. Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds.
6. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical.
1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel.
B. Format of Submittals:
1. Size: 8-1/2"x11".
2. Paper: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten.
3. Drawings:
a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.
b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages.
4. Provide fly leaf for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment.
a. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of
equipment.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List the following:
a. Title of project.
b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
C. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
C. Binders:
1 . Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers,
ring size as required.
2• When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related, consistent
groupings.
D. Number of Manuals Required: Three (3) copies of each complete manual, including all
general information and plumbing, mechanical and electrical.
1.03 CONTENT OF MANUAL
A. Neatly typewritten Table of Contents for each volume arranged in systematic order.
01730-1
1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. List of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume.
3. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
a. Subcontractor or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor as appropriate.
C. Identify the area of responsibility of each.
d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth
in Contract Documents.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product.
2. Note each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
C. Delete references to inapplicable information.
C. Drawings:
1 . Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:
a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
b. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure
correct illustration of completed installation. Do not use Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation:
1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
2. Provide logical sequence of instruction for each procedure.
E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued indicating:
1 . Proper procedures in the event of failure.
2. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
F. Copy of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product or material.
1.04 GENERAL MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Provide complete information for products specified in, but not limited to:
1.
Section 03250, Concrete Accessories,
2.
Section 07200, Building Insulation.
3.
Section 07312, Fiberglass Shingles.
4.
Section 07466, Wood Siding.
5.
Section 07900, Sealants & Joint Fillers.
6.
Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
7.
Section 08331, Steel Sectional Overhead Doors.
8.
Section 08630, Solid Vinyl Windows.
9.
Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
10.
Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
11.
Sections 09900 and 09930, Painting and Transparent Finishes.
12.
Section 10520, Fire Protection Specialties.
13.
Divisions 15 and 16: Refer to paragraph 1.05 below.
1.05 MANUALS FOR PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate:
1 . Description of unit and component parts.
2. Operating Procedures:
01730-2
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions.
C. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3.
Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble -shooting".
C. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4.
Servicing and lubrication schedule, with list of lubricants required.
5.
Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6.
Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7.
Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams
required for maintenance.
8.
As -installed control diagrams by control manufacturer.
9.
As -installed color -coded piping diagrams.
10.
Charts of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve.
11.
List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
12.
Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications.
B. Content
for each electric and electronic system as appropriate:
1.
Description of system and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
b. Engineering data and tests.
C. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2.
Circuit directories of panelboards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
C. Communications.
3.
As -installed color -coded wiring diagrams.
4.
Operating Procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
C. Special operating instructions.
r - 5.
Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble -shooting".
C. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6.
Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7.
List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8.
Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications.
C. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent
during instruction of Owner's personnel.
' D. Provide complete information for products specified in:
1 .
Division 15, Plumbing and Mechanical Systems and Equipment.
2.
Division 16, Electrical Systems and Equipment.
1.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form no later that twenty-
01730-3
five (25) days after final inspection or acceptance, but prior to final payment.
1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and
maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products,
equipment and systems.
B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.
C. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of
operations and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
01730-4
B. Otherwise make submittals within twenty-five (25) days after date of Substantial
Completion, prior to final request for payment.
C. For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing
date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.04 REQUIRED WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Bid or Proposal Bond: Refer to Instructions to Bidders.
B. Performance Bond: Refer to Conditions of the Contract.
C. Labor and Material Payment Bond: Refer to Conditions of the Contract.
D. General Warranty of Construction: Refer to Conditions of the Contract. Unless modified
elsewhere, General Contractor shall warrant all construction materials and workmanship
for a period of one (1) calendar year from the date of Substantial Completion.
E. Provide warranties and/or bonds for products and services specified in, but not limited
to:
1. Section 06170, Prefabricated Structural Wood.
2. Section 07200, Building Insulation.
3. Section 07312, Fiberglass Shingles.
4. Section 07466, Wood Siding.
5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
6. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
7. Section 08331, Steel Sectional Overhead Doors.
8. Section 08630, Solid Vinyl Windows.
9. Section 08700, Finish Hardware.
10. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing.
11. Section 10520, Fire Protection Specialties.
12. Division 15, Mechanical.
13. Division 16, Electrical.
F. Optional Bond(s): The Contractor shall retain the right to require Performance and/or
Labor and Material Payment Bonds from any or all of his/her Subcontractors.
G. Maintenance Agreements: None required. However, all Contractors and Subcontrac-
tors shall be required to make service calls as requested by the Owner throughout the
one-year general warranty period, at no additional expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
01740-2
SECTION 02070
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish equipment and labor to demolish and remove materials, equipment, fixtures,
accessories and systems, including related utilities, to the extent shown on the
Drawings or required for new construction. Selective demolition includes but is not
limited to:
1 . Demolition of existing plumbing, mechanical, and/or electrical systems to the
extent shown on the Drawings, or as required to make connections to new
work.
2. Demolition of existing site improvements, pavements and landscaping as
required for new construction.
3. Miscellaneous demolition work related to construction of the project, as
indicated on the Drawings.
B. Extent of demolition work is indicated on the Drawings. Work may include the removal
and protection of existing materials.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
3. Section 01520, Construction Equipment and Aids.
4. Section 01560, Temporary Controls.
5. Section 01710, Cleaning: Waste Removal.
6. Division 15, Mechanical: Demolition related to mechanical and plumbing
systems.
1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
j A. Contractor shall contact local building and fire authorities to become familiar with local
laws and regulations governing work of this Section.
1.03 COORDINATION AND PROTECTION
A. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting and guardrails as required by applicable
regulatory requirements to protect occupants of the building, construction workers and
the public.
B. Protect and maintain plumbing, mechanical and electrical services encountered during
demolition that are to remain in use.
C. Coordinate and pay for disconnecting, removing and capping any utility services
encountered within areas of demolition. Notify the affected utility companies in
advance and obtain approval prior to starting this work. Flag locations of disconnected
services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents.
1.04 ACCESS TO BUILDING AND SITE
A. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site, for required access to existing buildings and
new work during construction.
B. Plan, schedule and conduct selective demolition work in a manner that will minimize the
0241.02 02070-1
disruption of the Owner's normal operations.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 DEMOLITION
A. General: Furnish labor, equipment and materials as required to complete demolition as
described in the Contract Documents.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Contractor may salvage remaining demolished material and equipment, unless
specifically noted otherwise in this Section or on the Drawings. Immediately remove
from the site. All other material shall be removed from the site and disposed of.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. General: Coordinate and execute demolition work in an orderly, neat and timely
manner. The Owner shall fully occupy the existing facility, parking areas and grounds
during construction of this project, except for specific areas designated strictly for use
by the Contractor. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site, for specific requirements.
A. B. Ensure that all utilities and services to remain in use have been adequately
marked and protected and will be maintained during construction.
END OF SECTION
02070-2
SECTION 02100
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Overlot grading in preparation of building and sitework improvements.
B. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil, unless arranged for otherwise.
C. Finish grading and placing of topsoil, unless arranged for otherwise.
D. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 02115, Selective Clearing.
2. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.
4. Application Division 2 Landscaping Sections: Preparation of topsoil.
5. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical
specifications.
1.02 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by
Terracon dated March 13, 2001, is not intended as representation or warranty of
accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the
office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom.
1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then
determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface
conditions normally considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test
hole borings be encountered, the Contractor may apply for just compensation for
additional expenses resulting from such conditions.
C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.
t
D. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified.
Excavation and trenching includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials
excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type,
character, composition or condition thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A.
1.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from
equipment and vehicular traffic.
9 B. Protect existing trees to remain as specified in Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in
accordance with requirements of Section 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all
utilities which are to remain.
i D. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work
in the area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work.
02100-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Refer to applicable portions of Sections 02221 and 02225 for selected imported fill
materials and reuse of existing on -site fill materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section.
If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not
strictly conform to these requirements, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding
with work of this Section.
B. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil as required for grading or
new construction in areas within sitework boundaries. The stripped topsoil shall be
stored for later use in the site finish grading.
1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the
Drawings, or as directed by the Architect/ Engineer. Topsoil shall not be
stripped or existing vegetative cover disturbed in excess of these limits without
written approval of the Architect/Engineer.
C. Clearing and Tree/Brush Removal: Refer to Section 02115.
3.02 ROUGH GRADING, EXCAVATING AND COMPACTING
A. Refer to applicable portions of Sections 02221 and 02225.
3.03 FINISH GRADING
a
A. General: Provide finish grading and placing of topsoil unless arranged for otherwise.
B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually
and blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required
subgrade, except under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1 /2" of
required elevation.
C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 1' in 10', unless indicated otherwise
on the Drawings, providing effective drainage of at least 1 %, unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as
specified. Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement.
3.04 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, on -site
material, supplemented with imported material as required.
B. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.
C. Fine grade topsoil to within 1 " of finish contours eliminating rough and low areas to r
ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new
work into existing.
D. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading.
02100-2
E. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and
damage which may be caused by grading equipment.
F. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted
areas to specified tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been
compacted in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to
required density prior to further construction.
3.06 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove and dispose of debris and excess materials off of Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
02100-3
SECTION 02115
SELECTIVE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Selective clearing of existing trees, shrubs, brush and vegetative growth.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures: Tree and plant protection.
2. Section 02070, Selective Demolition.
1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall comply with any requirements of the City of Fort Collins and/or U.S.
Forest Service that govern this type of work.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and maintain chain saws, axes and other equipment as required to complete
work of this Section.
1 . Maintain saw blades in new or sharp condition to make cuts clean and smooth.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall examine the site with the Owner and Architect to verify extent of work
to be performed. Architect shall identify the trees or groups of trees to be preserved,
as shown on the Drawings, and the Contractor shall tag and protect these as specified
in Section 0 15 30.
3.02 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation identified by
the Architect to remain, as specified in Section 01530.
B. Protect tops, trunks and roots of existing vegetation to remain. Do not use heavy
equipment within branch spread.
C. Regrade around existing trees by hand when existing grade is lower than new finish
grade.
3.03 TREE AND BRUSH REMOVAL
A. General: Cut and completely remove trees, shrubs and brush not identified to be
preserved.
B. Cut trees, shrubs and brush identified to be removed maximum 12" above existing
021 15-1
grade.
C. Do not pull up, rip or otherwise damage root structures of vegetation to remain. If
excavation through roots is required, excavate by hand and cut roots with a sharp axe,
making clean, smooth, sloping cuts.
3.04 GRUBBING AND REMOVAL
A. Grub out stumps and roots of vegetation removed to minimum 12" below original
existing grade.
B. Remove cleared and grubbed trees, limbs, shrubs, uprooted stumps and surface debris
from the site.
C. Do not bury cuttings, stumps and roots or burn materials on the site.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Leave the site in a clean condition, free from branches, roots, demolished site features
or other surface debris, ready for installation of new structure and site work as required
by the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
021 15-2
SECTION 02221
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of sitework for utility trenches.
B. Cap off and seal discontinued utility services.
C. Shore and brace excavations as required.
D. Dewater excavations as necessary.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01410, Testing.
2. Section 01046, Access to Site.
3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements.
4. Section 02100, Site Preparation.
5. Section 02115, Selective Clearing.
6. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.
7. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical
specifications.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Soil Compaction Tests:
1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density
Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12 inch drop.
a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and
judgement of the testing laboratory.
b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed.
i C. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material
i . encountered or utilized.
d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity.
1 2. ASTM D2049 - Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils.
B. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine
compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source or
supplier.
1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance
with the following reference standards.
a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99.
b. ASTM D2049.
I 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by
Terracon dated March 13, 2001, is not intended as representation or warranty of
accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the
office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom.
1 . In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
0241.02 02221-1
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then
determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface
conditions normally considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test
hole borings be encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional
expenses resulting from such conditions.
C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.
D. Underground Obstructions:
1 . Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings.
However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not
known to Architect/Engineer may be encountered.
2. Notify each utility owner and request utilities be field located by surface
reference at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation.
3. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other
obstructions where conflicts might exist sufficiently in advance to permit
changes in the event of conflict.
a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict.
b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the Archi-
tect/Engineer.
4. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing
utilities and appurtenances.
5. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following
conditions shall apply:
a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials.
b. Restore to original conditions or better.
6. Clean drainage culverts so they are free of sediment after construction.
E. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified.
Excavation includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or
otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character,
composition or condition thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular
traffic.
B. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in '
accordance with requirements of Sections 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all
utilities which are to remain.
C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning or other methods
required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation.
D. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including
service utilities and pipe chases.
E. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work
in affected area until notification to resume work.
P. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost.
G. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation.
t_
1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING
rc
E
A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to
placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the
Architect/Engineer prior to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall
be at least 48 hours prior to proceeding with the next phase of work.
02221-2
B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing
laboratory submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner.
Testing fees shall be paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary
Conditions.
1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper
performance of the work.
C. Testing for Structural Excavations: Refer to Sections 01410 and 02225.
D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing
laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work
until results have been verified.
E. Compaction Tests:
1 . Utility Trenches: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate
of one (1) test for each 100 lin. ft., or fraction thereof, of trench length, unless
otherwise modified by the Soils Report.
2. Concrete Flatwork: Refer to Section 02225.
F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BEDDING MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Refer to Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
1 . Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days minimum.
B. Granular Material: Angular or crushed, washed natural stone free of shale, clay, frozen
materials and debris, graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following
limits:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
V.100
3/4" 90-100
3/8" 20-55
#4 0-10
#8 0-5
C. Select soil placed below an elevation 12" above top of pipe.
1 . Trench backfill material free from rocks, clods and stones greater than 2" in any
dimension; or
2. Granular material.
2.03 TRENCH BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Excavated or imported material free from frozen material, stumps, roots, brush, other
organic matter, cinders, peat or other corrosive material, debris and rocks or stones
greater than following dimensions:
1 . 3" in any dimension for material placed within 1' of finished surface.
2. 2" in any dimension for material placed within 1' of pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
02221-3
A. Contractor shall examine the subsurface soil conditions encountered prior to installation
of any underground utility work and verify that materials specified for utility piping,
joints, accessories and other materials are suitable for the soil conditions. Notify
Architect and Engineer of any conditions which may adversely affect the successful
installation or performance of the completed utility systems. Do not commence work
until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer.
B. Verify that stockpiled on -site fill has been approved for reuse as backfill material.
C. Ensure that trenches to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water and that
ground surfaces are not frozen.
D. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.
E. Ensure that subgrade surfaces have been compacted to density requirements for backfill
material.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil as required for underground utility systems.
B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection
C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter.
3.03 BACKFILLING
A. Support pipe or conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill.
B. Place pipe or conduit bedding and backfill in accordance with the requirements of the
Drawings and Specifications.
C. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations. Do not backfill over porous, wet or spongy
subgrade surfaces. Backfill as early as possible.
D. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6" loose
depth.
E. Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers.
F. Employ a placement method so as not to disturb or damage pipe.
G. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction
density.
H. Remove surplus backfill materials. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill
materials.
I. Tolerances:
1. Top Surfaces of Backfilling: +/- 0.1'.
3.04 COMPACTION
A. Compact trench backfill to the following minimum densities, unless the following are
superseded by the requirements of an appropriate governmental authority:
1. Areas Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor
Density (SPD) per ASTM D698-78, or as required in Section 02225, whichever
is more stringent.
2. Building Slabs, Walks and Roadways: Minimum 95% of SPD.
3. Planted Areas: Minimum of 90% of SPD.
B. Refer to Section 02225 for placing topsoil. ?
j
END OF SECTION
02221-4
SECTION 02225
STRUCTURAL EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of site work related to building
structures.
B. Prepare subgrade for building slabs, sidewalks and other improvements.
C. Shore and brace excavations as required,
D. Dewater excavations as necessary,
E. Overexcavate existing native soils below new concrete foundation structures and/or
slabs -on -grade, recondition, recompact and replace in overexcavated area.
F. Finish grading and place topsoil adjacent to structures and other areas of the site
disturbed by construction activities,
G. Scarify and compact subgrade under asphalt and/or concrete paving.
H. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01046, Access to Site.
2. Section 01410, Testing: Soils Report.
3. Section 02100, Site Preparation.
4. Section 02115, Selective Clearing.
5. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
6. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical
Specifications.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Soil Compaction Tests:
1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99: Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density
Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12 inch drop.
a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and
judgement of the testing laboratory.
b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed.
C. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material
encountered or utilized.
d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity.
2. ASTM D2049: Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils.
B. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine
compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source of
supplier.
1 . Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance
with the following reference standards.
a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99.
b. ASTM D2049.
1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by
Terracon dated March 13, 2001, is not intended as representation or warranty of
0241.02
02225-1
accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the
office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom.
1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then
determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface
conditions normally considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test
hole borings be encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional
expenses resulting from such conditions.
C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings.
D. Underground Obstructions:
1. Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings.
However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not
known to Architect/Engineer may be encountered.
2. Notify each utility owner and request utilities be field located by surface
reference using flags at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation.
3. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other
obstructions where conflicts might exist sufficiently in advance to permit
changes in the event of conflict.
a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict.
b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the Archi-
tect/Engineer.
4. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing
utilities and appurtenances.
5. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following
conditions shall apply:
a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials.
b. Restore to original conditions or better.
E. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified.
Excavation includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or
otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character,
composition or condition thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from
equipment and vehicular traffic.
B. Protect existing trees to remain as specified in Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures.
Take all necessary care to prevent compaction of existing soil within the drip line of
existing trees to remain.
C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in
accordance with requirements of Sections 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all
utilities which are to remain.
D. Protect excavations by shoring or bracing as required to maintain banks of excavation
in safe and stable condition and to protect adjacent existing and new construction.
E. Provide suitable protection against bodily injury in accordance with applicable codes and
governing authorities.
F. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structures, service lines and pipe chases which
may be damaged by excavation work.
G. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost.
H. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work
02225-2
in the area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work.
1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING
A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to
placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the
Architect/Engineer prior to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall
be at least 48 hours prior to proceeding with the next phase of work.
B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing
laboratory submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner.
Testing fees shall be paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary
Conditions.
1 . The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper
performance of the work.
C. Soils Engineer shall make an open -hole inspection of the excavation for each building
prior to the placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Soils
Engineer shall also inspect structural backfill for building foundations prior to forming
of footings or grade beams, if not supported on undisturbed soil.
D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing
laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work
until results have been verified.
E. Compaction Tests:
1. Concrete Flatwork: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the
rate of one (1) test for each 5,000 sq. ft., or portion thereof, of surface area for
interior or exterior concrete slabs -on -grade, sidewalks, aprons, or other flatwork,
unless otherwise modified by the Soils Report.
2. Foundation Walls: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the
rate of one (1) test for each 100 lin, ft., or portion thereof, of building perimeter
for compaction adjacent to building foundation walls, unless otherwise modified
by the Soils Report.
3. Utility Trenches: Refer to Section 02221.
F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove
defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Maintain and repair backfill, fill compaction and embankment settlement and make
necessary repairs to pavement, sidewalks or other structures which may be damaged
as a result of settlement for a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion and
acceptance of the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
r'
2.01 SELECTED FILL MATERIALS
A. General: Use on -site or imported soil approved by the Soils Engineer for rough fill and
for backfill against the outside of foundation walls except as specified below. Material
shall be clean, compactible earth free of frozen material, debris, deleterious or organic
substances or large rocks.
B. Structural Fill: On -site natural soils, devoid of debris or imported granular materials
approved by the Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted as specified below and
02225-3
extended to original undisturbed soil. Use under floor slabs and exterior concrete where
approved on -site material is available or where shown on the Drawings.
1. Material shall be uniformly graded of low permeability and a swell potential of
less than 1 %.
C. Imported Structural Fill: Imported fill required to supplement acceptable on -site material
shall be clean, devoid of debris and organic material, and shall conform to the following
minimum specifications:
1. Gradation, conforming with ASTM C136:
6" 100%
3" 70-100%
No. 4 Sieve 50-80%
No. 200 Sieve 60% maximum
2. Liquid Limit: 30 maximum.
3. Plasticity Index:15 maximum.
D. Imported Structural Fill: Where on -site material is expansive or otherwise unacceptable
to the Soils Engineer for use as structural backfill, imported fill shall be Class 1
structural backfill or Class 7 roadbase, conforming to Colorado Department of
Transportation standards.
E. Coarse Granular Fill: Clean, crushed, non -porous rock, crushed or uncrushed gravel
graded from 3/8" to 1-1/2".
F. Fine Granular Fill: Natural or manufactured sand and pea gravel, clean and free of
organic debris graded from 3/8" to No. 100 sieve.
G. Embankment Material: Refer to Section 02220.
H. Topsoil: Topsoil stripped and stockpiled on -site may be used if it meets the requirements
of these Sections.
I. Drainage Fill: Natural or crushed stone or gravel with 100% passing a 1 " sieve and not
more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve.
J. Aggregate Base: Refer to Section 02513 and/or 02515.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Classification of Excavation: The following definitions shall only apply when additional r
excavation is authorized by the Architect/Engineer and/or rock excavation is
encountered. Do not proceed with the work until the material has been cross -sectioned
and classified.
1. Earth Excavation: Removal and disposal of on -site soils and other materials
indicated on the Drawings, and all other material as indicated by the subsurface
soil data and not classified as rock excavation.
2. Rock Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials that cannot be excavated
without drilling, blasting or ripping or boulders larger than 1 /2 cu. yd. in volume.
B. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in f
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section.
If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not
strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with
work of this Section.
1. Ensure that modifications to the existing lawn irrigation system have been
completed, or lines shut off or capped within the area of construction, prior to
beginning work.
C. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil for subgrades for areas
02225-4
within construction boundaries as shown on the Drawings or directed by the
Architect/Engineer. The stripped topsoil shall be stored for later use in the site finish
grading. Also refer to Section 02115.
1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the
Drawings, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Topsoil shall not be stripped
or existing vegetative cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written
approval of the Architect/Engineer.
D.
Scarify subgrade where asphalt and/or concrete pavement is to be placed, to a depth of
minimum 6" and compact to 95% SPD, ASTM D698-78 at 2% wet of optimum
moisture content.
E.
Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to ensure the safety of all
workers and the public in and around excavations, including shoring, bracing and
barricades.
F.
Brace and properly support all structural elements, including foundation walls, grade
beams, and pier caps prior to beginning and continuously during backfilling and
compacting operations.
G.
Soils Engineer: The Soils Engineer shall inspect the natural soil at the bottom of
excavations for structures, prior to forming or placing foundations. Provide Engineer
with 48 hours notice (exclusive of weekends and holidays) when the areas are
expected to be ready for such inspections.
1 . Do not prepare subgrade or place concrete until such inspection has taken place
and resulting recommendations of Engineer have been carried out.
3.02 ROUGH GRADING
A.
Rough grade site to required levels, profiles, contours and elevations ready for finish
grading and surface treatment. Maintain the following:
1. Planting Areas: 6" below finished grade elevation.
2. Concrete Sidewalks: 4" below finished grade elevation, unless granular backf ill
is specified below walks.
3. Building Slabs: 8" minimum below finished slab elevation, or as required by the
Soils Report for the slab thickness and thickness of granular backfill specified.
B.
Prior to placing fill material over undisturbed subsoil, scarify surface to depth of 6",
bring to 2% wet of optimum moisture and compact as follows:
1 . Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density at
2% wet of optimum moisture content ASTM D698-78.
2. Pavement Areas: 95% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78.
3. Planting Areas: 90% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78.
C.
Place fill in lifts of 6" to 8" maximum loose layers, bring to 2% wet of OMC and
compact each layer as specified above.
D.
Stockpile existing topsoil and fill materials removed from excavation for reuse in final
grading.
E.
Contractor shall take special care in rough grading and filling of site areas which can
�-
lead to non -uniform settling and compaction.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A.
General:
1. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when
establishing grade elevations.
2. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated
`
subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Archi-
0241.02
02225-5
tect/Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by
the Architect/Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3. Under footings, foundation walls, grade beams, retaining walls or other structural
elements, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom
elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom without altering
required top elevation.
4. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified in
paragraph 3.02.C.
B. Blasting: No blasting will be permitted as a part this project.
C. Stability of Excavation:
1 . Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore
and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability
of material excavated.
2. Ensure the stability of materials under foundation structures of existing buildings
adjacent to new excavations. Shore and brace as required during excavation and
maintain until new foundations or compacted backfill materials are in place.
3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of
backfilling.
4. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original
undisturbed soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill
material extending from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings e: id I
foundations, compacting as specified in paragraph 3.07.
D. Sheeting and Shoring:
1 . Sheet, shore or brace banks and trenches not cut back to a stable slope as
necessary to prevent sliding or caving to protect workmen and the work.
2. Design and build sheeting and shoring to withstand loads which might be caused
by earth movement and pressure and to be rigid, maintaining its shape and
position.
3. Support sheeting in excavation in a manner so as not to concentrate loads or
horizontal thrusts on piping. Do not brace sheeting against the pipe.
E. Dewatering:
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from flowing into
excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
2. Conduct dewatering operations in addition to good, positive drainage and
eliminate standing water. Dewater excavations for concrete structures
extending below ground water level by lowering and maintaining the water level
beneath such excavations minimum 24".
3. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent
softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes
detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain
Pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering
system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
4. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run-off
areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions
outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as
temporary drainage ditches.
5. Keep excavations dry during subgrade preparation and continuously thereafter
until the structure is built to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic
pressure, floatation or other cause will result.
F. Material Storage:
1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials and topsoil until required
backfilling. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
02225-6
2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
3. Stockpile materials away from sidewalks, streets, alleys and other public areas
that are to remain accessible during construction. Maintain site access as
required for workers and the Owner. Refer to Section 01046 for required site
access.
4. Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as specified in paragraph
3.09.
G. Excavation for Trenches: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and
Compacting.
H. Weather Protection:
1 . Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is
less than 35' F.
2. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather.
3. Do not place backfill on frozen surfaces.
4. Do not place frozen materials, snow or ice in backfill, fill or embankment.
5. Do not deposit, stamp, roll or otherwise mechanically compact backfill in water.
3.04 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of +/- 0.10' and
extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and
removal of concrete form work, installation of services, other construction and
inspection.
B. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of
excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is
placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive
concrete.
C. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed
soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending
from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as
specified in paragraph 3.06.
D. Do not interfere with normal 451 bearing splay of any foundation.
E. Under building slabs, remove minimum 12" of existing material below finished slab
elevation. Refer to paragraph 3.05 below for overexcavation of soils below slabs -on -
grade.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A. Do not start backfilling until services and dampproofing systems have been inspected.
B. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground
surfaces are not in a frozen condition.
C. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy.
D. Compact existing subgrade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for
backfill materials.
E. Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade, backfill with subsoil and compact to required
density.
F. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations. Backfill systematically and as
early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction.
G. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8" loose depth. Use
a method so as not to disturb or damage building drainage system.
H. Maintain 2% wet of OMC of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.
I. Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls to equalize soil pressures.
02225-7
J. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs
are placed, erect necessary shoring to counteract imbalance and leave in place until
their removal is approved by Architect/Engineer.
K. Utility Trench Backfill: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
L. Building Slab Backfill: Verify removal of existing material below slabs -on -grade, as
specified in paragraph 3.02 above.
3.06 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION
A. Structural Backfill below Footings and Foundations: On -site natural soils, devoid of
debris, or imported, non -expansive granular materials approved by Soils Engineer,
mechanically compacted to a minimum of 98% of SPD.
B. Building Slabs: On -site natural soils or select granular non -expansive materials approved
by the Soils Engineer to underside of stabilizing base course, mechanically compacted
to a minimum of 95% of SPD.
C. Backfill Around Structures: Mechanically compact to a minimum of 95% of SPD.
D. Sidewalks: Subsoil or approved fill to underside of stabilizing base course. Compact
each layer of fill material at 2% wet of OMC to a minimum 95% of SPD per ASTM
D698-78.
E. Landscaped Areas: Subsoil to top of subgrade elevation, compacted to 90% of SPD.
F. Compaction Equipment: Use compaction equipment suitable for the types of soils and
materials being compacted.
1 . Sheepfoot Roller: If used provide with cleaner bars attached as to prevent the
accumulation of materials between the tamper feet.
2. Rollers: Use rollers so designed that the effective weight can be increased as
required to obtain specified compaction.
3. Vibrating plate compactors.
G. Ponding or flooding is not allowed for any compaction.
3.07 FINISH GRADING
A. Rough grade subsoil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural
settlement and compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris,
roots, branches, stones, etc. in excess of 3" in size. Remove subsoil which has been
contaminated with petroleum products.
B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually
and blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required
subgrade, except under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1 /2" of
required elevation.
C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 5% for the first 10', unless indicated
otherwise on the Drawings.
D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as
specified. Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement.
E. Place and shape subgrade for landscape berms and other artificially created earthen
features as shown on the Drawings.
3.08 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. General: Spreading of topsoil shall be the responsibility of this Section.
B. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, on -site
material, supplemented with imported material as required.
C. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather.
02225-8
D. Fine grade topsoil to within 1 " of finish contours unless otherwise required for areas
receiving sod, mulch or other landscape treatment, eliminating rough and low areas to
ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new
work into existing.
E. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading.
F. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and
damage which may be caused by grading equipment.
G. Do not change elevation of finish grade around existing trees to remain more than 6"
without specific approval of the Architect.
H. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Compaction Control: Field tests shall be conducted to determine compliance of
compaction methods with specified density in accordance with:
1. ASTM D2922 (AASHTO T238): Tests for Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate
In -Place by Nuclear Methods, or,
i 2. ASTM D1556 (AASHTO T191): Tests for Density of Soil In -Place by the Sand
Cone Method.
3. ASTM D2167 (AASHTO T205): Tests for Density of Soil In -Place by Rubber -
Balloon Method.
B. Compaction shall be to the minimum densities specified in paragraph 3.06 above.
C. Moisture Content: Compact soils within +/- 2% of optimum moisture. Add water,
harrow, disc, blade or otherwise work material as required to insure uniform moisture
content and adequate protection.
3.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted
areas to specified tolerances until Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work
of this Section by the Owner.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by
subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been
compacted in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to
required density prior to further construction.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove and waste excess materials on site, as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
02225-9
SECTION 02513
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install base and asphaltic concrete paving, extent as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Furnish and install asphaltic concrete paving to the extent required to patch existing
drives or parking lots where trenched for utility extensions or other construction.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01410, Testing.
2. Section 02220, Excavation, Filling and Grading.
3. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.
4. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Asphaltic concrete paving shall comply with the following
minimum standards:
1 . Applicable sections of the Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construc-
tion, Colorado State Department of Transportation (CDOT), current edition.
2. Applicable sections of the City of Fort Collins street pavement specifications.
3. ASTM D698: Standard Measure of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soil.
B. Design of pavement sections will allow for full range of vehicle loads anticipated.
1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by
Terracon dated March 13, 2001, is not intended as representation or warranty of
accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the
office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn therefrom.
1 . In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request
written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Asphaltic concrete materials shall not be applied when the weather conditions are such
that the application will not perform the desired function. In any case no bituminous
material shall be applied when the atmospheric temperature is below 50°F.
B. No asphaltic concrete materials shall be applied to any surface that is wet, frozen, or
in any other condition not acceptable to the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer.
1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Inspection and testing of asphalt pavement mix and testing of placed stabilizing base
course and asphalt pavement will be performed by an independent testing laboratory
submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. Testing fees shall be paid as
02513-1
specified in Section 01410.
B. Allow testing laboratory access to the mixing plant for verification of weights or
proportions, character of materials used and determination of temperatures used in the
preparation of asphalt concrete mix.
C. When and if required, the testing laboratory will perform laboratory tests on proposed
asphalt pavement mix to determine conformity with requirements.
D. The testing laboratory will perform one series of compaction tests for stabilizing base
course and for asphalt pavement. Expense of additional testing as required due to
improper performance of work shall be paid by Contractor.
E. When stabilizing base course or portions thereof has been placed and compacted in
accordance with requirements, notify the testing laboratory to perform density tests.
Do not place asphalt pavement until results have been verified and base course
installation approved.
F. Test results shall include:
1. Type of sub -base.
2. Depth and density of base.
3. Depth and density of paving.
4. Compliance with Specifications in materials used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STABILIZING BASE COURSE MATERIALS
A. Granular Base: Angular crushed natural stone free from shale, organic matter and
debris, meeting Class 5 or 6 aggregate base course requirements per Standard
Specifications for Bridge and Road Construction, Colorado State Department of
Transportation and the City of Fort Collins, minimum R-value of 80.
B. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt SS-1, SS-1 h, CSS-1 or CSS-1 h, diluted with 1 part
water with 1 part emulsified asphalt.
C. Soil Sterilant: Paving Soil Sterilant - Pramitol 25-E Herbicide.
2.02 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MATERIALS
A. Mineral Aggregate(s): Crushed rock, slag or gravel or a combination thereof, free of
clay, silt or other deleterious material, having incorporated in it limestone dust, iron
oxide or other binding material in such proportions that the whole will be a homoge-
neous material after mixing at asphalt plant.
B. Asphalt Cement: Homogeneous, free of water, 85/100 penetration grade, conforming
to Item 29 of the Colorado Department of Highways, Standard Specifications. Cement
shall not foam when heated to 1770 C.
2.03 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MIX
A. General: Combine mineral constituents in proportions to produce a mixture conforming ( ,
to Colorado Department of Highway and the City of Fort Collins specifications.
1. Minimum top 1-1/2" of asphaltic concrete pavement mixture shall meet Grade r
C or CX of CDOT standards.
2. Remaining thickness shall meet Grade G of CDOT standards.
B. Percentage by Weight of Asphalt Cement in Mixture: 5.0% to 7.0% for surface course.
C. Maintain thorough and uniform mixture.
D. Bring asphalt cement and mineral constituents to required temperatures before mixing.
02513-2
Ensure aggregates are sufficiently dry so as not to cause foaming in mixture.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PAVEMENT THICKNESSES
A. Asphaltic concrete pavements shall provide the following minimum total thicknesses:
Parking Areas Alley Drives
1 . Asphaltic Concrete:
Crushed Aggregate Base Course
Total Pavement Thickness:
2.5"
8.0"
10.5"
3"
6"
91,
or
2. Asphaltic Concrete:
Plant Mix Bituminous Base Course:
Total Pavement Thickness:
B. Refer to Soils Investigation Report for alternative
2,0„
3_5"
5.5"
pavement designs
2"
3.5"
5.5"
permitted.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment for grading, heating and applying the
asphaltic concrete and base course materials specified.
1. Equipment shall be capable of applying the materials in a uniform manner of the
specified rates of application.
B. Ensure grading of subgrade has been completed to the required elevation.
C. Ensure that subgrade has been scarified and compacted as specified in Section 02220
and/or 02225.
D. Before final rolling, shape entire section, add additional subsoil as required and compact
subgrade to provide grades, elevation and cross-section indicated. Points of finished
subgrade surface shall be within 1 " of elevations indicated.
E. Sterilize subgrade only within confines to be paved. Remove contaminated soil not to
be paved, fill and recompact. Apply sterilant at rate of 1 gallon solution to 100 sq. ft.
3.03 PLACEMENT OF STABILIZING BASE COURSE
A. Bring base course to required depth(s) and profiles indicated. Compact to 95% SPD,
ASTM D698-78 at optimum moisture content. Properly compact areas adjacent to
buildings, curbs, catch basins, manholes and other areas not accessible to rollers with
mechanical or hand -tamping devices. Ensure granular base course materials are not
contaminated with deleterious materials.
B. Ensure top surface of base course is true to lines and grades indicated, with all points
within 1 /2" of elevations indicated.
C. Add water during compaction to bring stabilizing base course materials to optimum
moisture content. When excess moisture exists, rework stabilizing base course
materials until optimum moisture content is obtained.
D. Tolerance: Maximum deviation in any direction of 1/2 " as measured with a 10' long
straight edge.
3.04 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT PAVEMENT
A. General: Place asphalt paving materials in accordance with standard specifications of
02513-3
the City of Fort Collins.
B. Place asphalt pavement at least 24 hours after priming stabilizing base course.
C. Place asphalt pavement to compacted depth indicated.
D. Do not place asphalt pavement when surface temperature is 40' F or lower. Ensure
asphalt pavement is minimum 2500 F immediately after placing and prior to initial
rolling.
E. Compact each asphalt paving course to required density, with approved rolling
equipment. Start compaction as soon as pavement will bear equipment without
checking or undue displacement.
F. Carry out compaction in three (3) operations in pass sequence. Ensure each pass of
roller overlaps previous passes to ensure smooth surface free of roller marks. Keep roller
wheels sufficiently moist so as not to pick up material. Excess material shall be
squeegeed from the surface.
G. Perform hand -tamping in areas not accessible to rolling equipment.
H. Ensure joints made during paving operations are straight, clean, vertical and free of
broken or loose material. Prime vertical surfaces of joints to ensure tight bond. Reheat
and refinish areas with loose material to satisfaction of Architect.
I. Ensure joints to adjacent horizontal concrete surfaces such as curb and gutter and area
of Portland Cement paving are straight, tight and clean. Remove any excess material
and clean concrete surfaces.
J. Ensure surface of completed asphalt pavement is true to lines, profiles and elevations
indicated and is free from depressions exceeding 1 /4" when measured with a 10'
straightedge.
K. Restrict vehicular traffic on newly paved areas until surface has cooled to atmospheric
temperature.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall verify all lines, levels and elevations of completed asphaltic concrete
paving with requirements of the Drawings and approved field modifications prior to final
inspection by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Contractor shall correct all areas of the asphaltic concrete paving not in compliance
with the Drawings or approved field modifications at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION =
02513-4
SECTION 02515
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install Portland Cement concrete paving, extent as shown on the Drawings,
unless furnished under Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. Work shall include but
is not limited to:
1. Concrete aprons and other exterior concrete work.
2. Concrete stoops, ramps and miscellaneous exterior concrete work not included
in other Sections of these Specifications, complete with required reinforcing.
B. All applicable portions of the following shall be considered as included with this Section:
1 . Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing.
3. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 01410, Testing.
2. Section 01030, Alternates.
3. Section 02220, Excavation, Filling and Grading.
4. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting.
5. Section 02513, Asphaltic Concrete Paving.
6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Standards and requirements specified under Section 03300, Cast -
in -Place Concrete, shall apply to this Section, except as otherwise modified.
t`
1.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Inspection and testing will be performed as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place
Concrete.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
t A. Requirements for hot- and cold -weather concreting and other environmental conditions
't.
shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to
bar schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating.
Store bars off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings.
B. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcing is in place,
0251 5-1
it shall be protected by suitable covering.
C. Protect exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions by suitable
covering.
PART 2 MATERIALS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. General: All materials shall be in conformance with the standard specifications of the
City of Fort Collins.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150; normal, Type II.
C. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33.
D. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone
conforming to ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes.
E. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other
deleterious substances.
F. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer.
1. Air -Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR,
Sika AER, Grace Darex AEA, Protex or equal.
2. Non -Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E.
3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D.
4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-
Lith, Grace WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete or equal.
5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
6. Calcium Chloride, or admixtures containing calcium chloride, are specifically
prohibited.
2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Bars: ASTM A615-132, 60 KSI grade, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as
indicated on the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond -reducing coatings.
1. Ties, stirrups and field bent bars, #3 or smaller may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI
grade.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish,
welded intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall not
be permitted.
C. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold -drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82.
2.03 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include
spacers, chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling,
placing and supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without
displacement of reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-
metallic devices are not acceptable.
B. Exterior Concrete Flatwork: For concrete slab -on -grade use supports with sand plates
or horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete
brickets for sup
port of reinforcement for slabs -on -grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3"
long and of proper height.
C. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting and adequately stiffened to support weight of
concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete. Also
02515-2
refer to Section 03100.
D. Isolation Joint Filler: As specified in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork,
2.04 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS
A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the Schedule in Section 03300 for specific
applications. Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials
specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified
applications, for the following criteria:
1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified.
2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure.
3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use.
4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat
or other deleterious material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
If subgrade and backfill work has been performed by others, inspect the work for
trueness of grades, compaction and depth of base material per Section 02220 or
02225. Report any deficiencies or inconsistencies with the Drawings and
Specifications to the Contractor. Ensure proper moisture content of subgrade just prior
to placement of base course and concrete. Do not install concrete over soil or base
which is unstable or frozen. Proceeding with installation of concrete work shall indicate
acceptance of site conditions.
B.
Ensure that subgrade has been scarified and compacted as specified in Sections 02220
and/or 02225.
C.
Notify any trades that may have items to be embedded in concrete or that may require
r
openings in concrete. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of concrete and to avoid delays
in the work. This work may include but is not limited to:
1. Concrete reinforcing specified in Section 03200.
r
2. Concrete accessories specified in Section 03250.
3. Miscellaneous metals specified in Section 05999.
4. Electrical work specified in Division 16.
D.
Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under
i
detrimental weather conditions.
E.
Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing any concrete. Do not
deposit any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has inspected reinforcement and
other work in place and given. permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission
to proceed shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper
placement of reinforcement and placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence
to other requirements of the Construction Documents.
F.
Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301,
except as amended by this
Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100.
3.02 PLACING REINFORCING
A. Reinforce concrete sections as indicated on the Drawings or as specified in Section
03200. Allow for minimum 1-1/2" concrete cover.
02515-3
3.03 FORMING JOINTS
A. Control Joints at Concrete Drives, Aprons and Slabs: Formed or saw -cut to produce
weakened joint minimum 1 /4 of slab thickness. Place longitudinal and transverse joints
spaced uniformly as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be cut within 24 hours of
pouring, at earliest point concrete is accessible without causing chipping at the control
joints. Joints wider than 1 /4" shall be cleaned and sealed before opening to traffic.
B. Isolation or Expansion Joints: Joints shall be full depth of slab, recessed 1 /2" below
finished concrete surface. Provide at all joints between slabs and vertical surfaces or
as indicated on the Drawings. Place joint filler as specified in Section 03100 and leave
joint recess clean to receive sealants specified in Section 07900.
3.04 DESIGN MIXES
A. General: Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Drawings or specified herein or in
Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
B. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days snail
be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect.
C. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all
parts of the work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without
excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics requi
by these specifications and the contract documents. Proportion ingredients to pros
a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and are: '
reinforcements, by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the wo.
D. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each
class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense.
E. Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or
proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete.
F. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and as specified herein.
G. Concrete Testing: Refer to Section 03300.
3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
A. General: Place Portland Cement concrete paving materials in accordance with the
standard specifications of the City of Fort Collins.
1 . Pavement and Slab Thicknesses: As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Subgrade temperature shall be minimum 401 at 6" depth prior to pouring concrete.
C. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish free of
open texturing and exposed aggregate.
D. Where paved surfaces are adjacent to walks, make curbs and gutters integral with
walks. Ensure that joints of curbs coincide with walk joints. Provide dummy join at
line between walks and curbs.
E. Provide exposed surfaces of aprons, walks, curbs and gutters with broom finish, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
F. Apply curing compound as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete, on i
finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply in accordance with manufac-
turer's written instructions and recommendations.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain the following tolerances for all concrete site work. Defective work shall be
02515-4
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for the complete construction of
required formwork for cast -in -place concrete.
B. Furnish and install anchor bolts, connectors, embedded plates, dovetail slots and
anchors and other accessories required to be cast into concrete work.
C. Furnish materials and equipment necessary to strip and remove formwork.
D. Install embedded items furnished by other Sections.
E. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 02220, Excavating, Filling and Grading.
2. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting.
3. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Forming equipment.
4. Section 03250, Concrete Accessories.
5. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Conform to the requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, "Specification
for Structural Concrete in Buildings", and ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for
Concrete Formwork", unless otherwise shown.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and engineering, construction and
maintenance of formwork, as well as its adequacy and safety.
C. Contractor shall design formwork for all loads and lateral pressures before and during
t placement of concrete. Maintain position and shape of formwork at all times. Provide
positive means of adjustment for shores and forms which rest on compressible material.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation
instructions for all form -coating materials, manufactured form systems, form ties and
accessories.
t PART PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK FOR UNEXPOSED CONCRETE
A. Form concrete which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, boards,
metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two (2)
t y edges and one (1) side for a tight fit.
B. Earthen or trenched forms shall not be used for vertical formwork.
03100-1
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Premolded Joint Fillers: In joints caulked or sealed with silicone or thiokol-based
compound, filler shall be non -bituminous, non -extruding, conforming to ASTM D1752.
In all other joints, filler shall be bituminous type conforming to ASTM D1751. Filler
shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Non -Bituminous Filler: Sonoflex F by Sonneborne or equal.
B. Premolded Fiberboard Joint Fillers (Bituminous -Type): Preformed rigid cane fiberboard
material, impregnated with a durable asphaltic compound, conforming to AASHTO-
M213. Fillers shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Bituminous Filler: Flexcell by Celotex or approved equal.
C. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings or required by the work, provide
minimum two (2) layers 1 5-lb. non -bituminous felt bond breaker.
D. Keyways: Provide nominal 1-1/2" deep keyways in all construction joints in walls, . bs
and joints between walls and slabs, unless otherwise shown.
E. Form Ties: Provide factory -fabricated break -back, removable, or snap -type form ties
designed to prevent spelling concrete surfaces on removal and which will leave no
metal within 1/2" of concrete surface. Use stainless steel, plastic -coated or hot -dipped
galvanized at exposed concrete with cone -shaped tie heads, manufactured by Dayton,
Gates, Heckman, Richmond or approved equal.
F. Release Agent: Provide commercial formulated synthetic resin or oil -type form coating
compounds that will not bond with or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not
impair subsequent finish treatment of surfaces, manufactured by Protex Pro -Coat,
Euclid Eucoslip, J & P Tex -Mastic or approved equal.
1. Contractor shall ensure that release agent is compatible with the finish
requirements of concrete to be exposed to view.
G. Metal Inserts: Provide adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron complete with
bolts, nuts, washers, 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise shown, manufactured by
Hohmann and Barnard, Gateway, Dayton or approved equal.
H. Embedded Dovetail Anchor Slots and Anchors: Refer to Section 03250, Concrete
Accessories.
I. Embedded Plates, Sleeves and Anchor Bolts: Miscellaneous embedded items furnished
by other Sections. Refer to the appropriate Section(s) in these Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225.
If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not
strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with
work of this Section, s
B. Expansion, Construction and Other Joints: Properly lay out work and make necessary
preparations for construction of specified joints in cast -in -place concrete work.
1 . Take special care to provide joints to allow for removal of sections of concrete
foundations, walls or flatwork for future construction where shown on the L
Drawings.
C. Ensure that connector plates, sleeves, dovetail anchor slots and other concrete
accessories embedded in concrete are properly located, aligned and secured prior to
placing concrete.
03100-2
3.02 FABRICATION
A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and
dimensions as shown on the Drawings and as required to obtain accurate alignment,
location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Use selected material to
obtain the required finishes. Concrete tolerances shall be as specified in Section
03300.
B. Construct formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -
in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete
placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup materials at joints as may be
required to prevent leakage. Ensure that formwork is properly braced and tied.
D. Provide openings in forms as required to accommodate other work. Accurately place
and securely support all items required to be built into the forms. Size and locations
of openings, recesses, chases and other built-in items shall be obtained from the
Contractor or the trades involved.
3.03 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES
A. Prior to each use, coat contact surfaces of forms with release agent prior to placement
of reinforcement, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with con-
crete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.
B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes
or applied coverings which are affected by agent. Refer to Section 03300 for required
concrete finishes.
C. Ensure that all debris and frost has been removed from forms before placing concrete.
D. Clean, repair and recoat surfaces of forms that are to be reused. Split, frayed,
delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing materials will not be acceptable.
E. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean
surfaces, remove fins and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure all joints
to avoid offsets.
3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK .
A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of grade beams, walls and
similar parts of work may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, providing
concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by removal operations and providing
that curing and protection operations are maintained. Refer to specific requirements
for hot- and cold -weather concreting in Section 03300.
B. Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, cure exposed concrete as
specified in Section 03300.
} C. Contractor shall verify required tolerances specified in Section 03300 immediately after
removal of forms.
D. Carefully remove fins or other minor surface defects from concrete to remain exposed
in the final construction, and leave surfaces prepared for sealers, paint, skim coats or
L- other finishes. Repair minor imperfections as specified in Section 03300.
END OF SECTION
03100-3
SECTION 03150
EXPANSION AND FIXED JOINTS
PART GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install open joints, control joints, steel joints, waterstops and isolation joints
as shown on the Drawings.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1 . Section 03100, Concrete Formwork.
2. Section 03250, Concrete Accessories: Keyed construction joints.
3. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete.
4. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawing and Samples: Prior to construction of the required joints, the Contractor
shall submit for approval by the Engineer samples of waterstops, joint fillers and joint
sealers, and shop drawings for fabricated steel joints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Premolded expansion joint filler strips shall conform to ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752.
E PART 3 EXECUTION
t.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1 . The joint materials shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2. In no case shall the reinforcement, corner protection angles or other fixed metal
items, embedded in or bonded into the concrete, be run continuously through
an expansion joint, unless shown on the Drawings.
B. Open Joints:
1. Open joints shall be constructed by the insertion and subsequent removal of
wood strip, metal plate or other approved material.
2. The insertion and removal of the template shall be accomplished without
chipping or breaking the corners of the concrete.
3. Reinforcement shall not extend across an open joint unless so specified on the
Drawings.
4. Edges of concrete adjacent to joints shall be finished to an approximate radius
of 1 /8" or as shown on the Drawings.
C. Control Joints (Expansion Joints):
1 . Control joints shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings.
03150-1